2020-Mini-Hardtop-2-Door-12 Owners Manual

LINK:
CONTENT & A-Z
OWNER'S MANUAL.
MINI HARDTOP 2 DOOR / 4 DOOR.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667112 - VI/19
WELCOME TO MINI.
OWNER'S MANUAL.
MINI HARDTOP 2 DOOR / 4 DOOR.
Thank you for choosing a MINI.
The more familiar you are with your vehicle, the better control you will have
on the road. We therefore strongly suggest:
Read this Owner's Manual before starting off in your new MINI. Also use the
Integrated Owner's Manual in your vehicle. It contains important information
on vehicle operation that will help you make full use of the technical features
available in your MINI. The manual also contains information designed to
enhance operating reliability and road safety, and to contribute to
maintaining the value of your MINI.
Any updates made after the editorial deadline can be found in the appendix of
the printed Owner's Manual for the vehicle.
Get started now. We wish you driving fun and inspiration with your MINI.
3
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Navigation, Entertainment and Communication can be called up via the

Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle.
NOTES
Information.............................................................................................................................. 8
QUICK REFERENCE
Entering.................................................................................................................................. 20
Set-up and use.......................................................................................................................24
On the road............................................................................................................................ 28
AT A GLANCE
Cockpit.................................................................................................................................... 38
Central Information Display (CID)..................................................................................42
Voice activation system.................................................................................................... 49
General settings................................................................................................................... 53
Owner's Manual media.......................................................................................................65
CONTROLS
Opening and closing........................................................................................................... 70
Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel................................................................................. 90
Transporting children safely..........................................................................................100
Driving..................................................................................................................................105
Displays................................................................................................................................ 129
Lights.................................................................................................................................... 148
Safety.....................................................................................................................................154
Driving stability control systems.................................................................................175
Driving comfort................................................................................................................. 180
Climate control...................................................................................................................200
4
Interior equipment............................................................................................................208
Storage compartments.....................................................................................................216
Cargo area............................................................................................................................220
DRIVING TIPS
Things to remember when driving.............................................................................. 228
Saving fuel...........................................................................................................................233
MOBILITY
Refueling..............................................................................................................................242
Fuel........................................................................................................................................ 244
Wheels and tires................................................................................................................246
Engine compartment........................................................................................................269
Engine oil.............................................................................................................................272
Coolant..................................................................................................................................276
Maintenance....................................................................................................................... 278
Replacing components.................................................................................................... 280
Breakdown assistance..................................................................................................... 289
Care........................................................................................................................................297
REFERENCE
Technical data.................................................................................................................... 304
Appendix..............................................................................................................................308
Everything from A to Z....................................................................................................310
© 2019 Bayerische Motoren Werke

Aktiengesellschaft
Munich, Germany
Reprinting, including excerpts, only with the written consent of BMW AG, Munich.
US English ID5 VI/19, 07 19 490
Printed on environmentally friendly paper, bleached without chlorine, suitable for recycling.
5
6
NOTES
Information ................................................................................................... 8
7
NOTES Information
Information
Using this Owner's Manual Internet
Vehicle information and general informa-
Orientation tion on MINI, e.g., on technology, are availa-
ble on the Internet: www.mini.jp.
The fastest way to find information on a
particular topic is by using the index. Vehicle information and general informa-
tion on MINI, e.g., on technology, are availa-
An initial overview of the vehicle is pro- ble on the Internet: www.miniusa.com.
vided in the first chapter.
Integrated Owner's Manual in the
Updates made after the editorial
vehicle
deadline
The Integrated Owner's Manual specifically
Due to updates after the editorial deadline, describes features and functions found in
differences may exist between the printed the vehicle. The Integrated Owner's Manual
Owner's Manual and the Integrated Owner's can be displayed on the Control Display. Ad-
Manual in the vehicle. ditional information, refer to page 65.
Notes on updates can be found in the ap-
pendix of the printed Owner's Manual for MINI Motorer’s Guide app
the vehicle.
The app specifically describes features and
functions found in the vehicle. The app can
Owner's Manual for Navigation, be displayed on smartphones and tablets.
Entertainment, Communication
The Owner's Manual for Navigation, Enter- MINI Driver’s Guide Web
tainment, and Communication can be ob- Driver’s Guide Web shows the most suita-
tained as a printed book from the service ble information for the selected vehicle. If
center. possible, only equipment and functions that
The topics are also discussed in the are actually installed in the vehicle will be
Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle. explained. Driver’s Guide Web can be dis-
played in any current browser.
Additional sources of informa-

tion
Service center
A service center will be glad to answer
questions at any time.
8
Information NOTES
Symbols and displays Vehicle features and options

Symbols in the Owner's Manual This Owner's Manual describes all models
and all standard, country-specific and op-
Symbol Meaning tional equipment that is offered in the
model series. Therefore, this Owner's
Precautions that must be Manual also describes and illustrates fea-
followed in order to avoid the tures and functions that are not available in
possibility of injury to yourself a vehicle, for example because of the se-
and to others as well as serious lected optional features or the country-spe-
damage to the vehicle. cific version.
Measures that can be taken to This also applies to safety-related functions
help protect the environment. and systems.
"..." Control Display texts used to When using these functions and systems,
select individual functions. the applicable laws and regulations must be
observed.
›...‹ Verbal instructions to use with
For any options and equipment not descri-
the voice activation system..
bed in this Owner's Manual, refer to the
››...‹‹ Responses generated by the Supplementary Owner's Manuals.
voice activation system. Your dealer’s service center is happy to an-
swer any questions that you may have
Action steps about the features and options applicable to
your vehicle.
Action steps to be carried out are presented
as a numbered list. The steps must be car-
ried out in the defined order.
Status of the Owner's Manual
1. First action step.
2. Second action step. Basic information
The manufacturer of your vehicle pursues a
Enumerations policy of constant development that is con-
Enumerations without mandatory order or ceived to ensure that our vehicles continue
alternative possibilities are presented as a to embody the highest quality and safety
list with bullet points. standards. In rare cases, therefore, the fea-
– First possibility. tures described in this Owner's Manual may
differ from those in your vehicle.
– Second possibility.
Symbols on vehicle components Updates made after the editorial

deadline
This symbol on a vehicle component
indicates that further information on the Due to updates after the editorial deadline,
component is available in the Owner's differences may exist between the printed
Manual. Owner's Manual and the Integrated Owner's
Manual in the vehicle.
9
NOTES Information
Notes on updates can be found in the ap- electronics, requires suitable maintenance
pendix of the printed Owner's Manual for and repair work.
the vehicle. The manufacturer of your vehicle recom-
mends that you entrust corresponding pro-
cedures to a MINI dealer’s service center. If
For Your Own Safety you choose to use another service facility,
the manufacturer of your vehicle recom-
Manufacturer mends use of a facility that performs work,
e.g., maintenance and repair, according to
The manufacturer of this MINI is Bayeri- MINI specifications with properly trained
sche Motoren Werke Aktionengesellschaft, personnel, referred to in the Owner's
BMW AG. Manual as "another qualified service center
or repair shop".
Intended use If work is performed improperly, for in-
Heed the following when using the vehicle: stance maintenance and repair, there is a
– Owner's Manual. risk of subsequent damage and related
– Information on the vehicle. Do not re- safety risks.
move stickers. Improperly performed work on the vehicle
– Technical vehicle data. paint can lead to a failure or malfunction of
components, e.g., the radar sensors, and
– The traffic, speed, and safety laws where thereby result in a safety risk.
the vehicle is driven.
– Vehicle documents and statutory docu- Parts and accessories
ments.
The manufacturer of your vehicle recom-
mends the use of parts and accessory prod-
Warranty ucts approved by the manufacturer of the
Your vehicle is technically configured for MINI.
the operating conditions and registration Approved parts and accessories, and advice
requirements applying in the country of on their use and installation are available
first delivery, also known as homologation. from a MINI dealer's service center.
If your vehicle is to be operated in a differ-
ent country it might be necessary to adapt MINI parts and accessories were tested by
your vehicle to potentially differing operat- the manufacturer of the MINI for their
ing conditions and registration require- safety and suitability in MINI vehicles.
ments. If your vehicle does not comply with The manufacturer of your vehicle warrants
the homologation requirements in a certain genuine MINI parts and accessories.
country you may not be able to lodge war- The manufacturer of your vehicle does not
ranty claims for your vehicle there. Further evaluate whether each individual product
information on warranty is available from a from another manufacturer can be used
service center. with MINI vehicles without presenting a
safety hazard, even if a country-specific of-
Maintenance and repairs ficial approval was issued. The manufac-
Advanced technology, for instance the use turer of your vehicle does not evaluate
of modern materials and high-performance whether these products are suitable for
MINI vehicles under all usage conditions.
10
Information NOTES
California Proposition 65 Warning your vehicle. For more information go to

For vehicles sold in California, the law re- www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-ve-
quires vehicle manufacturers to provide the hicle.
following warning:
Service and warranty
Warning We recommend that you read this publica-
Engine exhaust and a wide variety of Au- tion thoroughly. Your vehicle is covered by
tomobile components and parts, including the following warranties:
components found in the interior furnish- – New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
ings in a vehicle, contain or emit chemi-
– Rust Perforation Limited Warranty.
cals known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects and repro- – Federal Emissions System Defect War-
ductive harm. In addition, certain fluids ranty.
contained in vehicles and certain products – Federal Emissions Performance War-
of component wear contain or emit chemi- ranty.
cals known to the State of California to – California Emission Control System Lim-
cause cancer and birth defects or other re- ited Warranty.
productive harm. Battery posts, terminals
and related accessories contain lead and Detailed information about these warranties
lead compounds. Batteries also contain is listed in the Service and Warranty Infor-
other chemicals known to the State of Cali- mation Booklet for US models or in the War-
fornia to cause cancer. Wash your hands ranty and Service Guide Booklet for Cana-
after handling. Used engine oil contains dian models.
chemicals that have caused cancer in labo- Your vehicle has been specifically adapted
ratory animals. Always protect your skin and designed to meet the particular operat-
by washing thoroughly with soap and wa- ing conditions and homologation require-
ter. For more information go to ments in your country and continental re-
www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-ve- gion in order to deliver the full driving
hicle. pleasure while the vehicle is operated under
those conditions. If you wish to operate
your vehicle in another country or region,
Warning you may be required to adapt your vehicle
to meet different prevailing operating con-
Operating, servicing and maintaining a ditions and homologation requirements.
passenger vehicle or off-highway motor You should also be aware of any applicable
vehicle can expose you to chemicals in- warranty limitations or exclusions for such
cluding engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, country or region. In such case, please con-
phthalates, and lead, which are known to tact Customer Relations for further informa-
the State of California to cause cancer and tion.
birth defects or other reproductive harm.
To minimize exposure, avoid breathing ex- Maintenance
haust, do not idle the engine except as
necessary, service your vehicle in a well- Maintain the vehicle regularly to sustain
ventilated area and wear gloves or wash the road safety, operational reliability and
your hands frequently when servicing the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
11
NOTES Information
Specifications for required maintenance Operating data in the vehicle

measures: Control units process data to operate the ve-
– MINI Maintenance system. hicle.
– Service and Warranty Information Book- For example, this includes:
let for US models. – Status messages for the vehicle and its
– Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for individual components, e.g., wheel rota-
Canadian models. tional speed, wheel speed, deceleration,
If the vehicle is not maintained according to transverse acceleration, engaged safety
these specifications, this could result in belt indicator.
damaging the vehicle. Such damage is not – Ambient conditions, e.g., temperature,
covered by the MINI New Vehicle Limited rain sensor signals.
Warranty. The processed data is only processed in the
vehicle itself and generally volatile. The
data is not stored beyond the operating pe-
Data memory riod.
Electronic components, e.g. control units
General information and ignition keys, contain components for
Electronic control devices are installed in storing technical information. Information
the vehicle. Electronic control units process about the vehicle condition, component us-
data they receive from vehicle sensors, self- age, maintenance requirements events or
generate or exchange with each other. Some faults can be stored temporarily or perma-
control units are necessary for the vehicle nently.
to function safely or provide assistance dur- This information generally records the state
ing driving, for instance driver assistance of a component, a module, a system, or the
systems. Furthermore, control units facili- environment, for instance:
tate comfort or infotainment functions. – Operating states of system components,
Information about stored or exchanged data for instance, fill levels, tire inflation
can be requested from the manufacturer of pressure, battery status.
the vehicle, in a separate booklet, for exam- – Malfunctions and faults in important
ple. system components, for instance lights
and brakes.
Personal reference – Responses by the vehicle to special sit-
Each vehicle is marked with a unique vehi- uations such as airbag deployment or
cle identification number. Depending on the engagement of the driving stability con-
country, the vehicle owner can be identified trol systems.
with the vehicle identification number, li- – Information on vehicle-damaging
cense plate and corresponding authorities. events.
In addition, there are other options to track
data collected in the vehicle to the driver or The data is required to perform the control
vehicle owner, for instance via utilized unit functions. Furthermore, it also serves
services. to recognize and correct malfunctions, and
helps the vehicle manufacturer to optimize
vehicle functions.
12
Information NOTES
The majority of this data is volatile and is – Settings for the seat and steering wheel
only processed within the vehicle itself. positions.
Only a small share of data is stored in event – Suspension and climate control settings.
or fault memories based on an event.
If necessary, data can be transferred to the
When servicing, for instance during repairs, entertainment and communication system
service processes, warranty cases, and qual- of the vehicle, for instance via smartphone.
ity assurance measures, this technical infor-
This includes the following depending on
mation can be read out from the vehicle to-
the respective equipment:
gether with the vehicle identification
number. – Multimedia data such as music, films or
photos for playback in an integrated
A dealer’s service center or another quali-
multimedia system.
fied service center or repair shop can read
out the information. The socket for OBD On- – Address book data for use in conjunc-
board Diagnosis required by law in the ve- tion with an integrated hands-free sys-
hicle is used to read out the data. tem or an integrated navigation system.
The data is collected, processed, and used – Entered navigation destinations.
by the relevant organizations in the service – Data on the use of Internet services.
network. The data documents technical con- This data can be stored locally in the vehicle
ditions of the vehicle, helps with the identi- or is found on a device that has been con-
fication of the fault, compliance with war- nected to the vehicle, e.g., a smartphone,
ranty obligations and quality improvement. USB stick or MP3 player. If this data is
Furthermore, the manufacturer has product stored in the vehicle, it can be deleted at
monitoring duties to meet in line with prod- any time.
uct liability law. To fulfill these duties, the This data is only transmitted to third parties
vehicle manufacturer needs technical data upon personal request as part of the use of
from the vehicle. The data from the vehicle online services. The transmission depends
can also be used to check customer claims on the selected settings for the use of the
for warranty and guaranty. services.
Fault and event memories in the vehicle can
be reset when a dealer’s service center or Incorporation of mobile devices
another qualified service center or repair Depending on the vehicle equipment, mo-
shop performs repair or servicing work. bile devices connected to the vehicle, for in-
stance smartphones, can be controlled via
Data entry and data transfer into the vehicle control elements.
the vehicle The sound and picture from the mobile de-
vice can be played back and displayed
General information through the multimedia system. Certain in-
Depending on the vehicle equipment, com- formation is transferred to the mobile de-
fort and individual settings can be stored in vice at the same time. Depending on the
the vehicle and modified or reset at any type of incorporation, this includes, for in-
time. stance position data and other general vehi-
For example, this includes: cle information. This optimizes the way in
which selected apps, for instance navigation
or music playback, work.
13
NOTES Information
There is no further interaction between the tions and services required by law such as
mobile device and the vehicle, such as ac- Assist systems.
tive access to vehicle data.
How the data will be processed further is Services from other providers
determined by the provider of the particular When using online services from other pro-
app being used. The extent of the possible viders, these services are the responsibility
settings depends on the respective app and of the relevant provider and subject to their
the operating system of the mobile device. data privacy conditions and terms of use.
The vehicle manufacturer has no influence
Services on the content exchanged during this proc-
ess. Information on the way in which per-
General information sonal data is collected and used in relation
to services from third parties, the scope of
If the vehicle has a wireless network con-
such data, and its purpose, can be obtained
nection, this enables data to be exchanged
from the relevant service provider.
between the vehicle and other systems. The
wireless network connection is realized via
an in-vehicle transmitter and receiver unit
or via personal mobile devices brought into Event Data Recorder EDR
the vehicle, for instance smartphones. This
wireless network connection enables 'online This vehicle is equipped with an event data
functions' to be used. These include online recorder EDR. The main purpose of an EDR
services and apps supplied by the vehicle is to record, in certain crash or near crash-
manufacturer or by other providers. like situations, such as an air bag deploy-
ment or hitting a road obstacle, data that
Services from the vehicle will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s
manufacturer systems performed. The EDR is designed to
Where online services from the vehicle record data related to vehicle dynamics and
manufacturer are concerned, the corre- safety systems for a short period of time,
sponding functions are described in the ap- typically 30 seconds or less.
propriate place, for instance the Owner's The EDR in this vehicle is designed to re-
Manual or manufacturer's website. The rele- cord such data as:
vant legal information pertaining to data – How various systems in your vehicle
protection is provided there too. Personal were operating.
data may be used to perform online serv- – Whether or not the driver and passen-
ices. Data is exchanged over a secure con- ger safety belts were fastened.
nection, for instance with the IT systems of
the vehicle manufacturer intended for this – How far, if at all, the driver was depress-
purpose. ing the accelerator and/or brake pedal.
Any collection, processing, and use of per- – How fast the vehicle was traveling.
sonal data above and beyond that needed to This data can help provide a better under-
provide the services must always be based standing of the circumstances in which
on a legal permission, contractual arrange- crashes and injuries occur.
ment or consent. It is also possible to acti- EDR data is recorded by your vehicle only if
vate or deactivate the data connection as a a nontrivial crash situation occurs; no data
whole. That is, with the exception of func-
14
Information NOTES
is recorded by the EDR under normal driv- Windshield

ing conditions and no personal data, for in-
stance name, gender, age, and crash loca-
tion, are recorded.
However, other parties, such as law enforce-
ment, could combine the EDR data with the
type of personally identifying data routinely
acquired during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special
equipment is required, and access to the ve-
hicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to
the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, The vehicle identification number can also
such as law enforcement, that have the spe- be found behind the windshield.
cial equipment, can read the information if
they have access to the vehicle or the EDR.
Reporting safety defects
Vehicle identification number For US customers
The following only applies to vehicles
Engine compartment owned and operated in the US.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
which could cause a crash or could cause in-
jury or death, you should immediately in-
form the National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration NHTSA, in addition to noti-
fying MINI of North America, LLC, P.O. Box
1227, Westwood, New Jersey 07675-1227,
Telephone 1-800-831-1117.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it
The vehicle identification number can be may open an investigation, and if it finds
found in the engine compartment, on the that a safety defect exists in a group of ve-
right-hand side of the vehicle. hicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign.
However, NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between you, your
dealer, or MINI of North America, LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://
www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administra-
tor, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW.,
Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain
15
NOTES Information
other information about motor vehicle

safety from http://www.safercar.gov
For Canadian customers

Canadian customers who wish to report a
safety-related defect to Transport Canada,
Defect Investigations and Recalls, may call
the toll-free hotline 1-800-333-0510. You
can also obtain other information about mo-
tor vehicle safety from http://www.tc.gc.ca/
roadsafety.
16
Information NOTES
17
18
QUICK REFERENCE
Entering ...................................................................................................... 20
Set-up and use ........................................................................................... 24
On the road ................................................................................................. 28
19
QUICK REFERENCE Entering
Entering
Opening and closing Buttons for the central locking
system
Buttons on the vehicle key
Overview
1 Unlocking
Buttons for the central locking system.
2 Locking
3 Unlocking the tailgate
Locking
4 Panic mode
Pressing the button locks the vehi-
cle if the front doors are closed.
Unlocking the vehicle
Press the button on the vehicle key. Unlocking
Pressing the button unlocks the ve-
Depending on the settings, either only the hicle.
driver's door or all vehicle access points are
unlocked.
Panic mode
If only the driver's door is unlocked, press
the button on the vehicle key again to un- You can trigger the alarm system if you find
lock the other vehicle access points. yourself in a dangerous situation.
Press the button on the vehicle key
Press and hold the button on the ve-
and hold for at least 3 seconds.
hicle key after unlocking.
To switch off the alarm: press any button.
The windows and the glass sunroof are
opened, as long as the button on the vehicle Comfort Access
key is pressed.
Concept
Locking the vehicle The vehicle can be accessed without operat-
Press the button on the vehicle key. ing the vehicle key.
Carrying the vehicle key with you, e.g., in
All vehicle access points are locked. your pants pocket, is sufficient.
20
Entering QUICK REFERENCE
The vehicle automatically detects the vehi- – Unlock the vehicle and then press the
cle key when it is in close proximity or in button on the outside of the tailgate.
the car's interior. – Press and hold the button on the
vehicle key for approx. 1 second.
Unlocking the vehicle
Depending on the setting, the doors may
also be unlocked.
Closing
Closing the tailgate manually.
Displays and control elements
On the driver's or front passenger's door In the vicinity of the steering

handle, press the button. wheel
Locking the vehicle
1 Low beams, fog lights

2 High beams, headlight flasher, turn sig-
On the driver's or front passenger's door nal
handle, press the button. 3 Instrument cluster
4 Wiper system
Tailgate
Indicator/warning lights
unlocking
Instrument cluster
The indicator/warning lights can light up in
a variety of combinations and colors.
Several of the lights are checked for proper
functioning and light up temporarily when
the engine is started or the ignition is
switched on.
21
QUICK REFERENCE Entering
Driver's door Central Information Display (CID)

For 3-door models:
Concept
The Central Information Display (CID) com-
bines the functions of a multitude of
switches. These functions can be operated
via the Controller.
Controller
General information
The buttons can be used to open the menus
1 Power windows
directly. The Controller can be used to se-
2 Exterior mirrors lect menu items and enter the settings.
For 5-door models:
Buttons on the Controller
Button Function
Press once: calls up the main
menu.
Press twice: open recently used
menus.
Opens the Communication menu.
1 Safety switch Opens the Media/Radio menu.

2 Power windows
3 Exterior mirrors Opens destination input menu
for navigation.
All around the selector lever Opens navigation map.
Opens the previous display.
Opens the Options menu.
1 Selector lever
2 Controller with buttons
3 Parking brake
22
Entering QUICK REFERENCE
Voice activation
Using the voice activation system
Activating the voice activation system
1. Press the button on the steering

wheel.
2. Wait for the signal.
3. Say the command.
This symbol in the instrument cluster
indicates that the voice activation system is
active.
If no other commands are available, operate
the function via the Central Information
Display (CID).
Terminating the voice activation system

Press the button on the steering
wheel or ›Cancel‹.
Help on the voice activation system

– To have information on the operating
principle of the voice activation system
read out loud: ›General information on
voice control‹.
– To have help for the current menu read
out loud: ›Help‹.
Information on Emergency Requests

Do not use the voice activation system to
initiate an Emergency Request. In stressful
situations, the voice and vocal pitch can
change. This can unnecessarily delay the es-
tablishment of a phone connection.
Instead, use the SOS button close to the in-
terior mirror.
23
QUICK REFERENCE Set-up and use
Set-up and use

Seats, mirrors, and steering Adjusting the exterior mirrors
wheel
Manually adjustable seats
1 Adjusting
2 Selecting a mirror, Automatic Curb Mon-
itor
1 Forward/backward 3 Folding in and out
2 Thigh support
3 Height Adjusting the steering wheel
4 Backrest tilt In four directions
Adjusting the head restraint

Height
1. Fold the lever down.

2. Move the steering wheel to the prefer-
red height and angle to suit your seating
position.
– To raise: push the head restraint up.
3. Fold the lever back up.
– To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and
push the head restraint down.
24
Set-up and use QUICK REFERENCE
Entering the rear Navigation destination entry

1. Pull lever up to the stop.
Entering a destination via address
State/province
1. "Navigation"
2. "Enter address"
3. "State/Province?"
4. Select the country from the list.
Entering the address

2. Fold backrest forward.
The address can be entered in any order.
3. Push the seat forward. Example: entering the address via the town/
city
Original position
1. "City/Postal code?"
1. Push the seat back into the original po-
sition. 2. Enter the town/city.
2. Fold back the backrest to lock the seat. The list is narrowed down further with
each entry.
3. Select the symbol.
Infotainment 4. Select a town/city from the list.
5. If necessary, enter the street.
Radio 6. Select the street as you would the town/
city.
Control elements
7. If necessary, enter a house number.
8. Select the symbol.
9. Select a house number or range of house
numbers from the list.
Starting destination guidance

"Start guidance"
If only the town/city was entered: destina-
tion guidance is started to the town/city
1 Changing the waveband center.
2 Changing the entertainment source
3 Sound output on/off, volume Pairing the mobile phone
4 Changing the station/track After the mobile phone is paired once with
the vehicle, the mobile phone can be oper-
5 Programmable memory buttons ated using the Central Information Display
25
QUICK REFERENCE Set-up and use
(CID), the steering wheel buttons and spo- Via the Central Information Display (CID)
ken instructions. "Accept"
1. "My MINI"
Via the button on the steering wheel
2. "System settings"
Press the button.
3. "Mobile devices"
4. "Connect new device" Via the instrument cluster
The vehicle's Bluetooth name is dis- Use the OK button on the steering wheel to
played on the Control Display. select: "Accept"
5. Select the functions for which the mo-
bile phone is to be used. Dialing a number
6. To perform additional steps on the mo- 1. "Communication"
bile phone, refer to the mobile phone 2. "Dial number"
owner's manual: e.g., search for or con- 3. Select the numbers individually.
nect the Bluetooth device or a new de-
vice. 4. Select the symbol.
The Bluetooth name of the vehicle ap- Establish the connection via the additional
pears on the mobile phone display. Se- phone:
lect the Bluetooth name of the vehicle. 1. Press the button.
7. Depending on the mobile device, a con-
trol number is displayed or the control
number must be entered.
– Compare the control number dis- 2. "Call via"
played on the Control Display with
the control number on the display of Apple CarPlay preparation
the device.
Confirm the control number on the Concept
device and on the Control Display. CarPlay allows certain functions of a com-
– Enter and confirm the same control patible Apple iPhone to be used via Siri
number on the device and via the voice operation and the Central Information
Central Information Display (CID). Display (CID).
The device is connected and displayed Functional requirements
in the device list.
– Compatible iPhone.
The mobile phone is connected and will ap-
pear at the top of the list of mobile phones. iPhone 5 or later with iOS 7.1 or later.
– Corresponding mobile contract.
Using the phone – Bluetooth, WiFi, and Siri voice opera-
tion are switched on on the iPhone.
Accepting a call
Incoming call can be accepted via the Cen-
tral Information Display (CID) or the button
on the steering wheel.
26
Set-up and use QUICK REFERENCE
Switching on Bluetooth and CarPlay

Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. "Settings"
5. Select the following settings:
– "Bluetooth®"
– "Apple CarPlay"
Pairing the iPhone with CarPlay

Pair iPhone via Bluetooth with the vehicle.
Select CarPlay as the function:
"Apple CarPlay"
The iPhone is connected to the vehicle and
displayed in the device list.
27
QUICK REFERENCE On the road
On the road
Driving 3. Press the Start/Stop button.
Manual transmission: switching off

Starting and stopping the engine
1. With the vehicle at a standstill, press
the Start/Stop button.
Ignition on/off
2. Shift into first gear or reverse.
– On: press the Start/Stop
button. 3. Set the parking brake.
Most of the indicator/
Auto Start/Stop function
warning lights light up for
a varied length of time. Steptronic transmission: switches the en-
gine off automatically while stationary to
– Off: press the Start/Stop button again.
save fuel. The engine starts automatically
All indicator lights go out. when the brake pedal is released.
– Radio-ready state: when the ignition is Manual transmission: switches the engine
switched off, press the ON/OFF button off automatically while stationary to save
on the radio or when the engine is run- fuel. As soon as the clutch pedal is de-
ning, press the Start/Stop button. pressed, the engine starts automatically.
Some electronic systems/power con-
sumers remain ready for operation. Parking brake
Start/stop engine Applying

The lever automatically engages after being
Steptronic transmission: starting pulled up.
1. Depress the brake pedal.
Releasing
2. Engage selector lever position P or N.
3. Press the Start/Stop button.
Manual transmission: starting

2. Press on the clutch pedal and shift to
neutral.
Steptronic transmission: switching off Raise lever slightly, press the button and
1. When the vehicle is stationary, apply guide the lever down.
the parking brake.
2. Engage selector lever position P.
28
On the road QUICK REFERENCE
Manual transmission Steptronic transmission, Sport and

manual mode
Shifting
When shifting into 5th or 6th gear, push
the gearshift lever to the right in order to
prevent inadvertent shifting into the 3rd or
4th gear.
Reverse gear
Select only when the vehicle is stationary.
To overcome the resistance push the gear-
shift lever dynamically to the left and en- Sport program:
gage reverse gear with a forward shifting Press the selector lever to the left from se-
movement. lector lever position D.
Steptronic transmission Manual mode:
– To shift down: press the selector lever
Selector lever positions forward.
Parking position P. – To shift up: pull the selector lever rear-
wards.
R is reverse.
Neutral N.
Drive mode D.
High beams, headlight flasher, turn
signal, roadside parking light
Engage selector lever position P or R only
when the vehicle is stationary.
High beams, headlight flasher
To prevent the vehicle from creeping after
you select a drive mode or reverse, maintain
pressure on the brake pedal until you are
ready to start.
Selector lever lock

A lock prevents an inadvertent change from
selector lever position P to another selector
lever position and, depending on the trans-
mission version, inadvertent switching to
selector lever position P or R. Push the lever forward or pull it backward.
To release the lock: with the brake pedal de- – High beams on, arrow 1.
pressed, press the button on the front or The high beams light up when the low
side of the selector lever. beams are switched on.
– High beams off/headlight flasher, ar-
row 2.
29
Turn signal Lights and lighting

Light functions
Symbol Function
Front fog lights.
Automatic headlight control.
– On: press the lever past the resistance

point. Lights off.
– Off: lightly tap the lever to the resist- Daytime running lights.
ance point.
Parking lights.
– Off: press the lever past the resistance
point in the opposite direction.
– Triple turn signal activation: lightly tap Low beams.
the lever up or down.
– Brief signaling: press the lever to the re-
sistance point and hold it there for as Instrument lighting.
long as you want the turn signal to flash.
Canada: roadside parking light Wiper system

Switching the wipers on/off and brief
wipe
Switching on
To illuminate the vehicle on one side.

– On: with the ignition switched off, press
the lever either up or down past the re-
sistance point for approx. 2 seconds.
– Off: briefly press the lever to the resist-
ance point in the opposite direction. Press the lever up until the desired position
is reached.
– Resting position of the wipers: posi-
tion 0.
30
– Rain sensor: position 1. Set interval or sensitivity of the rain

– Normal wiper speed: position 2. sensor
– Fast wiper speed: position 3.
Brief wipe and switching off
Turn the thumbwheel on the wiper lever.
Cleaning the windshield

Press the lever down.
– Switching off: press the lever down until
it reaches its standard position.
– Brief wipe: press the lever down from
the standard position.
Rain sensor
Activating/deactivating Pull the lever.
Canada: wiper system

Switching the wipers on/off and brief
wipe
Switching on
To activate: press the lever up once from its

standard position, arrow 1.
To deactivate: press the lever back into the
standard position.
Tap up the lever or press it past the resist-

ance point.
31
– Normal wiper speed: tap up once. Set interval or sensitivity of the rain
– Fast wiper speed: tap up twice or tap sensor
once beyond the resistance point.
Brief wipe and switching off
Turn the thumbwheel on the wiper lever.
Cleaning the windshield

– To switch off fast wipe: press down
twice.
– To switch off normal wipe: press down
once.
– Brief wipe: press down once.
Rain sensor
Pull the lever.
Activating/deactivating
Climate control
Air conditioner
Button Function
Temperature.
Press the button on the wiper lever.
Air conditioning.
Recirculated-air mode.
32
Button Function Button Function

Controls the air flow, Defrosts and defogs the
manual. windows.
Windshield defroster.
Rear window defroster.

Controls the air distribution
manually.
Refueling
Windshield defroster.
Refueling
Automatic climate control Fuel cap

1. Grasp the fuel filler flap at the rear edge
Button Function and open it.
Temperature.
Air conditioning.
Maximum cooling.
2. Turn the fuel cap counterclockwise.
AUTO program.
3. Place the fuel cap in the bracket at-
tached to the fuel filler flap.
Recirculated-air mode.
Gasoline
Automatic recirculated-air For the best fuel efficiency, the gasoline
control AUC/recirculated- should be sulfur-free or very low in sulfur
air mode. content.
Controls the air flow, Refuel only with unleaded gasoline without
manual. metallic additives.
Information on the recommended fuel grade
can be found in the Owner's Manual.
Air distribution, manual.
33
Wheels and tires Electronic oil measurement

Tire inflation pressure specifications Requirements
A current measured value is available after
approx. 30 minutes of driving. During a
shorter trip, the status of the last, suffi-
ciently long trip is displayed.
Displaying the engine oil level

1. "My MINI"
For 5-door models: 2. "Vehicle status"
The tire inflation pressure values can be 3. "Engine oil level"
found on the sign on the door pillar. The engine oil level is displayed.
Adding engine oil

General information
Switch off the ignition and safely park the
vehicle before engine oil is added.
Adding
For 3-door models:

The tire inflation pressure values can be
found on the sign on the door pillar.
Checking the tire inflation pressure

Regularly check the tire inflation pressure
and correct it as needed:
– At least twice a month. Only add engine oil when the message is
– Before embarking on an extended trip. displayed in the instrument cluster.
Observe the quantity to be added in the
After correcting the tire inflation message.
pressure Take care not to add too much engine oil.
Reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor. Observe recommended engine oil types.
Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor.
34
Providing assistance
Hazard warning flashers
The button is located above the Control Dis-

play.
Breakdown assistance
MINI Roadside Assistance
This service can be reached around the
clock in many countries.
1. "MINI Connected"
2. "MINI Assist"
3. "MINI Roadside Assistance"
The contact to the MINI Roadside Assis-
tance is established.
A telephone number is displayed, if
needed. Select to dial the telephone
number on a connected mobile phone.
35
36
AT A GLANCE
Cockpit ........................................................................................................ 38
Central Information Display (CID) ...................................................... 42
Voice activation system ......................................................................... 49
General settings ....................................................................................... 53
Owner's Manual media ........................................................................... 65
37
AT A GLANCE Cockpit
Cockpit
Vehicle features and options instance, due to the selected options or
country versions. This also applies to safety-
related functions and systems. When using
This chapter describes all standard, country- these functions and systems, the applicable
specific and optional features offered with laws and regulations must be observed.
the series. It also describes features that are
not necessarily available in your vehicle, for
In the vicinity of the steering wheel
1 Power windows 85 Lights off

2 Exterior mirror operation 96 Daytime running lights 150
3 Buttons of the central locking sys- Parking lights 148
tem 75
4 Lights
Low beams 148
Front fog lights 151
Light switch 148
38
Cockpit AT A GLANCE
Automatic headlight con- Roadside parking lights 149

trol 149
Cornering light 150
Onboard Computer 139
High-beam Assistant 150
Instrument lighting 152
7 Instrument cluster 129
8 Steering column stalk, right
5 Steering wheel buttons, left
Wipers 112
Camera-based cruise control
Wiper on Canadian mod-
on/off 180
els 116
Cruise control on/off 186 Rain sensor 113
Rain sensor on Canadian mod-
els 116
Cruise control: to store the
speed Cleaning windows 114
Pausing, continuing cruise

control Rear window wiper in Cana-
dian models 114
Cruise control: increase speed
Rear window wiper 114
Cruise control: reduce speed

Clean the rear window 114
Camera-based cruise control:

reduce distance 9 Steering wheel buttons, right
Camera-based cruise control: Voice activation 49
increase distance
Telephone
6 Steering column stalk, left
Turn signal 111
Confirm the selection 139
High beams, head-

light flasher 111 Move selection up 139
High-beam Assistant 150

Move selection down 139
39
AT A GLANCE Cockpit
Increase volume 10 Horn, entire surface
Reduce volume 11 Adjusting the steering wheel 98

12 Unlocking the hood 270
In the vicinity of the center console
1 Hazard warning system 289 6 PDC Park Distance Con-

trol 188
Rearview camera 191
Intelligent Safety 165
Parking assistant 195
Auto Start/Stop func-
2 Control Display 42 tion 108
3 Radio/Multimedia
Start/stop the engine and
4 Glove compartment 216 switch the ignition on/
5 Climate control 200 off 105
40
Cockpit AT A GLANCE
DSC Dynamic Stability Control 8 Controller with buttons 44

175 9 Parking brake 111
MINI Driving Modes
switch 177
7 Steptronic transmission selector

lever 121
Manual transmission selector
lever 120
In the vicinity of the roofliner
1 Emergency Request, 4 Ambient light 152

SOS 290
2 Indicator light, front-seat pas- 5 Panoramic glass sunroof 87

senger airbag 157
3 Reading lights 152 6 Interior lights 152
41
AT A GLANCE Central Information Display (CID)
Central Information Display (CID)

Vehicle features and options Input and display
This chapter describes all standard, country- Letters and numbers
specific and optional features offered with
Depending on the menu, you can switch be-
tween entering upper and lower case let-
ters, numbers and characters:
instance, due to the selected options or
country versions. This also applies to safety- Symbol Function
or Change between capital and
these functions and systems, the applicable
lower-case letters.
laws and regulations must be observed.
Insert blank space.
Use voice activation.
Concept
Confirm entry.
The Central Information Display (CID) com-
bines the functions of a multitude of Without navigation system
switches. These functions can be operated Select the symbol.
via the Controller.
Entry comparison
When entering names and addresses, the
Safety information choice is narrowed down with every letter
entered and letters may be added automati-
cally.
Warning Entries are continuously compared with
Operating the integrated information sys- data stored in the vehicle.
tems and communication devices while – Only those letters are offered during en-
driving can distract from traffic. It is pos- try for which data is available.
sible to lose control of the vehicle. There is
a risk of accident. Only use the systems or – Destination search: place names can be
devices when the traffic situation allows. entered in all languages that are availa-
As warranted, stop and use the systems ble on the Control Display.
and devices while the vehicle is stationary.
Activating/deactivating the
functions
Several menu items are preceded by a
checkbox. The checkbox indicates whether
the function is activated or deactivated. Se-
lecting the menu item activates or deacti-
vates the function.
42
Central Information Display (CID) AT A GLANCE
Function is activated. Entertainment

Function is deactivated.
Symbol Meaning
Status information Bluetooth audio.
General information USB audio interface.

The status field can be found in the upper Mobile phone audio interface.
area of the Control Display. Status informa-
tion is displayed in the form of symbols. Other symbols
Radio Symbol Meaning
Symbol Meaning Check Control message.
HD Radio station is being re- The sound output has been

ceived. switched off.
Satellite radio is switched on. Encrypted connection not ac-

tive.
Telephone Request for the current vehicle
position.
Symbol Meaning Checking the current vehicle po-
Incoming or outgoing call. sition.
Missed call.
Split screen
Signal strength of cellular net-
work. General information
Symbol flashes: network search. Additional information can be displayed on
Cellular network is not available. the right side of the split screen, for in-
stance information from the Onboard Com-
Roaming is active. puter.
SMS text message received. In the divided screen view, the so-called
split screen, this information remains visi-
Message received. ble even when switching to another menu.
Reminder.
Switching the split screen on/off
Sending not possible.
1. Press the button.
2. "Split screen"
43
Selecting the display In the case of very high temperatures on

The display can be selected in menus which the Control Display, for instance due to in-
support the split screen function. tense solar radiation, the brightness may be
reduced down to complete deactivation.
1. Move the Controller to the right until Once the temperature is reduced, for in-
the split screen is selected. stance through shade or air conditioning,
2. Press the Controller. the normal functions are restored.
3. Select the desired setting.
Safety information
Specifying the number of displays
It is possible to specify the number of dis- NOTICE
plays. Objects in the area in the front of the Con-
trol Display can shift and damage the Con-
1. Move the Controller to the right until trol Display. There is a risk of damage to
the split screen is selected. property. Do not place objects in the area
2. Press the Controller. in front of the Control Display.
3. "Personalize menu"
4. Select the desired setting. Switching on/off automatically
5. Move the Controller to the left. The Control Display is switched on automat-
ically after unlocking.
In certain situations, the Control Display is
Control elements switched off automatically, for instance if
no operation is performed on the vehicle for
Overview several minutes.
Switching on/off manually

The Control Display can also be switched off
manually.

2. "Turn off control display"
Press the Controller or any button on the
Controller to switch it back on again.
1 Control Display with touchscreen
2 Controller with buttons Controller with navigation system
General information
Control Display
The buttons can be used to open the menus
directly. The Controller can be used to se-
General information
lect menu items and enter the settings.
To clean the Control Display, follow the care
instructions, refer to page 300.
44
Operation Button Function

– Turn to switch between menu items, for Opens the Communication menu.
example.
Opens the Media/Radio menu.
Opens destination input menu

for navigation.
Opens navigation map.
Opens the previous display.
– Press to select a menu item, for example.

Opens the Options menu.
Operating via the Controller

Opening the main menu
Press the button.
– Tilt in four directions to switch between

displays, for example.
The main menu is displayed.

All Central Information Display (CID) func-
tions can be called up via the main menu.
Buttons on the Controller
Button Function
Press once: calls up the main
menu.
Press twice: open recently used
menus.
45
Selecting menu items – Screen settings, for instance "Split

screen".
Highlighted menu items can be selected.
– Control options for the selected main
1. Turn the Controller until the desired menu, for instance for "Media/Radio".
menu item is highlighted.
– If applicable, further operating options
for the selected menu, for instance "Save
station".
Changing settings
Settings, such as brightness, can be entered.
1. "My MINI"
2. Press the Controller.
3. "Displays"
Changing between displays 4. "Control display"
After a menu item is selected, for instance 5. "Brightness at night"
"System settings", a new display appears. 6. Turn the Controller until the desired set-
– Move the Controller to the left. ting is displayed.
The current display closes and the previ- 7. Press the Controller.
ous display is shown.
Entering letters and numbers
– Press the button.
The previous display re-opens. Input
– Move the Controller to the right. 1. Turn the Controller: select letters or
The new display opens. numbers.
An arrow indicates that additional displays 2. : confirm entry.
can be opened.
Deleting
Opening recently used menus
Symbol Function
The recently used menus can be displayed.
Press the button twice. Press the Controller: delete
letters or number.
or Hold the Controller down: de-
Opening the Options menu lete all letters or numbers.
Press the button.
The "Options" menu is displayed.

The menu consists of various areas:
46
Using alphabetical lists

For alphabetical lists with more than 30 en-
tries, the letters for which there is an entry
are displayed at the left edge.
1. Turn the Controller to the left or right
quickly.
All letters for which there are entries
are displayed on the left edge.
2. Select the first letter of the desired en-
try. Changing between displays
The first entry of the selected letter is After a menu item is selected, a new display
displayed. opens.
An arrow indicates that additional displays
can be opened.
Operation via touchscreen – Swipe to the left.
– Tap arrow.
General information The new display opens.
The Control Display is equipped with a
touchscreen. Opening recently used menus
Touch the screen with your fingers. Do not 1. Tap on the symbol.
use any objects. 2. Tap on the symbol.
Opening the main menu Changing settings
Tap on the symbol.
Settings such as brightness can be changed
via the touchscreen.
1. "My MINI"
3. "Displays"
4. "Control display"
5. "Brightness at night"
The main menu is displayed. 6. To perform the desired setting:
All Central Information Display (CID) func- – Slide in the selected field to the right
tions can be called up via the main menu. or left, until the desired setting is
displayed.
Selecting menu items – , Tap on the symbol.
Tap the desired menu item.
47
Entering letters and numbers Storing a function

1. Select the function via the Central Infor-
Input mation Display (CID).
1. Tap the symbol on the touchscreen.
A keyboard appears in the Control Dis- 2. Press and hold the desired but-
play. ton, until a signal sounds.
2. Enter letters and numbers. Executing a function
Deleting Press the button.
The function will work immediately.
Symbol Function This means, for instance that the number is
dialed when a phone number is selected.
Tapping the symbol: deletes the
letter or number.
Tapping and holding the symbol Displaying the key assignment
all letters: deletes all letters or Touch buttons with finger. Do not wear
numbers. gloves or use objects.
The button assignment is displayed at the
Operating navigation map top edge of screen.
The navigation map can be moved using the
touchscreen.
Deleting the button assignments
1. Press buttons 1 and 6 simultaneously
Function Operation for approx. 5 seconds.
Enlarge/shrink Drag in or out with the 2. "OK"
map. fingers.
Programmable memory but-

tons
General information
The Central Information Display (CID) func-
tions can be stored on the programmable
memory buttons and called up directly, for
instance radio stations, navigation destina-
tions, phone numbers and menu entries.
Settings are stored for the driver profile
currently used.
48
Voice activation system AT A GLANCE
Voice activation system

Vehicle features and options activation system. To set the language,
refer to page 53.
This chapter describes all standard, country- – Always say commands in the language
specific and optional features offered with of the voice activation system.
instance, due to the selected options or Using the voice activation sys-
country versions. This also applies to safety- tem
laws and regulations must be observed. Activating the voice activation
system
Concept 1. Press the button on the steering

wheel.
Most functions displayed on the Control 2. Wait for the signal.
Display can be operated by voice commands 3. Say the command.
via the voice activation system. The system This symbol in the instrument cluster
supports you with announcements during indicates that the voice activation system is
input. active.
No other commands may be available. In
this case, operate the function via the Cen-
General information tral Information Display (CID).
– Functions that can only be used when Terminating the voice activation
the vehicle is stationary can only be op- system
erated via the voice activation system to
a limited extent. Press the button on the steering
– The system uses a special microphone wheel or ›Cancel‹.
on the driver's side.
– ›...‹ in the Owner's Manual denotes ver-
bal instructions to use with the voice ac- Possible commands
tivation system.
General information
Functional requirements Most menu items on the Control Display can
be spoken as commands.
Commands from other menus can also be
– A language must be set via the Control
spoken.
Display that is supported by the voice
49
AT A GLANCE Voice activation system
You can also select list entries such as Adjusting

phone list entries via voice activation. Read
these list entries out loud exactly as they
are shown in the respective list. Setting the language
The language to be used for voice activation
Displaying possible commands and system announcements can be set.
The following is displayed in the top area of Via the Central Information Display (CID):
the Control Display:
1. "My MINI"
– Some possible commands for the current
menu. 2. "System settings"
– Some possible commands from other 3. If necessary, "Language"
menus. 4. "Language:"
– Status of the voice recognition. 5. Select the desired language.
– Encrypted connection is not availa-
ble. Setting the voice dialog
You can set the system to use standard dia-
Help on the voice activation system log or a short version.
– To have information on the operating The short version of the voice dialog plays
principle of the voice activation system back short messages in abbreviated form.
read out loud: ›General information on Via the Central Information Display (CID):
voice control‹.
– To have help for the current menu read 1. "My MINI"
out loud: ›Help‹. 2. "System settings"
3. "Language"
Example: opening the tone set- 4. "Speech mode:"
tings 5. Select the desired setting.
The commands of the menu items are spo-

Speaking during voice output
ken just as they are selected via the Con- It is possible to answer during inquiries of
troller. the voice activation system. The function
can be deactivated if inquiries are often un-
1. Switch on the Entertainment sound out- desirably interrupted, for instance due to
put, if needed. background noise or talking.
2. Press the button on the steering Via the Central Information Display (CID):
wheel. 1. "My MINI"
3. ›Media and radio‹ 2. "System settings"
4. ›Tone‹ 3. "Language"
4. "Speaking during voice output"
50
Voice activation system AT A GLANCE
Activating voice recognition via System limits

the server
The voice recognition feature via the server – Certain noises can be detected and may
provides a dictation function and a natural lead to problems. Keep the doors, win-
method of entering destinations while im- dows, and glass sunroof closed.
proving the quality of voice recognition. To – Noises from the front passenger or the
use the functions, data is transmitted to a rear seat bench can impair the system.
service provider via an encrypted connec- Avoid making other noise in the vehicle
tion and stored locally there. while speaking.
Via the Central Information Display (CID): – Major language dialects can cause prob-
1. "My MINI" lems with the voice recognition feature.
Speak loud and clear.
3. "Language"
4. "Server speech recognition" Using the voice activation sys-
tem of the smartphone
Adjusting the volume
Turn the volume button during the spoken A smartphone connected to the vehicle can
instructions until the desired volume is set. be used via voice activation.
– The volume remains constant even if the Activate voice command response on the
volume of other audio sources is smartphone for this purpose.
changed.
– The volume is stored for the profile cur- 1. Press and hold the button on the
rently used. steering wheel for approx. 3 seconds.
Voice command response is activated on
the smartphone.
Information on Emergency
2. Release the button.
Requests
If activation is successful, a confirma-
tion appears on the Control Display.
Do not use the voice activation system to
initiate an Emergency Request. In stressful If it was not possible to activate voice com-
situations, the voice and vocal pitch can mand response, the list of Bluetooth devices
change. This can unnecessarily delay the es- appears on the Control Display.
tablishment of a phone connection.
Instead, use the SOS button, refer to
page 290, close to the interior mirror. Amazon Alexa Car Integration
Concept
Alexa is a digital assistant by Amazon. With
Amazon Alexa Car Integration, Alexa can be
used in the vehicle.
51
AT A GLANCE Voice activation system
General information Information about the active function is

Some of the Alexa functions are limited in displayed on the Control Display.
the vehicle to prevent any impairment of
safety while driving. Malfunction
In case of a malfunction, switch off the ve-
Functional requirement hicle and start the engine again.
– Amazon Alexa Car Integration pur-
chased via MINI Connected Store.
– The ConnectedDrive account in the ve-
hicle is the same as in the MINI Con-
nected app.
– The vehicle is connected in the MINI
Connected app.
– Amazon account and MINI account are
connected in the MINI Connected app.
– Bluetooth connection or USB connection
between vehicle and mobile device is
active.
Activation in the MINI Connected

app
The Amazon Alexa Car Integration is acti-
vated in the MINI Connected app.
Follow the instructions in the app.
Activation in the vehicle

An authorization for the use of Amazon
Alexa Car Integration is required every time
before starting a trip.
1. Authorizing Amazon Alexa Car Integra-
tion:
– Pair mobile device with the vehicle
via Bluetooth.
– Select driver profile, refer to
page 79.
2. Press the button on the steering

wheel.
3. Wait for the signal.
4. Say activation word ›Alexa‹ and desired
command.
52
General settings AT A GLANCE
General settings
Vehicle features and options 3. "Date and time"
4. "Time zone:"
This chapter describes all standard, country- 5. Select the desired setting.
The setting is stored for the driver profile
currently used.
country versions. This also applies to safety- Setting the time
related functions and systems. When using Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
3. "Date and time"
Language 4. "Time:"
5. Turn the Controller until the desired
Setting the language hours are displayed.
Via the Central Information Display (CID): 6. Press the Controller.
1. "My MINI" 7. Turn the Controller until the desired mi-
2. "System settings" nutes are displayed.
3. If necessary, "Language" 8. Press the Controller.
4. "Language:"
Setting the time format
5. Select the desired setting. Via the Central Information Display (CID):
currently used. 1. "My MINI"
Setting the voice dialog 3. "Date and time"
For voice dialog for the voice activation sys- 4. "Time format:"
tem, refer to page 50.
Time currently used.
Setting the time zone

1. "My MINI"
53
AT A GLANCE General settings
Date 4. Select the desired menu item.

Setting the date The setting is stored for the driver profile
Via the Central Information Display (CID): currently used.
1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings" Activating/deactivating the
3. "Date and time" display of the current vehicle
4. "Date:" position
5. Turn the Controller until the desired day
is displayed. Concept
6. Press the Controller. If vehicle tracking has been activated, the
7. Make the settings for the month and current vehicle position can be displayed in
year. the MINI Connected app.
Setting the date format Activating/deactivating

Via the Central Information Display (CID): Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI" 1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings" 2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Date and time" 3. "Vehicle tracking"
4. "Date format:" 4. "Vehicle tracking"
5. Select the desired setting. 5. Select the desired setting.
currently used.
popup windows
Setting the units of measure-
ment For some functions, popup windows are dis-
played automatically on the Control Display.
Some of these popup windows can be acti-
You can set the units of measurement for vated or deactivated.
some values, for example, consumption, dis-
tances and temperature. Via the Central Information Display (CID):
Via the Central Information Display (CID): 1. "My MINI"
1. "My MINI" 2. "System settings"
2. "System settings" 3. "Pop-ups"
3. "Units" 4. Select the desired setting.
currently used.
54
Control Display Messages

Brightness Concept
Via the Central Information Display (CID): The menu centrally displays all messages ar-
riving in the vehicle in list form.
1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings" General information
3. "Displays" The following messages can be displayed:
4. "Control display" – Traffic messages.
5. "Brightness at night" – Communication messages, for example
6. Turn the Controller until the desired e-mails, SMS text messages or remind-
brightness is set. ers.
– Check Control messages.
– Service requirements messages.
currently used. – Messages from the vehicle manufac-
turer.
Depending on the light conditions, the
brightness settings may not be clearly visi- Messages are additionally displayed in the
ble. status field.
Screensaver Retrieving messages

If no entries are made via the Central Infor- Via the Central Information Display (CID):
mation Display (CID), a screensaver can be 1. "Notifications"
displayed after an adjustable time.
2. Select the desired message.
The respective menu is opened, where the
1. "My MINI" message is displayed.
3. "Displays" Deleting messages
All messages, except Check Control mes-
4. "Control display"
sages or messages from the vehicle manu-
5. "Screensaver" facturer, can be deleted from the list.
6. Select the desired setting. Check Control messages or messages from
The setting is stored for the driver profile the vehicle manufacturer are displayed as
currently used. long as they are relevant.
1. "Notifications"
2. Select the desired message.
55
3. "Data privacy"
4. "Delete this notification" or "Delete all
notifications"
Deleting personal data in the
Adjusting vehicle
The following settings can be adjusted: Concept
– Select the applications, from which mes- Depending on the usage, the vehicle stores
sages will be permitted. personal data, such as stored radio stations.
– Sort the messages according to date or This personal data can be permanently de-
priority. leted via the Central Information Display
Via the Central Information Display (CID): (CID).
1. "My MINI" General information
2. "System settings" Depending on the vehicle equipment, the
3. "Notifications" following data is deleted:
4. Select the desired setting. – Driver profile settings.
– Stored radio stations.
– Stored programmable memory buttons.
Data protection – Travel and Onboard Computer informa-
tion.
Data transfer – Music hard disk.
– Navigation, for instance stored destina-
Concept tions.
The vehicle offers various functions which – Phone book.
require data to be transferred to MINI or a
service provider. The data transfer can be – Office data, for instance voice notes.
deactivated for some functions. – Login accounts.
Altogether, the deletion of the data can take
General information up to 15 minutes.
With data transfer deactivated, the respec-
tive function cannot be used. Functional requirement
Only make these settings while stationary. Data can only be deleted while stationary.
Activating/deactivating Deleting data

Follow the instructions on the Control Dis- Note and follow the instructions on the Con-
play. trol Display.
1. "My MINI" 1. Switch on the ignition.
2. "System settings" 2. "My MINI"
56
3. "System settings" Function Connec-

4. "Data privacy" tion type
5. "Delete personal data" Making calls via the hands- Bluetooth.
free system.
6. "Delete personal data"
Using phone functions via
7. "OK" the Central Information Dis-
8. Exit and lock the vehicle. play (CID).
The deletion process takes 15 minutes to Using the smartphone Of-
complete. fice functions.
If not all data was deleted, repeat the dele- Playing music from the Bluetooth
tion. smartphone or the audio or USB.
player.
Canceling deletion
Using compatible apps via Bluetooth
Start the engine to cancel deletion of the the Central Information Dis- or USB.
data. play (CID).
USB storage device: USB.
Connections Exporting and importing
driver profiles.
Concept Performing software up-
dates.
Various connection types are available for
using mobile devices in the vehicle. The Playing music.
connection type to select depends on the Playing videos from the USB.
mobile device and the desired function. smartphone or the USB stor-
age device.
General information
Using Apple CarPlay apps Bluetooth
The following overview shows possible via the Central Information and WiFi.
functions and the suitable connection types Display (CID) and voice op-
for them. The scope of functions depends on eration.
the mobile device.
The following connection types require one-
time pairing with the vehicle:
– Bluetooth.
– Apple CarPlay
Paired devices are automatically recognized
later on and connected to the vehicle.
57
Safety information – The vehicle key is in the vehicle.

– The device is ready for operation.
Warning – Bluetooth is activated on the device and
Operating the integrated information sys- in the vehicle, refer to page 58.
tems and communication devices while – Bluetooth presettings, such as visibility,
driving can distract from traffic. It is pos- may be required on the device; refer to
sible to lose control of the vehicle. There is the owner's manual of the device.
a risk of accident. Only use the systems or
devices when the traffic situation allows. Switching on Bluetooth
As warranted, stop and use the systems Via the Central Information Display (CID):
and devices while the vehicle is stationary.
1. "My MINI"
Compatible devices
3. "Mobile devices"
General information 4. "Settings"
Malfunctions may occur with devices not 5. "Bluetooth®"
listed or deviating software versions.
Activating/deactivating telephone
Displaying the vehicle identification functions
number and software part number To use all supported functions of a mobile
When looking for compatible devices, you phone, the following functions must be acti-
may have to state the vehicle identification vated prior to pairing.
number and the software part number. Via the Central Information Display (CID):
These numbers can be displayed in the ve-
hicle. 1. "My MINI"
Via the Central Information Display (CID): 2. "System settings"
1. "My MINI" 3. "Mobile devices"
2. "System settings" 4. "Settings"
3. "Mobile devices" 5. Select the desired setting:
4. "Settings" – "Office"
Activate function to transmit short
5. "Bluetooth® info"
messages, e-mails, calendars, tasks,
6. "System information" notes, and reminders to the vehicle.
A software update, refer to page 63, can Costs can be incurred by transmit-
be performed, if needed. ting all data to the vehicle.
– "Contact images"
Bluetooth connection Activate function to show the con-
tact pictures.
Functional requirements 6. Move the Controller to the left.
– Compatible device, refer to page 58,
with Bluetooth interface.
58
Pairing the mobile device with the Frequently Asked Questions

vehicle All requirements are met and all required
Via the Central Information Display (CID): steps were completed in the specified order.
Despite that, the mobile device does not
1. "My MINI" function as expected.
2. "System settings" In this case, the following explanations can
3. "Mobile devices" help:
4. "Connect new device" Why could the mobile phone not be paired
or connected?
5. Select the functions for which the de-
vice will be used: – There are too many Bluetooth devices
connected to the mobile phone or vehi-
– "Telephone" cle.
– "Bluetooth® audio" In the vehicle, delete Bluetooth connec-
– "Apps" tions with other devices.
– "Apple CarPlay" Delete all known Bluetooth connections
The vehicle's Bluetooth name is dis- from the device list on the mobile phone
played on the Control Display. and start a new device search.
6. On the mobile device, search for Blue- – The mobile phone is in power-save mode
tooth devices in the vicinity. or has only a limited remaining battery
life.
The Bluetooth name of the vehicle ap-
pears on the mobile device display. Charge the mobile phone.
Select the Bluetooth name of the vehi- Why does the mobile phone no longer re-
cle. act?
7. Depending on the mobile device, a con- – The applications on the mobile phone do
trol number is displayed or the control not function anymore.
number must be entered. Switch the mobile phone off and on
– Compare the control number dis- again.
played on the Control Display with – Possibly too high or too low ambient
the control number on the display of temperatures for mobile phone opera-
the device. tion.
Confirm the control number on the Do not subject the mobile phone to ex-
device and on the Control Display. treme ambient temperatures.
– Enter and confirm the same control Why can phone functions not be used via
number on the device and via the the Central Information Display (CID)?
Central Information Display (CID). – The mobile phone may not be properly
The device is connected and displayed configured, for instance as Bluetooth au-
in the device list. dio device.
If connection was not successful: Fre- Connect the mobile phone with the tele-
quently Asked Questions, refer to page 59. phone or additional phone function.
Why are no or not all phone book entries
displayed or why are they incomplete?
59
– Transmission of the phone book entries – Audio devices with USB port, for in-
is not yet complete. stance MP3 players.
– It is possible that only the phone book – USB storage devices.
entries of the mobile phone or the SIM Common file systems are supported.
card are transmitted. FAT32 and exFAT are the recommended
– It may not be possible to display phone formats.
book entries with special characters. A connected USB storage device will be
– It may not be possible to transmit con- supplied with charge current via the USB
tacts from social networks. interface if the device supports this. Follow
– The number of phone book entries to be the maximum charge current of the USB in-
stored is too high. terface.
– Data volume of the contact too large, for Vehicles: the following uses are possible on
instance due to stored information such USB interfaces with data transfer:
as notes. – Exporting and importing driver profiles,
Reduce the data volume of the contact. refer to page 79.
– A mobile phone is only connected as an – Playing music files via USB audio.
audio source. – Playing videos via USB video.
Reconfigure the mobile phone and con- – Loading of software updates, refer to
nect it with the telephone or additional page 63.
phone function. Follow the following when connecting:
How can the phone connection quality be – Do not use force when plugging the con-
improved? nector into the USB interface.
– The strength of the Bluetooth signal on – Use a flexible adapter cable.
the mobile phone can be adjusted, de-
– Protect the USB storage device against
pending on the mobile phone.
mechanical damage.
– Insert the mobile phone into the wire-
– Due to the large number of USB storage
less charging tray.
devices available on the market, it can-
– Adjust the volume of the microphone not be guaranteed that every device is
and loudspeakers separately. operable on the vehicle.
If all points in this list have been checked – Do not expose USB storage devices to
and the required function is still not availa- extreme environmental conditions, such
ble, contact the hotline, a dealer’s service as very high temperatures; refer to the
center or another qualified service center or owner's manual of the device.
repair shop.
– Due to the many different compression
techniques, proper playback of the me-
USB connection dia stored on the USB storage device
cannot be guaranteed in all cases.
General information
– To ensure proper transmission of the
Mobile devices with a USB port are con- stored data, do not charge a USB storage
nected to the USB interface. device via the onboard socket, when it
– Mobile phones. is connected to the USB interface.
60
– Depending on how the USB storage de- Switching on Bluetooth and CarPlay
vice is being used, settings may be re- Via the Central Information Display (CID):
quired on the USB storage device, refer
to the owner's manual of the device. 1. "My MINI"
Not compatible USB media: 2. "System settings"
– USB hard drives. 3. "Mobile devices"
– USB hubs. 4. "Settings"
– USB memory card readers with multiple 5. Select the following settings:
slots.
– "Bluetooth®"
– HFS-formatted USB storage devices.
– "Apple CarPlay"
– Devices such as fans or lamps.
Pairing the iPhone with CarPlay
Functional requirement
Pairing an iPhone with the vehicle, refer to
Compatible device, refer to page 58, with page 59, via Bluetooth
USB interface.
Select CarPlay as the function:
Connecting the device "Apple CarPlay"
Connect the USB storage device using a The iPhone is connected to the vehicle and
suitable adapter cable to a USB interface, displayed in the device list, refer to
refer to page 215. page 62.
The USB storage device is connected to the
vehicle and displayed in the device list. Operation
For more information, refer to the
Apple CarPlay preparation Integrated Owner's Manual or the Owner's
Manual for Navigation, Entertainment, Com-
Concept munication.
CarPlay allows certain functions of a com- Frequently Asked Questions
patible Apple iPhone to be used via Siri
voice operation and the Central Information All requirements are met and all required
Display (CID). steps were completed in the specified order.
Despite that, the mobile device does not
Functional requirements function as expected.
– Compatible iPhone, refer to page 58. In this case, the following explanations can
help:
iPhone 5 or later with iOS 7.1 or later.
The iPhone has already been paired with
– Corresponding mobile contract. Apple CarPlay. When a new connection is
– Bluetooth, WiFi, and Siri voice opera- established, CarPlay can no longer be se-
tion are switched on on the iPhone. lected.
– Booking the MINI Connected service: – Delete the iPhone concerned from the
Apple CarPlay preparation. device list.
61
– On the iPhone, delete the vehicle con- Configuring the device

cerned from the list of stored vehicles Functions can be activated or deactivated
under Bluetooth and under WiFi. for paired and connected devices.
– Pair the iPhone as a new device. Via the Central Information Display (CID):
If the steps listed have been carried out and
the required function is still not available: 1. "My MINI"
contact the hotline, a dealer's service center 2. "System settings"
or another qualified service center or repair 3. "Mobile devices"
shop.
4. Select the desired device.
Managing mobile devices 5. Select the desired setting.
If a function is assigned to a device, the
General information function will be deactivated where appro-
– After one-time pairing, the devices are priate for a device that is already connected
automatically recognized and recon- and the device will be disconnected.
nected when the ignition is switched on.
– The data stored on the SIM card or in Disconnecting the device
the mobile phone is transferred to the The device's connection to the vehicle is
vehicle after recognition. disconnected.
– For some devices, certain settings may The device remains paired and can be con-
be necessary, for instance authorization, nected again, refer to page 62.
see owner's manual of the device. Via the Central Information Display (CID):
Displaying the device list 1. "My MINI"
All devices paired and/or connected with 2. "System settings"
the vehicle are displayed in the device list. 3. "Mobile devices"
Via the Central Information Display (CID): 4. Select device.
1. "My MINI" 5. "Disconnect device"
Connecting the device
3. "Mobile devices"
A disconnected device can be reconnected.
A symbol indicates, for which function a de-
vice is used. Via the Central Information Display (CID):
Symbol Function 1. "My MINI"
"Telephone" 2. "System settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
"Additional telephone"
4. Select device.
"Bluetooth® audio"
5. "Connect device"
"Apps"
The functions that were assigned to the de-
"Apple CarPlay" vice before disconnecting are assigned to
the device when it is reconnected. The func-
62
tions may be deactivated on a device al- Displaying the version of the installed
ready connected. software
The software version installed in the vehicle
Deleting the device is displayed.
2. "System settings" 2. "System settings"
3. "Mobile devices" 3. "Software update"
4. Select device. 4. "Show current version"
5. "Delete device" If an update has been carried out before, se-
The device is disconnected and removed lect the desired version to display additional
from the device list. information.
Swapping the telephone and additional Updating software via USB

phone The software may only be updated when the
If two mobile phones are connected to the vehicle is stationary.
vehicle, the functions of the phone and ad- Via the Central Information Display (CID):
ditional phone can be switched.
1. Store the file for the software update in
the main directory of a USB flash drive.
1. "My MINI" 2. Connect the USB data storage to a USB
2. "System settings" interface.
3. "Mobile devices" 3. "My MINI"
4. "Settings" 4. "System settings"
5. "Swap telephone/additional tel." 5. "Software update"
6. "Update software"
Software update 7. "USB"
General information 8. "Install software"
The vehicle supports a large number of mo- 9. "OK"
bile devices, for example mobile phones and 10. Wait for the update to complete.
MP3 players. Software updates are available 11. Confirm system restart.
for many of the supported devices. The ve-
hicle is kept up-to-date via regular vehicle
software updates.
Restoring the software version
You can restore the software to the version
Contact a dealer's service center or another
prior to the last update or to its factory set-
qualified service center or repair shop for
tings.
information on available software updates.
The software may only be restored when
the vehicle is stationary.
63

1. "My MINI"
3. "Software update"
4. "Restore software"
5. – "Previous version"
The previous software version is re-
stored.
– "Default software settings"
The first software version is re-
stored.
6. "Remove software"
7. "OK"
8. Wait for restore.
9. Confirm system restart.
64
Owner's Manual media AT A GLANCE
Owner's Manual media

Vehicle features and options Supplementary Owner's Manuals
Also follow the Supplementary Owner's
This chapter describes all standard, country- Manuals, which are included in addition to
specific and optional features offered with the onboard literature.
instance, due to the selected options or Integrated Owner's Manual in
country versions. This also applies to safety- the vehicle
laws and regulations must be observed. Concept
The Integrated Owner's Manual specifically
describes features and functions found in
General information the vehicle. The Integrated Owner's Manual
can be displayed on the Control Display.
You can use the following media formats to
call up the content in the Owner's Manual: Selecting the Owner's Manual
– Printed Owner's Manual, refer to
page 65.
– Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehi- 2. "My MINI"
cle, refer to page 65. 3. "Owner's Manual"
4. Select the desired method of accessing
the contents.
Printed Owner's Manual
Scrolling through the Owner's
Concept Manual
The printed Owner's Manual describes all Turn the Controller, until the next or previ-
standard, country-specific, and optional fea- ous contents are displayed.
tures offered with the series.
Context help
General information
The Owner's Manual for Navigation, Enter- General information
tainment, and Communication can be ob- The section of the Owner's Manual relating
tained as a printed book from the service to the function that is currently selected
center. can be displayed directly.
65
AT A GLANCE Owner's Manual media
Opening via Central Information Programmable memory buttons

Display (CID)
Change directly to the Options menu from General information
the function on the Control Display: The Owner's Manual can be stored on the
programmable memory buttons and called
1. Press the button. up directly.
2. "Owner's Manual"
Storing
Opening when a Check Control 1. Select the desired entry point via the
message is displayed Central Information Display (CID):
Directly from the Check Control message on – "Quick reference"
the Control Display: – "Search by pictures"
"Owner's Manual" – "Keyword search"
– "Animations"
Changing between a function and the
Owner's Manual 2. Press and hold the desired but-
To switch from a function, for instance ton, until a signal sounds.
radio, to the Owner's Manual on the Control
Display and to alternate between the two Executing
displays: Press the button.
The Owner's Manual is displayed
1. Press the button. immediately.
2. "Owner's Manual"
3. Select the desired page in the Owner's
Manual.
4. Press the button again to return to

the last displayed function.
5. Press the button to return to the

page of the Owner's Manual displayed
last.
To alternate continuously between the last
displayed function and the last displayed
page of the Owner's Manual, repeat steps 4
& 5. Opens a new display every time.
66
Owner's Manual media AT A GLANCE
67
68
CONTROLS
Opening and closing ................................................................................ 70
Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel ..................................................... 90
Transporting children safely .............................................................. 100
Driving ...................................................................................................... 105
Displays .................................................................................................... 129
Lights ........................................................................................................ 148
Safety ......................................................................................................... 154
Driving stability control systems ..................................................... 175
Driving comfort ...................................................................................... 180
Climate control ....................................................................................... 200
Interior equipment ................................................................................ 208
Storage compartments ......................................................................... 216
Cargo area ................................................................................................ 220
69
CONTROLS Opening and closing
Opening and closing

Vehicle features and options of injury. Take the vehicle key with you so
that the vehicle can be opened from the
outside.
This chapter describes all standard, country-
not necessarily available in your vehicle, for Warning
instance, due to the selected options or Unlocking from the inside is only possible
country versions. This also applies to safety- with special knowledge.
related functions and systems. When using Persons who spend a lengthy time in the
these functions and systems, the applicable vehicle while being exposed to extreme
laws and regulations must be observed. temperatures are at risk of injury or death.
Do not lock the vehicle from the outside
when there are people in it.
Vehicle key
General information Warning
The vehicle is supplied with two vehicle Unattended children or animals in the ve-
keys with integrated key. hicle can cause the vehicle to move and
Each vehicle key contains a replaceable bat- endanger themselves and traffic, for in-
tery, refer to page 73. stance due to the following actions:
Depending on the equipment and country – Pressing the Start/Stop button.
version, various settings, refer to page 82, – Releasing the parking brake.
can be configured for the button functions. – Opening and closing the doors or
A personal driver profile, refer to page 79, windows.
for each vehicle key is stored in the vehicle. – Engaging selector lever position N.
To provide information on maintenance re- – Using vehicle equipment.
quirements, the service data is stored in the There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do
vehicle key, refer to page 278. not leave children or animals unattended
To prevent possible locking in of the vehicle in the vehicle. Take the vehicle key with
key, take the vehicle key with you when ex- you when exiting and lock the vehicle.
iting the vehicle.
Safety information
Warning
People or animals in the vehicle can lock
the doors from the inside and lock them-
selves in. In this case, the vehicle cannot
be opened from the outside. There is a risk
70
Opening and closing CONTROLS
Overview – Depending on the settings, the welcome

light and headlight courtesy delay fea-
ture, refer to page 149, are switched on.
– Exterior mirrors folded through conven-
ient closing are folded open.
– The alarm system, refer to page 83, is
switched off.
The light functions may depend on the am-
bient brightness.
1 Unlocking Convenient opening

2 Locking Press and hold the button on the ve-
3 Unlocking the tailgate hicle key after unlocking.
4 Panic mode The windows and the glass sunroof are
opened, as long as the button on the vehicle
key is pressed.
Unlocking
Press the button on the vehicle key. Locking
1. Close the driver's door.
Depending on the settings, refer to
page 82, the following access points are 2. Press the button on the vehicle
unlocked. key.
– Driver's door and fuel filler flap. The following functions are executed:
Press the button on the vehicle key – All doors, the tailgate, and the fuel filler
again to unlock the other vehicle access flap are locked.
points. – Locking is confirmed by the turn signals
– All doors, tailgate, and fuel filler flap. and the horn. This function must be ac-
In addition, the following functions are exe- tivated in the settings, refer to
cuted: page 82.
– Unlocking is confirmed by the turn sig- – The alarm system, refer to page 83, is
nals and the horn. This function must be switched on.
activated in the settings, refer to If the engine or ignition is still switched on
page 82. when you lock the vehicle, the vehicle horn
– The settings stored in the driver profile, honks twice. In this case, the engine or ig-
refer to page 79, are applied. nition must be switched off by means of the
Start/Stop button.
– The interior lights, refer to page 152,
and the MINI logo projection are
switched on, provided that the interior
lights were not switched off manually.
71
With Comfort Access: convenient Depending on the vehicle equipment and

closing country version, it is possible to specify
whether the tailgate can be unlocked with
Safety information the vehicle key and how the vehicle doors
will respond to this. To perform settings, re-
fer to page 82.
Warning
With convenient closing, body parts can Safety information
be jammed. There is a risk of injury. Make
sure that the area of movement of the Warning
doors is clear during convenient closing.
Body parts can be jammed when operating
the tailgate. There is a risk of injury. Make
Closing sure that the area of movement of the tail-
gate is clear during opening and closing.
hicle key in the area close to the ve-
hicle.
NOTICE
The windows and the glass sunroof are The tailgate swings back and up when it
closed, as long as the button on the vehicle opens. There is a risk of damage to prop-
key is pressed. erty. Make sure that the area of movement
The exterior mirrors are folded in. of the tailgate is clear during opening and
closing.
Switch on interior lights and
courtesy light
NOTICE
Press the button on the vehicle key
with the vehicle locked. Sharp-edged or pointed objects can hit the
windows and heat conductors while driv-
The MINI logo projection is also switched ing. There is a risk of damage to property.
on. Cover the edges and ensure that pointed
These functions are not available if the inte- objects do not hit the windows.
rior lights were switched off manually.
The light functions may depend on the am- Opening
bient brightness.
After locking, wait 10 seconds before press-
hicle key for approx. 1 second.
ing the button again.
The tailgate is unlocked and can be swung
Tailgate upward.
General information Panic mode

To avoid locking the vehicle key in the vehi- You can trigger the alarm system if you find
cle, do not place the remote control in the yourself in a dangerous situation.
cargo area.
72
– Press the button on the vehicle 4. Push battery in the direction of the ar-
key and hold for at least 3 sec- row using a pointed object and lift it
onds. out.
– Briefly press the button on the vehicle
key three times in succession.
To switch off the alarm: press any button.
Replacing the battery

1. Remove the integrated key from the ve-
hicle key, refer to page 75.
2. Slide the integrated key into the open-
ing and raise the cover. 5. Insert a type CR 2032 battery with the
The battery compartment is accessible. positive side facing up.
6. Insert lid and cover.
7. Push the integrated key into the vehicle
key until it engages.
Have old batteries disposed of by a
dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair
shop or take them to a collection point.
3. Slide the integrated key in the cover of Additional vehicle keys

the battery compartment and raise the Additional vehicle keys are available from a
cover. service center or another qualified service
center or repair shop.
Loss of vehicle keys

A lost vehicle key can be blocked and re-
placed by a dealer’s service center or an-
other qualified service center or repair
shop.
Malfunction
General information
A Check Control message is displayed.
Vehicle key recognition by the vehicle may
malfunction under the following circum-
stances:
73
– The battery of the vehicle key is dis- Proceed as follows in this case:
charged. For replacing the battery, refer
to page 73. 1. Hold the vehicle key against the mark
on the steering column as shown. Pay
– Interference of the radio connection attention to the display in the instru-
from transmission towers or other ment cluster.
equipment with high transmitting
power. 2. If the vehicle key is detected:
– Shielding of the vehicle key due to metal Start the engine within 10 seconds.
objects. If the vehicle key is not recognized, slightly
Do not transport the vehicle key to- change the position of the vehicle key and
gether with metal objects. repeat the procedure.
– Interference of the radio connection
from mobile phones or other electronic
Frequently Asked Questions
devices in direct proximity to the vehi- What precautions can be taken to be able to
cle key. open a vehicle with an accidentally locked
in vehicle key?
Do not transport the vehicle key to-
gether with electronic devices. – The options provided by the Remote
Services of the MINI Connected app in-
– Interference of radio transmission by a
clude the ability to lock and unlock a ve-
charging process of mobile devices, for
hicle.
instance charging of a mobile phone.
This requires an active MINI Connected
– The vehicle key is in direct proximity of
contract and the MINI Connected app
the wireless charging tray.
must be installed on a smartphone.
Place the vehicle key in a different loca-
– Unlocking the vehicle can be requested
tion.
via the MINI Connected Call Center.
In the case of interference, the vehicle can
An active MINI Connected contract is
be unlocked and locked from the outside
required.
with the integrated key, refer to page 74.
Starting the engine via emergency

detection of the Vehicle key Integrated key
General information
The driver's door can be locked and un-
locked without the vehicle key using the
integrated key.
Safety information
Warning
It is not possible to start the engine if the Unlocking from the inside is only possible
vehicle key has not been detected. with special knowledge.
74
Persons who spend a lengthy time in the To do this, slide the integrated key into
vehicle while being exposed to extreme the opening from below and remove the
temperatures are at risk of injury or death. lid.
Do not lock the vehicle from the outside
when there are people in it.
NOTICE
The door lock is permanently joined with
the door. The door handle can be moved.
When pulling the door handle with the
integrated key inserted, paint or the
integrated key can be damaged. There is a 2. Unlock or lock the door lock using the
risk of damage to property. Remove the integrated key.
integrated key before pulling the outside
door handle. The other doors must be unlocked or locked
from the inside.
Removing Alarm system

The alarm system is not switched on if the
vehicle is locked with the integrated key.
The alarm system is triggered when the
door is opened, if the vehicle has been un-
locked via the door lock.
Buttons for the central locking

system
Press the button, arrow 1, and pull out the
integrated key, arrow 2.
General information
In the event of a severe accident, the vehi-
Locking/unlocking via the door cle is automatically unlocked. The hazard
lock warning system and interior lights come on.
1. Remove lid on the door lock.
75
Overview Comfort Access

Concept
The vehicle can be accessed without operat-
ing the vehicle key.
Carrying the vehicle key with you, e.g., in
your pants pocket, is sufficient.
The vehicle automatically detects the vehi-
cle key when it is in close proximity or in
the car's interior.
Buttons for the central locking system.
General information
Locking Comfort Access supports the following
Press the button with the front functions:
doors closed. – Unlocking and locking the vehicle.
– The fuel filler flap remains unlocked. – Convenient closing.
– The vehicle is not secured against theft – Open the tailgate.
when locking.
Functional requirements
Unlocking – To lock the vehicle, the vehicle key must
be outside of the vehicle near the doors.
Press the button.
– The next unlocking and locking cycle is
not possible until after approx. 2 sec-
onds.
Opening
– Press button to unlock the doors Unlocking
together, and then pull the door handle
above the armrest.
– Front doors: pull the door handle on the
door to open the door. The other doors
remain locked.
– Back doors: pull twice on the door han-
dle on the door to be opened; the first
time unlocks the door, the second time
opens it. The other doors remain locked.
On the driver's or front passenger's outer
door handle, press the button.
Depending on the settings, refer to
page 82, only the driver's door and the
fuel filler flap may be unlocked. Unlike
when unlocking with the vehicle key, press-
76
ing the button on the outer door handle Closing

again does not unlock the other vehicle ac-
cess points. Rather, the vehicle is locked
again.
If the vehicle was locked automatically after
driving off or with the button of the central
locking system from the inside, note the fol-
lowing: if a door on a locked vehicle is
opened from the inside with the door
opener, pressing the button on the outer
door handle will first lock the vehicle again.
To unlock, the button on the outer door han- Press and hold down the button on the driv-
dle must be pressed again. er's or front passenger's outer door handle.
In addition to locking, the windows and
Locking glass sunroof will be closed.
The exterior mirrors are folded in.
To open the tailgate

General information
If the tailgate is opened via Comfort Access,
locked doors are not unlocked.
To avoid locking the vehicle key in the vehi-
cle, do not place the vehicle key in the cargo
On the driver's or front passenger's outer
area.
door handle, press the button.
Safety information
Convenient closing
Warning
Safety information
the tailgate. There is a risk of injury. Make
Warning sure that the area of movement of the tail-
With convenient closing, body parts can gate is clear during opening and closing.
be jammed. There is a risk of injury. Make
sure that the area of movement of the
doors is clear during convenient closing. NOTICE
The tailgate swings back and up when it
opens. There is a risk of damage to prop-
erty. Make sure that the area of movement
of the tailgate is clear during opening and
closing.
77
Do not transport the vehicle key to-

NOTICE gether with electronic devices.
Sharp-edged or pointed objects can hit the Wet or snowy conditions may disrupt the
windows and heat conductors while driv- locking request recognition function on the
ing. There is a risk of damage to property. door handles.
Cover the edges and ensure that pointed In the case of a malfunction, unlock and
objects do not hit the windows. lock the vehicle using the buttons of the ve-
hicle key or use the integrated key, refer to
page 74.
Opening
Tailgate
General information
To avoid locking the vehicle key in the vehi-
cle, do not place the remote control in the
cargo area.
Depending on the vehicle equipment and
Press button next on tailgate. country version, it is possible to specify
whether the tailgate can be unlocked with
The tailgate is unlocked and can be swung the vehicle key and how the vehicle doors
upward. will respond to this. To perform settings, re-
fer to page 82.
Malfunction
Vehicle key recognition by the vehicle may
Safety information
malfunction under the following circum-
stances: Warning
– The battery of the vehicle key is dis- Body parts can be jammed when operating
charged. For replacing the battery, refer the tailgate. There is a risk of injury. Make
to page 73. sure that the area of movement of the tail-
– Interference of the radio connection gate is clear during opening and closing.
from transmission towers or other
equipment with high transmitting
power. NOTICE
– Shielding of the vehicle key due to metal The tailgate swings back and up when it
objects. opens. There is a risk of damage to prop-
Do not transport the vehicle key to- erty. Make sure that the area of movement
gether with metal objects. of the tailgate is clear during opening and
– Interference of the radio connection closing.
from mobile phones or other electronic
devices in direct proximity to the vehi-
cle key.
78
With the vehicle stationary, press the but-

NOTICE ton in the driver's floor area twice in quick
Sharp-edged or pointed objects can hit the succession.
windows and heat conductors while driv-
ing. There is a risk of damage to property. Closing
Cover the edges and ensure that pointed
objects do not hit the windows.
Opening and closing

Opening from the outside
Recessed grips on the interior trim of the

tailgate can be used to conveniently pull
down the tailgate.
Driver profiles
– Without Comfort Access: unlock vehicle.
With Comfort Access: unlock the vehi- Concept
cle or have the vehicle key with you. In the driver profiles, individual settings for
Press button next on tailgate. several drivers can be stored and called up
– Press and hold the button on the again when required.
vehicle key for approx. 1 second.
Depending on the setting, the doors may General information
also be unlocked. Unlocking with the ve- There are three driver profiles with which
hicle key, refer to page 72. personal vehicle settings can be stored. Ev-
The tailgate is unlocked and can be swung ery vehicle key has been assigned one of
upward. these driver profiles.
If the vehicle is unlocked using the vehicle
Opening from the inside key, the assigned personal driver profile will
be activated. All settings stored in the
With Steptronic transmission: driver profile are automatically applied.
With the vehicle stationary, press If several drivers use their own vehicle
the button in the driver's floor area. keys, the vehicle will apply the personal set-
If the vehicle is locked, selector lever posi- tings as it is being unlocked. These settings
tion P must be engaged first. are also restored, if the vehicle has been
used in the meantime by a person with a
With manual transmission: different vehicle key.
79
Changes to the settings are automatically – Rearview camera.

stored in the driver profile currently acti- – Head-up Display.
vated.
– MINI Driving Modes.
If another driver profile is selected via the
Central Information Display (CID), the set- – Intelligent Safety.
tings stored in it will be applied automati-
cally. The new driver profile is assigned to Profile management
the vehicle key that is currently in use.
There is an additional guest profile available
Selecting a driver profile
that is not assigned to any vehicle key: it Regardless of the vehicle key in use, a dif-
can be used to apply settings in the vehicle ferent driver profile may be activated. This
without changing the personal driver pro- allows you to call up personal vehicle set-
files. tings, even if you did not unlock the vehicle
with your own remote control.
Functional requirements Via the Central Information Display (CID):
For the system to be able to identify the 1. "My MINI"
driver profile associated to a particular
driver, the detected vehicle key must be 2. "Driver profiles"
clearly allocated to the driver. 3. Select driver profile.
This is the case when: 4. "OK"
– The driver is only carrying his or her – All settings stored in the selected driver
own vehicle key. profile are automatically applied.
– The driver unlocks the vehicle. – The called-up driver profile is assigned
– The driver gets into the vehicle through to the vehicle key being used at the
the driver's door. time.
– If the driver profile is already assigned
Adjusting to a different vehicle key, this driver
The settings for the following systems and profile will apply to both vehicle keys.
functions are stored in the active profile.
The scope of storable settings depends on Using a guest profile
country and equipment. The guest profile is for individual settings
– Unlocking and locking. that are stored in none of the three personal
driver profiles.
– Lights.
– Radio.
– Instrument cluster. 1. "My MINI"
– Programmable memory buttons. 2. "Driver profiles"
– Volumes, tone. 3. "Drive off (guest)"
– Control Display. 4. "OK"
– Climate control. The guest profile cannot be renamed. It is
– Navigation. assigned to the vehicle key that is not used
at the time.
– PDC Park Distance Control.
80
Renaming a driver profile The driver profile marked with this

A personal name can be assigned to the ac- symbol can be exported.
tive driver profile to avoid confusion be- 4. "Export driver profile (USB)"
tween the driver profiles. Select USB storage device as needed.
Importing driver profiles
1. "My MINI"
Profiles stored on a USB storage device can
2. "Driver profiles" be imported via the USB interface.
3. Select driver profile. The existing settings of the active driver
The driver profile marked with this profile are overwritten with the settings of
symbol can be renamed. the imported driver profile.
4. "Change driver profile name" Via the Central Information Display (CID):
5. Enter profile name. 1. "My MINI"
6. Select the symbol. 2. "Driver profiles"
3. Select the driver profile to overwrite.
Resetting a driver profile
The driver profile marked with this
The settings of the driver profile currently symbol can be overwritten.
in use are reset to their factory settings.
4. "Import driver profile (USB)"
Select USB storage device as needed.
1. "My MINI" 5. Select the driver profile to be imported.
2. "Driver profiles"
3. Select driver profile. Displaying driver profiles during start
The driver profile marked with this The driver profiles can be displayed at each
symbol can be reset. startup to select the desired profile.
4. "Reset driver profile" Via the Central Information Display (CID):
5. "OK" 1. "My MINI"
2. "Driver profiles"
Exporting driver profiles
3. "Show driver profiles at startup"
Most settings of the active driver profile
can be exported.
System limits
Exporting is helpful when storing and re-
trieving personal settings, for instance be- A clear assignment between the vehicle key
fore delivering the vehicle to a workshop. and driver may not be possible in the fol-
The stored driver profiles can be taken into lowing cases, for example.
another vehicle. – The passenger unlocks the vehicle with
Via the Central Information Display (CID): his or her own vehicle key, but another
person is driving.
1. "My MINI" – The driver unlocks the vehicle via Com-
2. "Driver profiles" fort Access and has multiple vehicle
keys with him or her.
3. Select driver profile.
81
– The driver changes, but the vehicle is The text next to the symbol indicates
not locked and unlocked. the current setting.
– Multiple vehicle keys are located out- 5. Select the desired setting:
side of the vehicle. – "Tailgate"
Only the tailgate is unlocked.
Adjusting – "Tailgate and door(s)"
The tailgate and the doors are un-
locked.
General information
– "Tailgate opens after unlocking"
Depending on the package and country ver-
sion, various settings are available for the The vehicle must be unlocked before
vehicle key functions. the tailgate can be used with the ve-
hicle key.
These settings are stored for the driver pro-
file, refer to page 79, currently used. – "Button lock"
It is not possible to use the tailgate
Unlocking via the vehicle key.
Doors country version, this setting may not be of-
Via the Central Information Display (CID): fered.
1. "My MINI" Automatic locking

2. "Vehicle settings" Via the Central Information Display (CID):
3. "Doors/Key" 1. "My MINI"
4. "Driver's door" or "All doors" 2. "Vehicle settings"
5. Select the desired setting: 3. "Doors/Key"
– "Driver's door only"
4. Select the desired setting:
Only the driver's door and the fuel
– "Lock automatically"
filler flap are unlocked. Pressing
again unlocks the entire vehicle. The vehicle locks automatically after
a while if no door is opened after un-
– "All doors"
locking.
The entire vehicle is unlocked.
– "Lock after starting to drive"
Tailgate The vehicle locks automatically after
you drive off.
1. "My MINI" Automatic unlocking
2. "Vehicle settings" Via the Central Information Display (CID):
3. "Doors/Key" 1. "My MINI"
4. 2. "Vehicle settings"
82
3. "Doors/Key" – Locking the vehicle while a device is

4. "Unlock at end of trip" connected to the socket for the OBD On-
board-Diagnosis. For socket for the OBD
After the engine is switched off by Onboard Diagnosis, refer to page 279.
pressing the Start/Stop button, the
locked vehicle is automatically un- The alarm system signals these changes vis-
locked. ually and acoustically:
– Acoustic alarm:
Confirmation signals from the Depending on local regulations, the
vehicle acoustic alarm may be suppressed.
Via the Central Information Display (CID): – Visual alarm:
By flashing the exterior lighting.
1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings" Overview
3. "Doors/Key"
4. Deactivate or activate the desired con-
firmation signals.
– "Flash for lock/unlock"
Unlocking is signaled by two flashes,
locking by one.
– With alarm system:
"Acoustic signal for lock/unlock"
Unlocking is signaled by one honk of Indicator light on the interior mirror.
the horn.
Switching on/off
Alarm system When you unlock and lock the vehicle, ei-
ther with the vehicle key or via Comfort Ac-
cess, the alarm system is switched off and
General information on at the same time.
When the vehicle is locked, the vehicle
alarm system reacts to the following Opening the doors with the alarm
changes: system switched on
– Unauthorized opening of a door, the The alarm system is triggered when a door
hood or the tailgate. is opened if the door was unlocked using
– Movements in the car's interior. the integrated key in the door lock.
– Changes in the vehicle tilt, for instance, Switching off the alarm, refer to page 84.
during attempts at stealing a wheel or
when towing the vehicle. Opening the tailgate with the alarm
– Disconnected battery voltage. system switched on
– Improper use of the socket for Onboard The tailgate can be opened even when the
Diagnosis. alarm system is switched on.
83
After the tailgate is closed, it is locked and The alarm system responds in situations
monitored again provided the doors are such as attempts to steal a wheel or when
locked. The hazard warning system flashes the vehicle is towed.
once.
Interior motion sensor
Panic mode The windows and the glass sunroof must be
You can trigger the alarm system if you find closed for the system to function properly.
yourself in a dangerous situation.
– Press the button on the vehicle Avoiding unintentional alarms
key and hold for at least 3 sec-
onds. General information
– Briefly press the button on the vehicle The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion
key three times in succession. sensor can trigger an alarm, although no un-
authorized action occurred.
To switch off the alarm: press any button. Possible situations for an unwanted alarm:
– In automatic vehicle washes.
Signals of the indicator light
– In duplex garages.
– The indicator light flashes briefly every
2 seconds: – During transport on trains carrying ve-
hicles, at sea or on a trailer.
The alarm system is switched on.
– With animals in the vehicle.
– Indicator light flashes for approx.
10 seconds, then it flashes briefly every – When the vehicle is locked after start of
2 seconds: fueling.
Interior motion sensor and tilt alarm The tilt alarm sensor and the interior mo-
sensor are not active, as doors, hood, or tion sensor can be switched off in such sit-
tailgate are not correctly closed. Cor- uations.
rectly closed access points are secured.
When the still open access points are
Switching off the tilt alarm sensor and
closed, the interior motion sensor and interior motion sensor
tilt alarm sensor will be switched on. Press the button on the vehicle key
– The indicator light goes out after un- within 10 seconds as soon as the
locking: vehicle is locked.
The vehicle has not been tampered with. The indicator light lights up for approx.
2 seconds and then continues to flash.
– The indicator light flashes after unlock-
ing until the engine ignition is switched The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion
on, but no longer than approx. 5 mi- sensor are switched off until the vehicle is
nutes: locked again.
An alarm has been triggered.
Switching off the alarm
Tilt alarm sensor – Unlock the vehicle with the vehicle key.
The tilt of the vehicle is monitored. – Unlock the vehicle with the integrated
remote control or switch on the ignition
84
using the emergency detection of re- On 5-door models

mote control, refer to page 73.
– With Comfort Access: if you have the
vehicle key with you, unlock the vehicle
using the button on the driver's side or
passenger side door.
Power windows
General information Power windows
If an accident of a certain severity occurs,
the windows are automatically closed ex-
cept a gap. Safety switch
Safety information
Opening
Warning – Press the switch to the resistance
When operating the windows, body parts point.
and objects can be jammed. There is a risk The window opens while the switch is
of injury or risk of damage to property. being held.
Make sure that the area of movement of
the windows is clear during opening and – Press the switch beyond the resist-
closing. ance point.
The window opens automatically. Press-
ing the switch again stops the motion.
Overview
Convenient opening with the vehicle key,
refer to page 71.
On 3-door models
Closing
– Pull the switch to the resistance
point.
The window closes while the switch is
being held.
– Pull the switch beyond the resist-

ance point.
Power windows The window closes automatically if the
door is closed. Pulling the switch again
stops the motion.
Convenient closing with the vehicle key, re-
fer to page 72.
85
Closing via Comfort Access, refer to The window closes without jam protec-
page 77. tion.
Jam protection system On 5-door models: safety switch

Concept General information
The jam protection prevents objects or body The safety switch can be used to prevent
parts becoming jammed between the door children, for instance from opening and
frame and window while a window is being closing the rear windows using the
closed. switches in the rear.
If an accident of a certain severity occurs,
General information the safety function is switched off automati-
If resistance or a blockage is detected while cally.
a window is being closed, the closing action
is interrupted. Switching on/off
The window opens slightly. Press the button.
The LED lights up if the safety func-
Safety information tion is switched on.
Warning Malfunction
Accessories on the windows such as an-
tennas can impact jam protection. There is General information
a risk of injury. Do not install accessories
in the area of movement of the windows. In certain situations a window can only be
operated to a limited extent.
– After a power failure during the opening
Closing without the jam protection or closing process, the a window can
system only be operated to a limited extent. The
In case of danger from the outside or if ice system must be initialized in this case.
might prevent normal closing, proceed as – The power window motors are equipped
follows: with overheating protection. If a win-
dow is opened and closed several times
1. Pull the switch past the resistance within a short period of time, the over-
point and hold it there. heating protection switches the motor
off temporarily. Depending on the de-
The window closes with limited jam pro- gree of overheating, it may only be pos-
tection. If the closing force exceeds a sible to close the window or it may not
specific threshold, closing is inter- be possible to operate it at all.
rupted.
In this case: allow the power window
2. Pull the switch past the resistance motor to cool down.
point again within approx. 4 seconds
and hold it there.
86
Initializing the system Safety information

The system can be initialized when the ve-
hicle is stationary and the engine is run- Warning
ning.
During initialization, the affected window the glass sunroof. There is a risk of injury.
closes without jam protection. Make sure that the area of movement of
the glass sunroof is clear during opening
Warning and closing.
When operating the windows, body parts
and objects can be jammed. There is a risk
of injury or risk of damage to property.
Overview
Make sure that the area of movement of
the windows is clear during opening and
closing.
1. Open the affected window completely.
2. Pull the switch to the resistance

point and hold.
The window closes.
3. Continue holding the switch pulled Tilting the glass sunroof

to the resistance point.
Press back the switch up to or
The window opens and closes once or beyond the resistance point
twice after approx. 15 seconds, depend- and release it.
ing on the vehicle's equipment.
The glass sunroof is raised.
4. Release switch.
Opening glass sunroof

Panoramic glass sunroof
When the glass sunroof is closed
General information Press the switch back beyond
In the event of a severe accident, the glass the resistance point and re-
sunroof is automatically closed. lease it twice.
The glass sunroof is opened.
Pressing the switch again
stops the motion.
87
With the glass sunroof completely Pressing the switch again stops the mo-
raised tion.
– Slide switch back to the re-
sistance point and hold. With the glass sunroof completely
raised
The glass sunroof is
opened as long as the Press the switch forward be-
switch is pressed. yond the resistance point and
– Press the switch back beyond the resist- release it.
ance point and release it. The glass sunroof is closed.
The glass sunroof is opened.
Pressing the switch again stops the mo- Jam protection system
tion.
Concept
Comfort position
The jam protection prevents objects or body
In some models, the wind noises in the car's parts from becoming jammed between the
interior are lowest when the glass sunroof roof and glass sunroof while the glass sun-
is not fully open. In these models, the auto- roof is closing.
matic function initially only opens the glass
sunroof up to this comfort position. General information
Pressing the switch again opens the glass If resistance or a blockage is detected while
sunroof fully. the glass sunroof is being closed, the clos-
ing action is interrupted.
Closing glass sunroof The glass sunroof opens slightly.
With the glass sunroof open Closing without the jam protection
– Slide switch forward to the system
resistance point and hold.
If there is an external danger, proceed as
The glass sunroof is closed follows:
as long as the switch is
pressed and stops in the
raised position.
– Press the switch forward beyond the re-
sistance point and release it.
The glass sunroof is closed and stops in
1. Push the switch forward past the resist-
the raised position.
ance point and hold it.
Pressing the switch again stops the mo-
The glass sunroof closes with limited
tion.
jam protection. If the closing force ex-
– Press the switch forward beyond the re- ceeds a specific threshold, closing is in-
sistance point and release it twice. terrupted.
The glass sunroof is closed. 2. Push the switch forward again past the
resistance point and hold until the glass
88
sunroof closes without jam protection.

Make sure that the closing area is clear.
Initializing after a power

interruption
After a power failure during the opening or
closing process, the glass sunroof can only
be operated to a limited extent. The system
must be initialized in this case. MINI rec-
ommends having this work performed only
by a dealer's service center or another quali-
fied service center or repair shop.
89
CONTROLS Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel
Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel

Vehicle features and options
Warning
This chapter describes all standard, country- With a backrest inclined too far to the
specific and optional features offered with rear, the efficacy of the safety belt can no
the series. It also describes features that are longer be ensured. There is a risk of slid-
not necessarily available in your vehicle, for ing under the safety belt in an accident.
instance, due to the selected options or There is a risk of injuries or danger to life.
country versions. This also applies to safety- Adjust the seat prior to starting the trip.
related functions and systems. When using Adjust the backrest so that it is in the
these functions and systems, the applicable most upright position as possible and do
laws and regulations must be observed. not adjust again while driving.
Sitting safely Warning

There is a risk of jamming when moving
An ideal seating position that meets the the seats. There is a risk of injury or risk
needs of the occupants can make a vital of damage to property. Make sure that the
contribution to relaxed, fatigue-free driving. area of movement of the seat is clear prior
to any adjustment.
In the event of an accident, the correct seat-
ing position plays an important role. Follow
the information in the following chapters:
Adjusting seats
– Seats, refer to page 90.
– Safety belts, refer to page 92. Overview
– Head restraints, refer to page 94.
– Airbags, refer to page 154.
Front seats
Safety information
Warning 1 Forward/backward
Seat adjustments while driving can lead to 2 Thigh support
unexpected movements of the seat. Vehi-
3 Height
cle control could be lost. There is a risk of
accident. Only adjust the seat on the driv- 4 Backrest tilt
er's side when the vehicle is stationary.
90
Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel CONTROLS
Forward/backward Lumbar support

The curvature of the seat backrest can be
adjusted in a way that it supports the lum-
bar region of the spine. The lower back and
the spine are supported for upright posture.
Pull the lever and slide the seat in the de-

sired direction.
After releasing the lever, move the seat for-
ward or back slightly making sure it en-
gages properly. Turn the wheel in order to increase or de-
crease the curvature.
Height
Thigh support
Pull the lever up or press it down as often as

needed to reach the desired height. Pull the lever at the front of the seat and ad-
just the thigh support.
Backrest tilt
In 3-door models: entering the rear
Safety information
Warning
There is a risk of jamming when moving
the seats. There is a risk of injury or risk
of damage to property. Make sure that the
area of movement of the seat is clear prior
Pull the lever, and apply your weight to the to any adjustment.
backrest or lift it off, as necessary.
91
Front seat heating

Warning
Unexpected movements of the rear seat Overview
backrest while driving may occur if the
rear seat backrest is unlocked. Vehicle
control could be lost. There is a risk of in-
jury. Fold back and lock the rear seat back-
rests before driving.
Fold the rear seat backrest down

1. Pull lever up to the stop.
Seat heating
Switching on
Press the button once for each tem-
perature level.
The maximum temperature is reached when
three LEDs are lit.
2. Fold the rear seat backrest forward. If the trip is continued within approx.
3. Push the seat forward. 15 minutes after a stop, seat heating is acti-
vated automatically with the temperature
Original position selected last.
When GREEN Mode is activated, refer to
The driver's seat features a mechanical
page 234, the heating output is reduced.
memory function for forward/back and
backrest adjustment.
Switching off
1. Push the seat back into the original po-
sition. Press and hold the button until the
2. Fold back the backrest to lock the seat. LEDs go out.
If the backrest is folded back when the seat
is not yet in the original position, the seat
engages in the current position. In this Safety belts
case, manually adjust longitudinal direction,
refer to page 91. Number of safety belts and safety
belt buckles
The vehicle is fitted with four or five safety
belts to ensure occupants' safety. However,
they can only offer protection when ad-
justed correctly.
92
The two outer safety belt buckles of the rear occupants are wearing safety belts cor-
seat are intended for the persons sitting on rectly.
the left and right.
The center safety belt buckle of the rear
seat is intended for the person sitting in the Warning
middle. With a rear backrest that is not locked, the
protective function of the middle safety
General information belt is not guaranteed. There is a risk of
Always make sure that safety belts are be- injuries or danger to life. If you are using
ing worn by all occupants before driving off. the middle safety belt, lock the wider rear
Although airbags enhance safety by provid- seat backrest.
ing added protection, they are not a substi-
tute for safety belts.
If needed, disengage the safety belt in the Warning
rear from the belt buckle on the side. The efficacy of safety gear, including
The upper shoulder strap's anchorage point safety belts, may not be fully functional or
will be correct for adult seat occupants of fail in the following situations:
every build if the seat is correctly adjusted. – The safety belts or safety belt buckles
are damaged, soiled, or changed in
Safety information any other way.
– Belt tensioners or belt retractors
Warning were modified.
Use of a safety belt to buckle more than Safety belts can be imperceptibly damaged
one person will potentially defeat the abil- in the event of an accident. There is a risk
ity of the safety belt to serve its protective of injuries or danger to life. Do not modify
function. There is a risk of injuries or dan- safety belts, safety belt buckles, belt ten-
ger to life. Do not allow more than one per- sioners, belt retractors or belt anchors and
son to wear a single safety belt. Infants keep them clean. Have the safety belts
and children are not allowed on an occu- checked after an accident at the dealer’s
pant's lap, but must be transported and se- service center or another qualified service
cured in designated child restraint sys- center or repair shop.
tems.
Correct use of safety belts
Warning – Wear the safety belt twist-free and tight
to your body over your lap and should-
The efficacy of safety gear, including ers.
safety belts, can be limited or lost when
safety belts are fastened incorrectly. An – Wear the safety belt deep on your hips
incorrectly fastened safety belt can cause over your lap. The safety belt may not
additional injuries, for instance in the press on your stomach.
event of an accident or during braking and – Do not rub the safety belt against sharp
evasive maneuvers. There is a risk of inju- edges, or guide it or jam it in across
ries or danger to life. Make sure that all hard or fragile objects.
93
– Avoid thick clothing. Front head restraints

– Re-tighten the safety belt frequently up-
ward around your upper body.
Safety information
Buckling the safety belt
1. Guide the safety belt slowly over Warning
shoulder and hip to put it on. A missing protective effect due to re-
moved or not correctly adjusted head re-
2. Insert the tongue plate into the safety
straints can cause injuries in the head and
belt buckle. The safety belt buckle must
neck area. There is a risk of injury.
engage audibly.
– Before driving, install the removed
head restraints on the occupied seats.
– Adjust the head restraint so its center
supports the back of the head at as
close to eye level as possible.
– Adjust the distance so that the head
restraint is as close as possible to the
back of the head. Adjust the distance
via the backrest tilt as needed.
Unbuckling the safety belt Warning

1. Hold the safety belt firmly. Body parts can be jammed when moving
2. Press the red button in the belt buckle. the head restraint. There is a risk of injury.
3. Guide the safety belt back into its roll- Make sure that the area of movement is
up mechanism. clear when moving the head restraint.
Safety belt reminder for driver's

seat and front passenger seat Warning
Objects on the head restraint reduce the
Display in the instrument cluster protective effect in the head and neck
area. There is a risk of injury.
The indicator light lights up and a
signal sounds. Make sure that the – Do not use seat or head restraint cov-
safety belts are positioned correctly. ers.
The safety belt reminder can also be acti- – Do not hang objects, for instance
vated if objects are placed on the front pas- clothes hangers, directly on the head
senger seat. restraint.
– Only use accessories that have been
determined to be safe for attachment
to a head restraint.
– Do not use any accessories, for in-
stance pillows, while driving.
94
Adjusting the height: John Cooper 3. Press the button, arrow 1, and pull the
Works sport seat head restraint out completely.
The height of the head restraints cannot be
adjusted. Installing
Proceed in the reverse order to install the
Adjusting the height head restraint.
Rear head restraints

Safety information
Warning
A missing protective effect due to re-
moved or not correctly adjusted head re-
– To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and straints can cause injuries in the head and
push the head restraint down. neck area. There is a risk of injury.
– To raise: push the head restraint up. – Before driving, install the removed
After setting the height, make sure that the head restraints on the occupied seats.
head restraint engages correctly. – Adjust the head restraint so its center
supports the back of the head at as
Removing: John Cooper Works close to eye level as possible.
sport seat – Adjust the distance so that the head
restraint is as close as possible to the
The head restraints cannot be removed. back of the head. Adjust the distance
via the backrest tilt as needed.
Removing
Only remove the head restraint if no one
will be sitting in the seat in question. Warning
Body parts can be jammed when moving
the head restraint. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that the area of movement is
clear when moving the head restraint.
Warning
Objects on the head restraint reduce the
protective effect in the head and neck
1. If necessary, fold the rear seat backrest area. There is a risk of injury.
forward. – Do not use seat or head restraint cov-
2. Pull head restraint up as far as possible. ers.
95
– Do not hang objects, for instance that the head restraint engages cor-
clothes hangers, directly on the head rectly.
restraint.
– Only use accessories that have been Removing
determined to be safe for attachment
to a head restraint. Only remove the head restraint if no one
will be sitting in the seat in question.
– Do not use any accessories, for in-
stance pillows, while driving.
Adjusting the height
1. Fold down the rear seat backrest, refer

to page 222, in question.
2. Pull head restraint up against the resist-
ance.
– To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and 3. Press the button, arrow 1, and pull the
push the head restraint down. head restraint out completely.
– To raise: push the head restraint up.
After setting the height, make sure that the Installing
head restraint engages correctly. Proceed in the reverse order to install the
head restraint.
Fold down
Mirrors
Exterior mirrors
General information
The mirror on the front passenger side is
more curved than the driver's side mirror.
– To fold down: press the button, arrow 1,

and press down the head restraint, ar-
row 2.
– Forward: fold the head restraint toward
the front as far as it will go. Make sure
96
Safety information Folding in and out
Warning NOTICE
Objects reflected in the mirror are closer Depending on the vehicle width, the vehi-
than they appear. The distance to the traf- cle can be damaged in vehicle washes.
fic behind could be incorrectly estimated, There is a risk of damage to property. Be-
for instance while changing lanes. There is fore washing, fold in the mirrors by hand
a risk of accident. Estimate the distance to or with the button.
the traffic behind by looking over your
shoulder. Press the button.
Overview Folding is only possible up to a speed of ap-

prox. 15 mph/20 km/h.
Folding the mirrors in and out is helpful in
the following situations:
– In vehicle washes.
– On narrow roads.
Mirrors that were folded in are folded out
automatically at a speed of approx.
25 mph/40 km/h.
1 Adjusting Automatic heating

2 Selecting a mirror, Automatic Curb Mon- Both exterior mirrors are automatically
itor heated as needed and when the ignition is
3 Folding in and out switched on.
Automatic dimming feature

Selecting a mirror The exterior mirror on the driver's side is
To change over to the other mirror: automatically dimmed. Photocells in the
Slide the switch. car's interior mirror, refer to page 98, are
used to control this.
Adjusting electrically Automatic Curb Monitor, exterior
Press the button. mirror
The mirror movement follows the
button movement. Concept
If reverse gear is engaged, the mirror glass
Malfunction on the front passenger side is tilted down-
ward. This improves your view of the curb
In case of an electrical malfunction, adjust and other formatting issue - low-lying ob-
the mirror by pressing the edges of the mir- stacles when parking, for instance.
ror glass.
97
Activating Interior mirror, automatic dimming

feature
1. slide the switch to the driver's
side mirror position. Overview
2. Engage selector lever position R.
Deactivating
Slide the switch to the passenger's side mir-
ror position.
Interior mirror, manually dimmable

Flip lever
Photocells are used for control:
– In the mirror glass.
– On the back of the mirror.
– Keep the photocells clean.
– Do not cover the area between the inte-
rior mirror and the windshield.
To reduce the blinding effect of the interior
mirror, flip the lever forward.
Steering wheel
Turn knob
Safety information
Warning
Steering wheel adjustments while driving
can lead to unexpected steering wheel
movements. Vehicle control could be lost.
There is a risk of accident. Adjustng the
steering wheel while the vehicle is sta-
tionary only.
Turn the knob to reduce the blinding effect
by the interior mirror.
98
Adjusting
1. Fold the lever down.

2. Move the steering wheel to the prefer-
red height and angle to suit your seating
position.
3. Fold the lever back up.
99
CONTROLS Transporting children safely
Transporting children safely

The right place for children

Safety information child. Children 13 years of age or older must
wear a safety belt as soon as a suitable child
restraint system can no longer be used due
Warning to their age, weight, or size.
Unattended children or animals in the ve-
hicle can cause the vehicle to move and Safety information
endanger themselves and traffic, for in-
stance due to the following actions:
Warning
– Pressing the Start/Stop button.
The safety belt cannot be fastened cor-
– Releasing the parking brake. rectly on children shorter than 5 ft,
– Opening and closing the doors or 150 cm without suitable additional child
windows. restraint systems. The efficacy of safety
– Engaging selector lever position N. gear, including safety belts, can be limited
– Using vehicle equipment. or lost when safety belts are fastened in-
correctly. An incorrectly fastened safety
There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do belt can cause additional injuries, for in-
not leave children or animals unattended stance in the event of an accident or dur-
in the vehicle. Take the vehicle key with ing braking and evasive maneuvers. There
you when exiting and lock the vehicle. is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Se-
cure children shorter than 5 ft, 150 cm us-
ing suitable child restraint systems.
Always transport children in the
rear seat
Children on the front passenger
General information seat
Accident research shows that the safest
place for children is in the rear seat. General information
Transport children younger than 13 years of Before using a child restraint system on the
age or shorter than 5 ft/150 cm only in the front passenger seat, ensure that the front,
rear seat in suitable child restraint systems knee, and side airbags on the front passen-
designed for the age, weight and size of the ger side are deactivated. For automatic de-
100
Transporting children safely CONTROLS
activation of front-seat passenger airbags, Move the front passenger seat as far up as
refer to page 156. possible before folding down the backrest.
Safety information Safety information
Warning Warning
Active front-seat passenger airbags can in- The protective effect of child restraint sys-
jure a child in a child restraint system tems and their fastening systems which
when the airbags are activated. There is a have been damaged or exposed to an acci-
risk of injury. Make sure that the front- dent can be limited or lost. A child cannot
seat passenger airbags are deactivated and be properly restrained in the event of an
that the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indica- accident or braking and evasive maneu-
tor light lights up. vers. There is a risk of injuries or danger
to life.
Do not use child restraint systems which
Warning have been damaged or exposed to an acci-
The stability of the child restraint system dent.
is limited or compromised with incorrect If a child restraint system and its fasten-
seat adjustment or improper installation of ing system has been damaged or exposed
the child seat. There is a risk of injuries or to an accident, have these systems
danger to life. Make sure that the child re- checked and replaced by the dealer's serv-
straint system fits securely against the ice center or another qualified service cen-
backrest. If possible, adjust the backrest ter or repair shop.
tilt for all affected backrests and correctly
adjust the seats. Make sure that seats and
backrests are securely engaged or locked. Warning
If possible, adjust the height of the head
restraints or remove them. The stability of the child restraint system
is limited or compromised with incorrect
seat adjustment or improper installation of
the child seat. There is a risk of injuries or
Installing child restraint sys- danger to life. Make sure that the child re-
straint system fits securely against the
tems backrest. If possible, adjust the backrest
General information adjust the seats. Make sure that seats and
backrests are securely engaged or locked.
Pay attention to the specifications of the
child restraint system manufacturer when
restraints or remove them.
selecting, installing, and using child re-
straint systems.
In order to facilitate the installation of a On the rear seats
back-facing child restraint system in the
In order to facilitate the installation of a
rear:
back-facing child restraint system:
101
Move the front passenger seat as far up as Child seat security

possible before folding down the backrest.
On the front passenger seat

Deactivating airbags
Warning
Active front-seat passenger airbags can in-
jure a child in a child restraint system
when the airbags are activated. There is a The rear safety belts and the front passen-
risk of injury. Make sure that the front- ger safety belt can be permanently locked to
seat passenger airbags are deactivated and fasten child restraint systems.
that the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indica-
tor light lights up.
Locking the safety belt
Before installing a child restraint system in 1. Pull out the belt strap completely.
the front passenger seat, make sure that the 2. Secure the child restraint system with
front, knee and side airbags on the front the safety belt.
passenger side are deactivated.
3. Allow the belt strap to be pulled in and
Deactivate the front-seat passenger airbags pull it tight against the child restraint
automatically, refer to page 156. system. The safety belt is locked.
Seat position and height Unlocking the safety belt
Before installing a child restraint system, 1. Unbuckle the safety belt buckle.
move the front passenger seat as far back as
possible and adjust its height to the highest 2. Remove the child restraint system.
and thus best possible position for the belt 3. Allow the belt strap to be pulled in com-
and to offer optimal protection in the event pletely.
of an accident.
If the upper anchorage of the safety belt is
located in front of the belt guide of the child LATCH child restraint fixing
seat, move the front passenger seat care- system
fully forward until the best possible belt
guide position is reached.
General information
LATCH: Lower Anchors and Tether for Chil-
dren.
Pay attention to the operating and safety in-
formation from the child restraint system
manufacturer when installing and using
LATCH child restraint fixing systems.
102
Transporting children safely CONTROLS
Mounts for the lower LATCH Before installing LATCH child

anchors restraint fixing systems
The lower anchors may be used to attach Pull the safety belt away from the area of
the CRS to the vehicle seat up to a com- the child restraint system.
bined child and CRS weight of 65 lbs/30 kg
when the child is restrained by the internal Assembly of LATCH child restraint
harnesses. fixing systems
Safety information 1. Install child restraint system, see manu-
facturer's information.
2. Ensure that both LATCH anchors are
Warning properly connected.
If the LATCH child restraint fixing sys-
tems are not correctly engaged, the protec- Child restraint systems with tether
tive effect of the LATCH child restraint strap
fixing system can be limited. There is a
risk of injuries or danger to life. Make sure
that the lower anchors are securely en-
Safety information
gaged and that the LATCH child restraint
fixing system fits securely against the Warning
backrest. If the upper retaining strap is incorrectly
used for the child restraint system, the
protective effect can be reduced. There is
Position
a risk of injury. Make sure that the upper
retaining strap does not run over sharp
Symbol Meaning
edges and is not twisted as it passes the
The corresponding symbol upper anchor.
shows the mounts for the
lower LATCH anchors.
Seats equipped with lower Warning
anchors are marked with a If the rear backrest is not locked, the pro-
pair, (2), of LATCH symbols. tective effect of the child restraint system
For vehicles equipped with is limited or there is none. In certain situa-
a middle seat: tions, for instance braking maneuvers or
It is not recommended to in case of an accident, the rear backrest
use the inner lower anchors can fold forward. There is a risk of injuries
of standard outer LATCH or danger to life. Make sure that the rear
positions to fasten a child backrests are locked.
restraint system on the
middle seat. Use the vehicle
safety belt instead for the
middle seat.
103
the supports of the head restraint to the

NOTICE anchor.
The anchors for the upper retaining straps 3. Attach the hook of the retaining strap to
of child restraint systems are only pro- the anchor on the rear seat.
vided for these retaining straps. When 4. Tighten the retaining strap by pulling it
other objects are mounted, the anchors down.
can be damaged. There is a risk of damage
to property. Only mount child restraint
systems to the upper anchors.
ON 5-door models: Locking
the doors and windows
Anchors
The respective symbol shows the an- Doors
chor for the upper retaining strap.
Seats with an upper top tether are
marked with this symbol. It can be found on
the rear seat backrest or the rear window
shelf.
Routing the retaining strap
Push the locking lever on the rear doors up.

The door can now be opened from the out-
side only.
Safety switch for the rear

Press the button on the driver's
1 Direction of travel door if children are being trans-
2 Head restraint ported in the rear.
3 Hook for upper retaining strap This locks various functions so that they
4 Anchor cannot be operated from the rear: safety
switch, refer to page 86.
5 Seat backrest
6 Upper retaining strap
Attaching the upper retaining strap to

the anchor
1. Raise the head restraint, if needed.
2. On the rear seat: Guide the upper retain-
ing strap between or along both sides of
104
Driving CONTROLS
Driving
Vehicle features and options To save battery power when the engine is
off, switch off the ignition and any unneces-
sary electronic systems/power consumers.
Ignition off
not necessarily available in your vehicle, for Manual transmission: press the Start/Stop
instance, due to the selected options or button again without stepping on the clutch
country versions. This also applies to safety- pedal.
related functions and systems. When using Steptronic transmission: shift to selector
these functions and systems, the applicable lever position P, press the Start/Stop button
laws and regulations must be observed. again without stepping on the brake.
All indicator lights in the instrument cluster
go out.
Start/Stop button To save battery power when the engine is
off, switch off the ignition and any unneces-
Concept sary electronic systems/power consumers.
Pressing the Start/Stop button
switches the ignition on or off Safety measures
and starts the engine. The ignition is switched off automatically in
Steptronic transmission: the the following situations while the vehicle is
engine starts in selector lever stationary and the engine is off:
position P or N with the brake pedal pressed – When locking the vehicle, even if the
when you press the Start/Stop button. low beams are switched on.
Manual transmission: the engine starts with – Shortly before the battery is discharged
the clutch pedal pressed when the Start/ completely, so that the engine can still
Stop button is pressed. be started. This function is only availa-
ble when the low beams are switched
off.
Ignition on – When opening or closing the driver
Manual transmission: press the Start/Stop door, if the driver's safety belt is un-
button without stepping on the clutch buckled and the low beams are switched
pedal. off.
Steptronic transmission: press the Start/ – While the driver's safety belt is unbuck-
Stop button, but do not press on the brake led with driver's door open and low
pedal at the same time. beams off.
All vehicle systems are ready for operation. – When the front doors are opened if
Most of the indicator/warning lights in the there is no other person sitting in the
instrument cluster light up for a varied front seats.
length of time.
105
CONTROLS Driving
– The low beams switch to parking lights – Shortly before the battery is discharged
after some minutes of no use. completely, so that the engine can still
Steptronic transmission with a tap-operated be started.
selector lever, refer to page 121: when
switching off the ignition, the selector lever
position P is engaged automatically if the Starting the engine
selector lever position R, D or M/S is en-
gaged. Safety information
Radio-ready state
DANGER
General information If the exhaust pipe is blocked or ventila-
In the radio-ready state, certain power con- tion is insufficient, harmful exhaust gases
sumers remain ready for operation. can enter into the vehicle. The exhaust
gases contain pollutants which are color-
Activating less and odorless. In enclosed areas, ex-
haust gases can also accumulate outside of
With the engine running, press the Start/ the vehicle. There is danger to life. Keep
Stop button. the exhaust pipe free and ensure sufficient
If the engine is not running and the ignition ventilation.
is switched on: the system automatically ac-
tivates radio-ready state when the door is
opened if the lights are switched off or the Warning
daytime running lights are switched on.
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move
Radio-ready state remains active if, for in- and possibly roll away. There is a risk of
stance the ignition is automatically accident. Before exiting, secure the vehi-
switched off for the following reasons: cle against rolling.
– Opening or closing the driver's door. In order to ensure that the vehicle is se-
– Unfastening of the driver's safety belt. cured against rolling away, follow the fol-
– When automatically switching from low lowing:
beams to parking lights. – Set the parking brake.
– On uphill grades or on a downhill
Switching off automatically slope, turn the front wheels in the di-
The radio-ready state is switched off auto- rection of the curb.
matically in the following situations: – On uphill grades or on a downhill
– If the driver's or front passenger door is slope, also secure the vehicle, for in-
opened when exiting the vehicle, with stance with a wheel chock.
the engine switched off manually.
– If the ignition is switched off manually
with the Start/Stop button. NOTICE
– After approx. 8 minutes. In the case of repeated starting attempts
– When the vehicle is locked using the or repeated starting in quick succession,
central locking system. the fuel is not burned or is inadequately
burned. The catalytic converter can over-
106
Driving CONTROLS
heat. There is a risk of damage to property. Engine stop

Avoid repeated starting in quick succes-
sion.
Safety information
Gasoline engine Warning
Depending on the motorization, the full Unattended children or animals in the ve-
drive power may not be available for ap- hicle can cause the vehicle to move and
proximately 30 seconds after starting the endanger themselves and traffic, for in-
engine. In this case, the vehicle will not ac- stance due to the following actions:
celerate as usual.
– Pressing the Start/Stop button.
Steptronic transmission – Releasing the parking brake.
– Opening and closing the doors or
Starting the engine windows.
1. Depress the brake pedal. – Engaging selector lever position N.
2. Engage selector lever position P or N. – Using vehicle equipment.
3. Press the Start/Stop button. There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do
not leave children or animals unattended
The ignition is activated automatically for a in the vehicle. Take the vehicle key with
brief time and is stopped as soon as the en- you when exiting and lock the vehicle.
gine starts.
Manual transmission
Warning
Starting the engine An unsecured vehicle can begin to move
and possibly roll away. There is a risk of
1. Depress the brake pedal. accident. Before exiting, secure the vehi-
2. Press on the clutch pedal and shift to cle against rolling.
neutral. In order to ensure that the vehicle is se-
3. Press the Start/Stop button. cured against rolling away, follow the fol-
The ignition is activated automatically for a lowing:
brief time and is stopped as soon as the en- – Set the parking brake.
gine starts. – On uphill grades or on a downhill
slope, turn the front wheels in the di-
rection of the curb.
slope, also secure the vehicle, for in-
stance with a wheel chock.
107
CONTROLS Driving
Steptronic transmission Engine stop

Switching off the engine Functional requirements
1. When the vehicle is stationary, apply The engine is switched off automatically
the parking brake. during a stop under the following condi-
2. Engage selector lever position P. tions:
Manual transmission:
– Neutral is engaged and the clutch pedal
The engine is switched off.
is not pressed.
The radio-ready state is switched on.
– The driver's safety belt is buckled or the
driver's door is closed.
Manual transmission
Steptronic transmission:
Switching off the engine – The selector lever is in selector lever po-
sition D.
1. With the vehicle at a standstill, press
the Start/Stop button. – The brake pedal remains depressed
while the vehicle is stopped.
The engine is switched off.
– The driver's safety belt is buckled or the
The radio-ready state is switched on.
driver's door is closed.
2. Shift into first gear or reverse. In order to be able to release the brake
3. Set the parking brake. pedal, engage the selector lever in position
P. The engine remains off.
To continue driving depress the brake
Auto Start/Stop function pedal. When a gear is engaged, the engine
starts automatically.
Concept The air flow from the air conditioner is re-
The Auto Start/Stop function helps save duced when the engine is switched off.
fuel. The system switches off the engine
during a stop, for instance in traffic conges- Steptronic transmission: manual
tion or at traffic lights. The ignition remains engine stop
switched on. The engine starts automati- Depending on the vehicle equipment and
cally for driving off. country version, the engine can be switched
After each engine start using the Start/Stop off manually, if the engine was not switched
button, the Auto Start/Stop function is off automatically when the vehicle stopped:
ready and is activated at speeds faster than – Press the brake pedal forcefully again
about 3 mph/5 km/h. from the current pedal position.
Depending on the selected driving mode, re- – Engage selector lever position P.
fer to page 177, the system is automatically If all functional preconditions are fulfilled,
activated or deactivated. the engine switches off.
108
Driving CONTROLS
Displays in the instrument cluster – Steptronic transmission: by releasing

the brake pedal.
The display indicates that the
Auto Start/Stop function is After the engine starts, accelerate as usual.
ready for an Automatic engine
start. Safety mode
After the engine switches off automatically,
it will not start again automatically if any
The display indicates that the
one of the following conditions are met:
conditions for an automatic
engine stop have not been – The driver's safety belt is unbuckled and
met. the driver's door is open.
– The hood was unlocked.
Some indicator lights light up for a varied
Functional limitations length of time.
The engine is not switched off automatically The engine can only be started via the
in the following situations: Start/Stop button.
– External temperature too low.
– The external temperature is high and au- Functional limitations
tomatic climate control is running. Even if driving off was not intended, the de-
– The car's interior has not yet been activated engine starts up automatically in
heated or cooled to the required level. the following situations:
– The engine is not yet at operating tem- – Excessive warming of the car's interior
perature. when the air conditioning is switched
on.
– The wheels are at a sharp angle or the
steering wheel is being turned. – The steering wheel is turned.
– After driving in reverse. – Steptronic transmission: change from
selector lever position D to R, N or M/S.
– Fogging of the windows when the auto-
matic climate control is switched on. – Steptronic transmission: change from
selector lever position P to R, N, D or
– The vehicle battery charge is very low. M/S.
– At higher elevations. – The vehicle begins rolling.
– The hood is unlocked. – Fogging of the windows when the auto-
– The parking assistant is activated. matic climate control is switched on.
– Stop-and-go traffic. – The vehicle battery charge is very low.
– Selector lever in selector lever position – Excessive cooling of the car's interior
R, N or M/S. when the heating is switched on.
– Manual transmission: low brake vacuum
Starting the engine pressure; this can occur, for instance if
The engine starts automatically under the the brake pedal is depressed a number
following conditions: of times in succession.
– Manual transmission: clutch pedal is
pressed.
109
CONTROLS Driving
Intelligent Auto Start/Stop function The engine can only be stopped or

Depending on the vehicle equipment and started via the Start/Stop button.
country-specific version, the vehicle fea- – LED goes out: auto Start/Stop function
tures a variety of sensors for assessing the is activated.
traffic situation. The Intelligent Auto Start/
Stop function uses this information to adapt Switching off the vehicle during an
to various traffic situations in a proactive automatic engine stop
manner. During an automatic engine stop, the vehi-
For instance, this applies to the following cle can be switched off permanently, for in-
situations: stance when leaving it.
– If a situation is detected in which the Steptronic transmission:
stopping time is expected to be very
short, the engine is not switched off au- 1. Engage selector lever position P.
tomatically. A message appears on the 2. Press the Start/Stop button. The ignition
Control Display, depending on the situa- is switched off. The Auto Start/Stop
tion. function is deactivated.
– If a situation is detected in which the 3. Set the parking brake.
vehicle needs to drive off immediately, Manual transmission:
the engine is started automatically.
The function may be restricted if the navi- 1. Press the Start/Stop button. The ignition
gation data is invalid, outdated or not avail- is switched off. The Auto Start/Stop
able, for example. function is deactivated.
2. Shift into first gear or reverse.
Switching the system on/off 3. Set the parking brake.
Engine start as usual via Start/Stop button.
Using the button
Automatic deactivation
In certain situations, the Auto Start/Stop
function is deactivated automatically for
safety reasons, for instance if no driver is
detected.
Malfunction
The Auto Start/Stop function no longer
switches off the engine automatically. A
Press the button. Check Control message is displayed. It is
possible to continue driving. Have the sys-
– LED comes on: auto Start/Stop function tem checked by a dealer's service center or
is deactivated. another qualified service center or repair
shop.
The engine is started during an auto-
matic engine stop.
110
Driving CONTROLS
Parking brake Releasing
Safety information
Warning
accident. Before exiting, secure the vehi-
cle against rolling.
In order to ensure that the vehicle is se- Raise lever slightly, press the button and
cured against rolling away, follow the fol- guide the lever down.
lowing:
– Set the parking brake.
– On uphill grades or on a downhill Turn signal, high beams, head-
slope, turn the front wheels in the di- light flasher
Turn signal
stance with a wheel chock.
Using turn signals
Applying
The lever automatically engages after being
pulled up.
The indicator light lights up red. The
parking brake is set.
Lower light: indicator light in Cana-
dian models
Press the lever past the resistance point.

If for once use during driving is required,
engage the parking brake slightly and hold Canada: the lever returns into its starting
the button down. position after actuation. To switch off man-
ually, slightly tap the lever to the resistance
To prevent corrosion and one-sided brake
point.
action, lightly apply the parking brake peri-
odically while coasting, if traffic conditions
permit. Triple turn signal activation
The brake lights will not light up if the park- Lightly tap the lever up or down.
ing brake is set. The triple turn signal duration can be ad-
justed.
111
CONTROLS Driving
Via the Central Information Display (CID): Wiper system

1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings" General information
3. "Lighting" Do not use the wipers if the windshield is
dry, as this may damage the wiper blades or
4. "Exterior lighting" cause them to become worn more quickly.
5. "One-touch turn signal"
6. Select the desired setting. Safety information
Settings are stored for the profile currently
used. Warning
If the wipers start moving in the folded
Signaling briefly away state, body parts can be jammed or
Press the lever to the resistance point and damage may occur to parts of the vehicle.
hold it there for as long as you want the There is a risk of injury or risk of damage
turn signal to flash. to property. Make sure that the vehicle is
switched off when the wipers are in the
Malfunction folded away state and the wipers are
Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator folded in when switching on.
light indicates that a turn signal bulb has
failed.
NOTICE
High beams, headlight flasher If the wipers are frozen to the windshield,
Push the lever forward or pull it backward. the wiper blades can be torn off and the
wiper motor can overheat when switching
on. There is a risk of damage to property.
Defrost the windshield prior to switching
the wipers on.
Switching on
– High beams on, arrow 1.

The high beams light up when the low
beams are switched on.
– High beams off/headlight flasher, ar-
row 2.
Press the lever up until the desired position

is reached.
112
Driving CONTROLS
– Resting position of the wipers, posi- Safety information

tion 0.
– Intermittent operation or rain sensor, NOTICE
position 1.
If the rain sensor is activated, the wipers
– Normal wiper speed, position 2. can accidentally start moving in vehicle
– Fast wiper speed, position 3. washes. There is a risk of damage to prop-
When travel is interrupted with the wiper erty. Deactivate the rain sensor in vehicle
system switched on: when travel continues, washes.
the wipers resume at their previous speed.
Switching off and brief wipe Activating
Press the lever up once from its standard

position, arrow 1.
– Switching off: press the lever down until
Wiping is started.
it reaches its standard position.
The LED in the wiper lever is illuminated.
– Brief wipe: press the lever down from
the standard position. In frosty conditions, wiper operation may
not start.
The lever automatically returns to its in-
itial position when released.
Deactivating
Interval mode or rain sensor Press the lever back into the standard posi-
tion.
Concept
The rain sensor automatically controls the
time between wipes depending on the in-
tensity of the rainfall.
General information
The sensor is located on the windshield, di-
rectly in front of the interior mirror. With-
out the rain sensor, the frequency of the
wiper operation is preset.
113
CONTROLS Driving
Setting the frequency or sensitivity of Cleaning the windshield

the rain sensor
Pull the lever.

Turn the thumbwheel. The system sprays washer fluid on the
With deactivated rain sensor: set the inter- windshield and activates the wipers briefly.
val.
With activated rain sensor: set the rain sen- Windshield washer nozzles
sor sensitivity.
The washer jets are automatically heated
Up: short interval or high sensitivity of the whenever the ignition is switched on.
rain sensor.
Down: long interval or low sensitivity of the Rear window wiper
rain sensor.
Overview
Windshield washer system
Safety information
Warning
The washer fluid can freeze onto the win-
dow at low temperatures and obstruct the
view. There is a risk of accident. Only use
the washer systems, if the washer fluid
cannot freeze. Use washer fluid with anti- Switching on
freeze, if needed.
Turn the outer switch upward.
– Resting position of the wiper, posi-
NOTICE tion 0.
When the washer fluid reservoir is empty, – Intermittent mode, arrow 1. When re-
the wash pump cannot work as intended. verse gear is engaged, the system
There is a risk of damage to property. Do switches to continuous operation.
not use the washer system when the
washer fluid reservoir is empty. Clean the rear window
Turn the outer switch in the desired direc-
tion.
114
Driving CONTROLS
– In resting position: turn the switch Folding away the wipers

downward, arrow 3. The switch auto- 1. Switch the ignition on and off again.
matically returns to its idle position
when released. 2. Press and hold the wiper lever down, un-
til the wipers stop in a close to vertical
– In intermittent mode: turn the switch
position.
further, arrow 2. The switch automati-
cally returns to its interval position
when released.
The function is deactivated if the washer
fluid reservoir level is low.
Fold-away position of the wipers

Concept
The fold-away position enables the wipers
to be folded away from the windshield. 3. Fold the wipers all the way away from
the windshield.
General information
Helpful when changing the wiper blades or
under frosty conditions, for instance.
Safety information
Warning
away state, body parts can be jammed or
damage may occur to parts of the vehicle. Folding down the wipers
There is a risk of injury or risk of damage
to property. Make sure that the vehicle is After the wipers are folded back down, the
switched off when the wipers are in the wiper system must be reactivated.
folded away state and the wipers are 1. Fold the wipers back down onto the
folded in when switching on. windshield.
2. Switch on the ignition.
3. Push wiper lever down. Wipers return
NOTICE
to their resting position and are ready
If the wipers are frozen to the windshield, again for operation.
the wiper blades can be torn off and the
on. There is a risk of damage to property.
the wipers on.
115
CONTROLS Driving
Canada: wiper system – Fast wiper speed: tap up twice or tap

once beyond the resistance point.
The lever automatically returns to its initial
General information position when released.
Do not use the wipers if the windshield is
dry, as this may damage the wiper blades or Switching off and brief wipe
cause them to become worn more quickly.
Safety information
Warning
damage may occur to parts of the vehicle.
to property. Make sure that the vehicle is Press the lever down.
folded away state and the wipers are – To switch off from fast wiper speed:
folded in when switching on. press down twice.
– To switch off from normal wiper speed:
press down once.
NOTICE – Brief wipe: press down once.
If the wipers are frozen to the windshield, The lever automatically returns to its initial
the wiper blades can be torn off and the position when released.
on. There is a risk of damage to property. Interval mode or rain sensor
the wipers on. Concept
The rain sensor automatically controls the
time between wipes depending on the in-
Switching on tensity of the rainfall.
General information
The sensor is located on the windshield, di-
rectly in front of the interior mirror. With-
out the rain sensor, the frequency of the
wiper operation is preset.
Tap up the lever or press it past the resist-

ance point.
– Normal wiper speed: tap up once.
116
Driving CONTROLS
Safety information Setting the frequency or sensitivity of

the rain sensor
NOTICE
If the rain sensor is activated, the wipers
can accidentally start moving in vehicle
washes. There is a risk of damage to prop-
erty. Deactivate the rain sensor in vehicle
washes.
Turn the thumbwheel.
With deactivated rain sensor: set the inter-
val.
With activated rain sensor: set the rain sen-
sor sensitivity.
Up: short interval or high sensitivity of the
rain sensor.
Down: long interval or low sensitivity of the
rain sensor.
Press the button on the wiper lever.
Wiping is started.
If the vehicle is equipped with a rain sensor:
Windshield washer system
the LED in the wiper lever is illuminated.
Safety information
In frosty conditions, wiper operation may
not start.
If a journey is interrupted with the rain sen- Warning
sor switched on: if the trip is resumed The washer fluid can freeze onto the win-
within approx. 15 minutes, the rain sensor dow at low temperatures and obstruct the
is automatically activated again. view. There is a risk of accident. Only use
the washer systems, if the washer fluid
cannot freeze. Use washer fluid with anti-
freeze, if needed.
NOTICE
When the washer fluid reservoir is empty,
the wash pump cannot work as intended.
There is a risk of damage to property. Do
not use the washer system when the
washer fluid reservoir is empty.
117
CONTROLS Driving
Cleaning the windshield – In resting position: turn the switch

downward, arrow 3. The switch auto-
matically returns to its idle position
when released.
– In intermittent mode: turn the switch
further, arrow 2. The switch automati-
cally returns to its interval position
when released.
The function is deactivated if the washer
fluid reservoir level is low.
Pull the lever.
Fold-away position of the wipers
The system sprays washer fluid on the
windshield and activates the wipers briefly. Concept
The fold-away position enables the wipers
Windshield washer nozzles to be folded away from the windshield.
The washer jets are automatically heated
whenever the ignition is switched on. General information
Helpful when changing the wiper blades or
Rear window wiper under frosty conditions, for instance.
Overview Safety information
Warning
damage may occur to parts of the vehicle.
to property. Make sure that the vehicle is
folded away state and the wipers are
folded in when switching on.
Switching on
Turn the outer switch upward.
– Resting position of the wiper, posi- NOTICE
tion 0. If the wipers are frozen to the windshield,
– Intermittent mode, arrow 1. When re- the wiper blades can be torn off and the
verse gear is engaged, the system wiper motor can overheat when switching
switches to continuous operation. on. There is a risk of damage to property.
Clean the rear window the wipers on.
Turn the outer switch in the desired direc-
tion.
118
Driving CONTROLS
Folding away the wipers Washer fluid

1. Switch the ignition on and off again.
2. Press the wiper lever up past the point General information
of resistance and hold it for approx. All washer nozzles are supplied from one
3 seconds, until the wipers remain in a reservoir.
nearly vertical position.
Use a mixture of tap water and windshield
washer concentrate. If desired, a windshield
washer concentrate containing antifreeze
can be used.
Recommended minimum fill quantity:
0.2 US gal/1 liter.
Safety information
Warning
3. Fold the wipers all the way away from
the windshield. Some antifreeze agents can contain harm-
ful substances and are flammable. There is
a risk of fire and a risk of injury. Follow
the instructions on the containers. Keep
antifreeze away from ignition sources. Do
not refill operating materials into different
bottles. Store operating materials out of
reach of children.
United States: the washer fluid mixture ra-
tio is regulated by the U.S. EPA and many
individual states; do not exceed the allow-
able washer fluid dilution ratio limits that
Folding down the wipers apply. Follow the usage instructions on the
After the wipers are folded back down, the washer fluid container.
wiper system must be reactivated. Use of BMW’s Windshield Washer Con-
1. Fold the wipers back down onto the centrate or the equivalent is recom-
windshield. mended.
2. Switch on the ignition.
3. Push wiper lever down. Wipers return Warning
to their resting position and are ready
again for operation. Washer fluid can ignite and catch fire on
contact with hot engine parts. There is a
risk of injury or risk of damage to prop-
erty. Only add washer fluid when the en-
gine is cooled down. Next, fully close the
lid of the washer fluid reservoir.
119
CONTROLS Driving
Manual transmission
NOTICE
Silicon-containing additives in the washer Safety information
fluid for the water-repelling effect on the
windows can lead to damage to the wash-
ing system. There is a risk of damage to Warning
property. Do not add silicon-containing ad- An unsecured vehicle can begin to move
ditives to the washer fluid. and possibly roll away. There is a risk of
NOTICE In order to ensure that the vehicle is se-
Mixing different windshield washer con- cured against rolling away, follow the fol-
centrates or antifreeze can damage the lowing:
washing system. There is a risk of damage – Set the parking brake.
to property. Do not mix different wind-
shield washer concentrates or antifreeze.
slope, turn the front wheels in the di-
Follow the information and mixing ratios
provided on the containers.
Overview stance with a wheel chock.
NOTICE
When shifting to a lower gear, excessive
speeds can damage the engine. There is a
risk of damage to property. When shifting
into 5th or 6th gear, press the gearshift
lever to the right.
The washer fluid reservoir is located in the Schematic diagram

engine compartment.
Malfunction
The use of undiluted windshield washer
concentrate or alcohol-based antifreeze can
lead to incorrect readings at temperatures
below +5 ℉/-15 ℃.
– 1 – 6: forward gears
– R: reverse
120
Driving CONTROLS
Shifting In order to ensure that the vehicle is se-

cured against rolling away, follow the fol-
General information lowing:
Depending on the engine installation, the – Set the parking brake.
engine speed during a shifting operation is – On uphill grades or on a downhill
adjusted automatically as required for har- slope, turn the front wheels in the di-
monious and dynamic gear shifting. rection of the curb.
Reverse gear slope, also secure the vehicle, for in-
Select only when the vehicle is stationary. stance with a wheel chock.
To overcome the resistance push the gear-
shift lever dynamically to the left and en- Selector lever version
gage reverse gear with a forward shifting
movement. General information
Rolling or pushing the vehicle Depending on the vehicle equipment, a
transmission with either a latching selector
In some situations, the vehicle is to roll lever or a tap-operated selector lever is in-
without its own power, for instance in a ve- stalled.
hicle wash, or be pushed.
1. Switch on the ignition. Transmission with a latching selector
lever
2. Press on the clutch pedal and shift out
of a forward gear or reverse.
3. Release the parking brake.
Steptronic transmission
Concept
The Steptronic transmission combines the
functions of an automatic transmission with The selector lever positions P, R, N, and D
the possibility of manual shifting, if needed. are selected by moving the selector lever
into the respective selector lever position.
Safety information The selector lever engages in the selector
lever positions.
Warning
121
CONTROLS Driving
Transmission with a tap-operated The transmission blocks the drive wheels in

selector lever selector lever position P.
Engage selector lever position P only when
the vehicle is stationary.
Before exiting the vehicle, make sure that
selector lever position P is set. Otherwise,
the vehicle may begin to move.
Automatic parking position for a

transmission with a tap-operated selector
lever
The selector lever positions P, R, N, and D Selector lever position P is engaged auto-
are selected by tapping the selector lever matically in situations such as the follow-
forward or back. The selector lever automat- ing:
ically returns to the center position when – After the engine is switched off when
released. the vehicle is in the radio-ready state,
Selector lever position P is engaged auto- refer to page 106, or when the ignition
matically, refer to page 122, in certain sit- is switched off, refer to page 105, while
uations. selector lever position R, D or M/S is en-
gaged.
– If the driver's safety belt is unbuckled,
Selector lever positions the driver's door is opened, and the
brake pedal is not pressed while the ve-
Drive mode D hicle is stationary and selector lever po-
Selector lever position for normal vehicle sition D, M/S or R is engaged.
operation. All gears for forward travel are – After the ignition has been switched off
activated automatically. while selector lever position N is en-
gaged.
R is reverse
Engage selector lever position R only when Engaging selector lever positions:
the vehicle is stationary. with a latching selector lever
Neutral N General information
The vehicle may be pushed or roll without To prevent the vehicle from creeping after
engine power in selector lever position N, you select a drive mode, maintain pressure
for instance in vehicle washes, refer to on the brake pedal until you are ready to
page 124. start.
Parking position P Functional requirements

The selector lever can only be taken out of
General information
selector lever position P if the ignition is on
Selector lever position, for instance for or the engine is running.
parking the vehicle.
122
Driving CONTROLS
Engaging selector lever position D, N, Engaging selector lever positions:

R, or P with a tap-operated selector lever
With the vehicle stationary, depress the
brake pedal before shifting out of selector General information
lever position P or N; otherwise, the shift To prevent the vehicle from creeping after
block will not be deactivated and the shift you select a drive mode, maintain pressure
command will not be executed. on the brake pedal until you are ready to
A selector lever lock prevents the following start.
faulty operation:
– Unintentional shifting into selector Functional requirements
lever position P or R. Only when the brake pedal is depressed is it
– Unintentional shifting from selector possible to change from selector lever posi-
lever position P into another selector tion P to another selector lever position.
lever position. Depending on the transmission version, the
1. To release the selector lever lock: with engine may have to be running too.
the brake pedal depressed, press the The selection lever position P cannot be
button on the front of the selector lever. changed until all technical requirements are
met.
Engaging selector lever position D, N,

R
A selector lever lock prevents the following
faulty operation:
– Unintentional shifting into selector
lever position R.
– Unintentional shifting from selector
2. Move the selector lever into the desired lever position P into another selector
position. lever position.
1. Press and hold the button to release the
selector lever lock.
2. With the driver's safety belt fastened,

briefly push the selector lever in the de-
sired direction, past a resistance point,
123
CONTROLS Driving
if needed. The selector lever automati- If there is a malfunction, you may not be
cally returns to the center position when able to change the selector lever position.
released. Manually unlock the transmission lock, if
needed, refer to page 127.
Engaging selector lever position N:

with a tap-operated selector lever
1. Start the engine while pressing on the
brake pedal.
2. If necessary, release the parking brake.
4. Touch the selector lever lock and en-
Engaging selector lever position P gage selector lever position N.
5. Switch the engine off.
In this way, the ignition remains
switched on, and a Check-Control mes-
sage is displayed.
The vehicle can roll.
NOTICE
Selector lever position P is automatically
Press button P. engaged when the ignition is switched off.
not switch ignition off in vehicle washes.
Rolling or pushing the vehicle
Irrespective of the ignition, the selector
General information lever position P is automatically engaged af-
In some situations, the vehicle is to roll ter approx. 15 minutes.
without its own power for a short distance, If there is a malfunction, you may not be
for instance in a vehicle wash, or be pushed. able to change the selector lever position.
Electronically unlock the transmission lock,
Engaging selector lever position N: if needed, refer to page 127.
with a latching selector lever
1. Switch on the ignition. Kickdown
2. If necessary, release the parking brake. Kickdown is used to achieve maximum driv-
ing performance. Step on the accelerator
pedal beyond the resistance point at the full
4. Touch the selector lever lock and en- throttle position.
gage selector lever position N.
5. Release brake.
The vehicle can roll.
124
Driving CONTROLS
Sport program M/S Activating manual mode

1. Press the selector lever to the left from
Concept selector lever position D, arrow 1.
The shifting points and shifting times in the
Sport program are designed for a sportier
driving style. The transmission, for instance
shifts up later and the shifting times are
shorter.
Activating the Sport program
2. Push the selector lever forward or pull it

backward, arrows 2.
Manual mode M/S becomes active and the
gear is changed.
The engaged gear is displayed in the instru-
ment cluster, for instance M1.
Press the selector lever to the left from se- Shifting
lector lever position D.
– To shift down: press the selector lever
The engaged gear is displayed in the instru-
forward.
ment cluster, for instance S1.
– To shift up: pull the selector lever rear-
The sport program of the transmission is ac-
wards.
tivated.
The Steptronic transmission continues
shifting automatically in certain situations,
Ending the Sport program for instance when certain engine speed lim-
Push the selector lever to the right. its are reached.
D is displayed in the instrument cluster. With a tap-operated selector lever: when
M2 is set manually while the vehicle is sta-
Manual mode M/S tionary, the transmission will no longer
shift back to M1. This shifting behavior is
Concept retained until you engage M1 manually or
exit M.
Manual gear-shifting is possible in manual
mode. Avoiding automatic upshifting
Once a particular engine speed is attained,
M/S manual mode is automatically up-
shifted as needed.
MINI John Cooper Works: once particular
engine speeds are attained, upshifting is not
125
CONTROLS Driving
automatically performed in M/S manual After conservative driving in manual mode

mode. without acceleration or shifting via the shift
For vehicles with Steptronic Sport transmis- paddles for a certain amount of time, the
sion, automatic shift operations are not per- transmission switches back to automatic
formed if one of the following conditions is mode.
met: It is possible to switch into automatic mode
– DSC is deactivated. as follows:
– TRACTION is activated. – Pull and hold right shift paddle.
In addition, there is no downshifting for – In addition to the briefly pulled right
kickdown. shift paddle, briefly pull the left shift
paddle.
With the appropriate transmission version,
the lowest possible gear can be selected by Continuous manual mode
simultaneously activating kickdown and op-
erating the left shift paddles. This is not In selector lever position S, actuating a shift
possible by switching briefly via the shift paddle switches into manual mode perma-
paddles from selector lever position D to nently.
manual mode M/S.
Shifting
Ending the manual mode
Push the selector lever to the right.
D is displayed in the instrument cluster.
Shift paddles for Steptronic Sport

transmission
Concept
The shift paddles on the steering wheel al- – To shift up: briefly pull right shift pad-
low you to shift gears quickly while keeping dle.
both hands on the steering wheel.
– To shift down: briefly pull left shift pad-
General information dle.
– The lowest possible gear can be selected
Shifting by pulling and holding the left shift pad-
Gears will only be shifted at appropriate en- dle.
gine and road speeds, for instance down- The selected gear is briefly displayed in the
shifting is not possible if the engine speed instrument cluster, followed by the current
is too high. gear.
Short-term manual mode

In selector lever position D, actuating a
shift paddle switches into manual mode
temporarily.
126
Driving CONTROLS
Displays in the instrument cluster the yellow release lever downward, see
arrow.
The selector lever position is
displayed, for example P.
Releasing the transmission lock

manually: with a latching selector
lever
If the selector lever is locked in selector
lever position P despite the ignition being 4. Press the button on the front of the se-
switched on, the brake pedal being de- lector lever and move the selector lever
pressed and the button on the selector lever back slightly.
being pressed, the transmission lock can be
Release the release lever.
unlocked manually:
5. Bring the selector lever into the desired
Before unlocking the transmission lock
position.
manually, engage the parking brake force-
fully to prevent the vehicle from rolling For additional information, see the chapter
away. on tow-starting and towing.
1. Loosen the selector lever sleeve, to- Releasing the transmission lock
gether with the lower retaining ring,
from the center console. To do so, pull
electronically: with a tap-operated
the retaining ring upward at the rear selector lever
edge.
General information
Electronically unlock the transmission lock
to maneuver vehicle from a danger area.
Before unlocking the transmission lock, set
the parking brake to prevent the vehicle
from rolling away.
Engaging selector lever position N

Unlocking is possible, if the starter can spin
2. Lift the sleeve. Unplug the cable connec- the engine.
tor, if needed. 1. Press and hold down brake pedal.
3. Using the screwdriver from the onboard 2. Press the Start/Stop button. The starter
vehicle tool kit, refer to page 280, press must audibly start.
3. Press the button on the selector lever,
arrow 1, and press and hold the selector
lever into selector lever position N, ar-
127
CONTROLS Driving
row N, until selector lever position N is Depending on the external temperature and
displayed in the instrument cluster. driving style, the engine and transmission
A Check Control message is displayed. require an interrupted trip of up to
30 miles/50 km in order to reach the oper-
ating temperature needed for Launch Con-
trol.
Start with launch control

While the engine is running:
1. Press button and select SPORT

with the MINI Driving Modes switch.
The instrument cluster displays TRAC-
4. Release the selector lever.
TION in combination with SPORT. The
5. Release brake, as soon as the starter DSC OFF indicator light lights up.
stops.
2. Engage selector lever position S.
6. Maneuver the vehicle from the danger
3. With the left foot, forcefully press down
area and secure it against moving on its
on the brake.
own.
For additional information, see the chapter 4. Step on the accelerator pedal beyond the
on tow-starting and towing. resistance point at the full throttle posi-
tion, kickdown.
Steptronic Sport transmission: A flag symbol is displayed in the instru-
ment cluster.
Launch Control
5. The starting engine speed adjusts.
Concept Within 3 seconds, release the brake.
Launch Control enables optimum accelera-
Repeated use during a trip
tion on surfaces with good traction under
dry surrounding conditions. After Launch Control has been used, the
transmission must cool down for approx.
General information 5 minutes before Launch Control can be
used again.
The use of Launch Control causes prema-
ture component wear since this function
After using Launch Control
represents a very heavy load for the vehicle.
To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC
Do not use Launch Control during the
Dynamic Stability Control again.
break-in, refer to page 228, period.
Do not turn the steering wheel when driv- System limits
ing away with Launch Control.
An experienced driver may be able to ach-
ieve better acceleration values in DSC OFF
mode.
Launch Control is available as soon as the
engine and transmission are at operating
temperature.
128
Displays CONTROLS
Displays
Instrument cluster
Overview
1 Tachometer 134 4 Fuel gauge 134

2 Indicator/warning lights 5 Display/reset miles 134
3 Speedometer 6 Electronic displays 130
129
CONTROLS Displays
Electronic displays
1 Driver assistance systems Onboard Computer 139

Messages, for instance Check Control 2 Selector lever position 121
Time 135 Gear shift indicator 137
External temperature 135 3 MINI Driving Modes switch sta-
Selection lists 139 tus 177
Total miles/trip odometer 134
Check Control In addition, an acoustic signal may be out-

put and a SMS text message may appear on
the Control Display.
Concept
The Check Control system monitors func- Indicator/warning lights
tions in the vehicle and notifies you of mal-
functions in the monitored systems. General information
The indicator/warning lights can light up in
General information a variety of combinations and colors.
A Check Control message is displayed as a Several of the lights are checked for proper
combination of indicator or warning lights functioning and light up temporarily when
and text messages in the instrument cluster the engine is started or the ignition is
and in the Head-up Display. switched on.
130
Displays CONTROLS
Red lights Person warning

If a collision with a detected person
Safety belt reminder is imminent, the symbol lights up
Indicator light flashes or is illumi- and a signal sounds.
nated: safety belt on the driver or
passenger side is not buckled. The Orange lights
safety belt reminder can also be activated if
objects are placed on the front passenger Active Cruise Control
seat.
Make sure that the safety belts are posi- The number bars shows the selected
tioned correctly. distance from the vehicle driving
ahead.
Camera-based cruise control, refer to
Airbag system page 180.
Airbag system and belt tensioner
may not be working. Vehicle detection, Active Cruise Control
Have the vehicle checked immedi-
ately by a dealer's service center or another Indicator light illuminates: a vehicle
qualified service center or repair shop. has been detected ahead of you.
Indicator light flashes: the condi-
tions are not adequate for the system to
Parking brake work.
The parking brake is set. The system was deactivated but applies the
For releasing the parking brake, re- brakes until the driver actively resumes
fer to page 111. control of the vehicle by pressing on the
brake pedal or accelerator pedal.
Yellow lights
Approach control warning
Indicator light illuminates: advance Anti-lock Braking System ABS
warning is issued, for example when The Brake Assistant function may
there is the impending danger of a not activate. Avoid abrupt braking.
collision or the distance to the vehicle Take the longer braking distance
ahead is too small. into account.
Increase the distance. Have the system immediately
Indicator light flashes: acute warning of the checked by a dealer's service center
imminent danger of a collision when the ve- or another qualified service center or repair
hicle approaches another vehicle at a rela- shop.
tively high differential speed.
Intervene by braking or make an evasive DSC Dynamic Stability Control
maneuver.
The indicator light flashes: DSC con-
trols the drive and braking forces.
The vehicle is stabilized. Reduce
131
CONTROLS Displays
speed and modify your driving style to the – A wheel without TPM wheel electronics
driving circumstances. is mounted: have it checked by a deal-
The indicator light lights up: DSC has mal- er’s service center or another qualified
functioned. service center or repair shop as needed.
Have the system checked by a dealer's serv- – Malfunction: have the system checked
ice center or another qualified service cen- by a dealer’s service center or another
ter or repair shop. qualified service center or repair shop.
DSC, refer to page 175. Tire Pressure Monitor, refer to page 158.
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is Steering system

deactivated or DTC Dynamic Traction Steering system may not be working.
Control is activated Have the system checked by a deal-
DSC is deactivated or DTC is acti- er's service center or another quali-
vated. fied service center or repair shop.
DSC, refer to page 175, and DTC, re-
fer to page 176. Emissions
– The warning light lights up:
Flat Tire Monitor FTM Emissions are deteriorating.
The Flat Tire Monitor signals a loss Have the vehicle checked as soon
of tire inflation pressure in a tire. as possible.
Reduce your speed and stop cau- – The warning light flashes under certain
tiously. Avoid sudden braking and steering circumstances:
maneuvers. This indicates that there is excessive
Flat Tire Monitor, refer to page 163. misfiring in the engine.
Reduce the vehicle speed and have the
Tire Pressure Monitor TPM system checked immediately; otherwise,
serious engine misfiring within a brief
The indicator light lights up: the Tire period can seriously damage emission
Pressure Monitor reports a low tire control components, in particular the
inflation pressure or a flat tire. Fol- catalytic converter.
low the information in the Check Control
message. Socket for Onboard Diagnosis, refer to
The indicator light flashes and then contin- page 279.
uously lights up: no flat tire or loss of tire
inflation pressure can be detected. Green lights
– Interference caused by systems or devi-
ces with the same radio frequency: after Turn signal
leaving the area of the interference, the Turn signal switched on.
system automatically becomes active Unusually rapid flashing of the indi-
again. cator light indicates that a turn sig-
– TPM was unable to complete the reset. nal bulb has failed.
Reset the system again.
132
Displays CONTROLS
Turn signal, refer to page 111. Hiding Check Control messages
Parking lights, headlight

Parking lights or headlights are
switched on.
Parking lights/low beams, headlight
control, refer to page 148.
Front fog lights

Front fog lights are switched on. Press the button on the turn signal lever.
Front fog lights, refer to page 151.
Continuous display
High-beam Assistant Some Check Control messages are displayed
High-beam Assistant is switched on. continuously and are not cleared until the
malfunction is eliminated. If several mal-
High beams are switched on and off functions occur at once, the messages are
automatically depending on the traf- displayed consecutively.
fic situation.
The messages can be hidden for approx.
High-beam Assistant, refer to page 150. 8 seconds. After this time, they are dis-
played again automatically.
Cruise control
The system is switched on. It main- Temporary display
tains the speed that was set using Some Check Control messages are hidden
the control elements on the steering automatically after approx. 20 seconds. The
wheel. Check Control messages are stored and can
be displayed again later.
Blue lights
Displaying stored Check Control
High beams messages
High beams are switched on.
High beams, refer to page 112. 1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Check Control"
4. Select the SMS text message.
133
CONTROLS Displays
Display Fuel gauge

Check Control The arrow beside the fuel
At least one Check Control message pump symbol shows which
is displayed or stored. side of the vehicle the fuel
filler flap is on.
Vehicle tilt position may cause
SMS text messages the display to vary.
SMS text messages in combination with a Information on refueling, refer to page 242.
symbol in the instrument cluster explain a
Check Control message and the meaning of The yellow indicator light illumi-
the indicator/warning lights. nates, once the fuel reserve is
reached.
Supplementary SMS text messages
Additional information, such as on the
cause of an error or the required action, can
be called up via Check Control.
Tachometer
With urgent messages the added text will
be automatically displayed on the Control Always avoid engine speeds in the red
Display. warning field. In this range, the fuel supply
is reduced to protect the engine.
Depending on the Check Control message,
further help can be selected.
Via the Central Information Display (CID): Odometer and trip odometer
1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle status" Concept
3. "Check Control" The total mileage driven and the mileage
driven since the last reset are displayed in
4. Select the desired text message. the instrument cluster.
Reset the trip odometer
Messages after trip completion
Press the button.
Certain messages displayed while driving
– The odometer is displayed
are displayed again after the ignition is
when the ignition is
switched off.
switched off.
– When the ignition is
switched on, the trip od-
ometer is reset.
134
Displays CONTROLS
External temperature Date

General information The date is displayed in the in-
If the indicator drops to +37 ℉/+3 ℃, a sig- strument cluster.
nal sounds. The date can be set via the
A Check Control message is displayed. Central Information Display
(CID).
There is an increased risk of ice on roads.
Safety information
Range
Warning
General information
Even at temperatures above +37 ℉/+3 ℃
there can be a risk of icy roads, for in- When the remaining range is low:
stance on bridges or shady sections of the – A Check Control message is displayed
road. There is a risk of accident. Modify briefly.
your driving style to the weather condi- – The remaining range is shown on the
tions at low temperatures. Onboard Computer.
– With a dynamic driving style, for in-
Display stance fast cornering, the engine func-
tion is not always ensured.
The external temperature is The Check Control message appears contin-
displayed in the instrument uously below a range of approx.
cluster. 30 miles/50 km.
Safety information
Time NOTICE
With a driving range of less than
The time is displayed in the 30 miles/50 km the engine may no longer
instrument cluster. have sufficient fuel. Engine functions are
not ensured anymore. There is a risk of
The time can be set via the damage to property. Refuel promptly.
Central Information Display
(CID).
Display
The current range is displayed
in the instrument cluster.
135
CONTROLS Displays
Displaying the cruising range ing distance or time to the next scheduled
Via the Central Information Display (CID): maintenance.
A service advisor can read out the current
1. "My MINI" service requirements from your vehicle key.
3. "Displays" Display
4. "Instrument panel" Detailed information on service
5. "Range" requirements
More information on the type of service re-
quired may be displayed on the Control Dis-
Current consumption play.
Concept
1. "My MINI"
Displays the current fuel consumption.
Check whether you are currently driving in 2. "Vehicle status"
an efficient and environmentally-friendly 3. "Service required"
manner. Required maintenance procedures and
legally mandated inspections are dis-
Displaying the current played.
consumption 4. Select an entry to call up detailed infor-
Via the Central Information Display (CID): mation.
1. "My MINI" Symbols
3. "Displays" Symbols Description
4. "Instrument panel" No service is currently re-
quired.
5. "Current consumption"
The deadline for scheduled
maintenance or a legally
Service requirements mandated inspection is ap-
proaching.
Concept The service deadline has al-
The function displays the service require- ready passed.
ments and the corresponding maintenance
scopes.
Entering appointment dates
General information Enter the dates for the mandatory vehicle
After the ignition is switched on the instru- inspections.
ment cluster briefly displays available driv- Make sure that the vehicle's date and time
are set correctly.
136
Displays CONTROLS
Via the Central Information Display (CID): Manual transmission: displaying

1. "My MINI"
Example Description
2. "Vehicle status"
Efficient gear is set.
3. "Service required"
4. "Vehicle inspection"
5. "Date:" Shift into efficient gear.
Automatic Service Request Steptronic transmission: displaying

Data regarding the service status or legally
mandated vehicle inspections is automati- Example Description
cally transmitted to your dealer’s service Efficient gear is set.
center before your vehicle is due for serv-
ice.
You can check when your dealer’s service Shift into efficient gear.
center was notified.
1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle status" Speed Limit Info
3. Move the Controller to the left.
4. "Teleservice Call" Speed Limit Info
Concept
Gear shift indicator Speed Limit Info shows the current maxi-
mum permitted speed in the instrument
cluster.
Concept
The system recommends the most efficient General information
gear for the current driving situation. The camera at the base of the interior mir-
ror detects traffic signs at the edge of the
General information road as well as variable overhead sign posts.
Depending on the vehicle equipment and Traffic signs with extra symbols for wet
country version, the gear shift indicator is road conditions, etc., are also detected and
active in the manual mode of the Steptronic compared with the vehicle's onboard data,
transmission and with manual transmission. such as from the rain sensor, and will be
Suggestions to shift up or down are dis- displayed depending on the situation.
played in the instrument cluster. With the navigation system, the system
takes into account the information stored in
the navigation data and also displays speed
limits present on routes without signs.
137
CONTROLS Displays
Speed limits when towing a trailer are not

shown.
Safety information
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute
for the driver’s personal judgment in as-
sessing visibility and traffic situation. Press button on the turn signal lever several
There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving times, if needed.
style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic
closely and actively intervene where ap- Speed Limit Info is displayed on the Info
propriate. Display in the instrument cluster.
Speed Limit Info

Overview
The last speed limit detected.
Camera
With navigation system:

Speed Limit Info is not availa-
ble.
Speed Limit Info can also be displayed in

The camera is installed near the interior the Head-up Display.
mirror.
Keep the windshield in front of the interior
System limits
mirror clean and clear. The system may not be fully functional and
may provide incorrect information in the
following situations:
Display – In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snow-
Speed Limit Info is displayed via the On- fall.
board Computer.
– When signs are fully or partially con-
cealed by objects, stickers or paint.
– When driving very close to the vehicle
in front of you.
– When driving toward bright lights or
strong reflections.
138
Displays CONTROLS
– When the windshield in front of the in- Activating a list and adjusting the
terior mirror is fogged over, dirty or cov- setting
ered by a sticker, etc.
– In the event of incorrect detection by Button on the Function
the camera. steering wheel
– If the speed limits stored in the naviga- Move selection up.
tion system are incorrect.
– In areas not covered by the navigation Move selection
system. down.
– When roads differ from the navigation,
such as due to changes in road routing. Confirm the selec-
tion.
– When passing buses or trucks with a
speed sticker.
– If the traffic signs are non-conforming.
Display
– When signs that are valid for a parallel
road are detected.
– During calibration of the camera imme-
diately after vehicle delivery.
Selection lists
General information
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the
buttons on the steering wheel and the dis- Onboard Computer
play in the instrument cluster can be used
to display or use the following: Concept
– Current audio source.
The Onboard Computer displays different
– Phone redial. vehicle data in the instrument cluster, such
– Turn on voice activation system. as average values.
139
CONTROLS Displays
Calling up information on the Info When destination guidance is activated

Display in the navigation system.
– Speed Limit Info.
– Vehicle speed.
The unit of some information can be
changed.
Setting units, refer to page 54.
Selecting information
Depending on the vehicle equipment, you
Press the button on the turn signal lever. can select what information from the On-
board Computer can be displayed on the
Information is displayed in the Info Display Info Display of the instrument cluster.
of the instrument cluster.
Information at a glance 1. "My MINI"

Info Display 3. "Displays"
Repeatedly pressing the but- 4. "Instrument panel"
ton on the turn signal lever
calls up the following informa-
tion in the Info Display: Settings are stored for the profile currently
– Range. used.
– GREEN Info. Information in detail
When GREEN Mode is activated.
– Average consumption, fuel. Range
– Current consumption, fuel. Displays the estimated cruising range avail-
– Average speed. able with the remaining fuel.
– Date. The range is calculated based on your driv-
ing style over the last 20 miles/30 km.
– Engine temperature display.
– With equipment version with Head-up GREEN info
Display and navigation:
The achieved range extension may be dis-
Distance to destination. played as a bonus range.
When destination guidance is activated
in the navigation system. Average consumption
– With equipment version with Head-up This is calculated for the period while the
Display and navigation: engine is running.
Time of arrival. The average consumption is calculated for
the distance traveled since the last reset by
the Onboard Computer.
140
Displays CONTROLS
Average speed Display

Periods in which the vehicle is parked with
the engine manually stopped are not in-
cluded in the calculation of the average
speed.
Resetting average values
With equipment version with Head-up

Display and navigation: distance to
destination
The distance remaining to the destination is
displayed if a destination is entered in the
Press and hold the button on the turn signal navigation system before the trip is started.
lever. The distance to the destination is adopted
automatically.
Engine temperature display
With equipment version with Head-up
Concept Display and navigation: time of arrival
Displays the current engine temperature, The estimated time of arrival is displayed if
based on a combination of coolant and en- a destination is entered in the navigation
gine oil temperature. As soon as the opti- system before the trip is started.
mum operating temperature has been at- The time must be correctly set.
tained, the indicator is in the center
position. Speed Limit Info
Speed Limit Info shows the current maxi-
General information mum permitted speed in the instrument
If the engine oil or coolant, and thus the en- cluster.
gine, become too hot, a Check Control mes-
sage is displayed too. Onboard Computer on the Control
When the engine temperature is too Display
high, a red indicator light is dis-
played. Concept
The Onboard Computer displays different
When the engine oil temperature is
vehicle data on the Control Display, such as
too high, a red indicator light is dis-
average values.
played.
To check the coolant level, refer to
page 276.
141
CONTROLS Displays
General information Driving Excitement

Two types of Onboard Computers are availa-
ble on the Control Display: Concept
– "Onboard info": average values, such as On the Control Display, sport instruments
the consumption, are displayed. The val- can be displayed, and the vehicle state can
ues can be reset individually. be checked before the use of the SPORT
– "Trip computer": the values deliver an program.
overview of a specific route and can be
reset as often as necessary. Sport instruments
Calling up the Onboard Computer or General information
trip computer
On the Control Display, values for power
Via the Central Information Display (CID): and torque are displayed.
1. "My MINI"
Displaying sport instruments
2. "Driving information"
3. "Onboard info" or "Trip computer"
1. "My MINI"
Resetting the Onboard Computer 2. "Technology in action"
Via the Central Information Display (CID): 3. "Sport displays"
1. "My MINI" 4. "Sports instruments"
2. "Driving information" Via MINI Driving Modes switch:
3. "Onboard info" 1. Activate SPORT.
4. "Consumption" or "Speed" 2. "Sport displays"
5. "OK" 3. "Sports instruments"
Resetting the trip computer Vehicle state

Via the Central Information Display (CID): The following vehicle and surrounding area
1. "My MINI" data is automatically checked and evaluated
in succession:
2. "Driving information"
– Range.
3. "Trip computer"
– Engine temperature.
4. Move the Controller to the left, if – External temperature.
needed.
– SPORT program state.
– "Reset": all values are reset.
Finally, a total evaluation of the vehicle
– "Automatic reset": all values are state is displayed.
reset approx. 4 hours after the vehi-
cle has come to a standstill.
5. If necessary, "OK"
142
Displays CONTROLS
Checking vehicle state Activating/deactivating

2. "Technology in action" 2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Sport displays" 3. "Speed warning"
4. "Vehicle and surroundings" 4. "Speed warning"
Via the MINI Driving Modes switch:
Setting your current speed as the
1. Activate SPORT.
speed warning
2. "Sport displays"
3. "Vehicle and surroundings"
1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings"
Speed warning 3. "Speed warning"
4. "Select current speed"
Concept
A speed limit can be set that when reached
will cause a warning to be issued. LED ring on the central in-
strument cluster
General information
The warning is repeated if the vehicle speed Concept
exceeds the set speed limit again, after it
has dropped below it by 3 mph/5 km/h. The LED ring displays light animations to
represent specific functions.
Adjusting
Basic displays
Basic functions, for instance the tachome-
1. "My MINI" ter, can be set to be displayed continually if
2. "Vehicle settings" so desired.
3. "Speed warning" Event displays
4. "Warning at:" Functions that are only displayed tempora-
5. Turn the Controller until the desired rily, for instance the volume or temperature
speed is displayed. settings, can be set as event displays.
6. Press the Controller. Several vehicle assistance functions can
also be displayed on the LED ring. This dis-
play corresponds with the displays of the
function in the respective display.
143
CONTROLS Displays
Example: tachometer Setting the brightness

Like the tachometer in the instrument clus- The brightness can be adjusted when night
ter, the light animations of the tachometer's lighting is active in the instrument cluster.
basic display show the current RPMs and Via the Central Information Display (CID):
the respective RPM warning thresholds.
1. "My MINI"
Display 2. "System settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Center Instrument"
5. "Brightness at night"
brightness is set.
currently used.
– Arrow 1: current RPM.
– Arrow 2: prewarning field.
– Arrow 3: warning field. Head-up Display
Switching on/off LED ring Concept
Via the Central Information Display (CID): This system projects important information
1. "My MINI" into the driver's field of vision, for instance
the speed.
The driver can get information without
3. "Displays" averting his or her eyes from the road.
4. "Center Instrument"
5. "Center Instrument" General information
Follow the instructions for cleaning the
Adjusting the LED ring Head-up Display. For additional informa-
tion, see the chapter on care.
1. "My MINI" Safety information
3. "Displays" Warning
4. "Center Instrument" When extending and retracting the projec-
tion screen of the Head-up Display, body
5. "Basic display" or "Event display" parts can be jammed. There is a risk of in-
6. Select the desired setting. jury. Make sure that the area of movement
of the projection screen is clear during
opening and closing.
144
Displays CONTROLS
– Navigation instructions.
NOTICE – Check Control messages.
The Head-up Display consists of sensitive – Selection list from the instrument clus-
components that can easily be scraped or ter.
damaged. There is a risk of damage to
– Driver assistance systems.
property. Do not place any objects on the
Head-up Display, attach to system compo- Some of this information is only displayed
nents or plug into the system. Do not briefly as needed.
move the moving parts manually.
Selecting displays in the Head-up
Display
Overview Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
3. "Displays"
4. "Head-Up Display"
5. "Displayed information"
6. Select the desired displays in the Head-
up Display.
Settings are stored for the driver profile
Switching the Head-up Display currently used.
on/off
When switching on, the projection lens of Setting the brightness
the Head-up Display is extended. When The brightness is automatically adjusted to
switching off, the projection lens of the the ambient brightness.
Head-up Display is retracted again. The basic setting can be adjusted manually.
2. "System settings" 2. "System settings"
3. "Displays" 3. "Displays"
4. "Head-Up Display" 4. "Head-Up Display"
5. "Head-Up Display" 5. "Brightness"
Display brightness is set.
Overview 7. Press the Controller.
The following information is displayed on When the low beams are switched on, the
the Head-up Display: brightness of the Head-up Display can be
additionally influenced using the instru-
– Vehicle speed. ment lighting, refer to page 152.
145
CONTROLS Displays
The setting is stored for the driver profile – Sunglasses with certain polarization fil-
currently used. ters.
– Wet roads.
Adjusting the height – Unfavorable light conditions.
1. "My MINI"
John Cooper Works: sport dis-
3. "Displays"
plays in the Head-up Display
4. "Head-Up Display"
General information
5. "Height"
The sport displays in the Head-up Display
6. Turn the Controller until the desired assist with a sporty driving style.
height is reached.
7. Press the Controller. Switching on
The setting is stored for the driver profile Via the Central Information Display (CID):
currently used.
1. "My MINI"
Setting the rotation 2. "System settings"
The screen of the Head-up Display can be 3. "Displays"
rotated around its own axis. 4. "Head-Up Display"
Via the Central Information Display (CID): 5. "Displayed information"
1. "My MINI" 6. "Sport displays"
2. "System settings" With navigation system: if the sport dis-
3. "Displays" plays are switched on, no navigation con-
tent will be displayed on the Head-up Dis-
4. "Head-Up Display" play.
5. "Rotation"
6. Turn the Controller until the desired set- Display
ting is selected.
currently used.
Display visibility
The visibility of the displays in the Head-up
Display is influenced by the following fac-
tors:
1 Vehicle speed
– Certain sitting positions.
2 Shift point indicator
– Objects on the cover of the Head-up Dis-
play. 3 Gear display
146
Displays CONTROLS
4 Current engine speed 2. "Vehicle status"

5 Warning field, speed
Information at a glance
Shift point indicator Symbols Description
Concept "Flat Tire Monitor": status of

the Flat Tire Monitor, refer
The shift point indicator in the Head-up to page 163.
Display indicates the optimum shifting
point. Thus, with a sporty driving style, the "Tire Pressure Monitor": sta-
best possible vehicle acceleration is ach- tus of the Tire Pressure
ieved. Monitor, refer to page 158.
"Engine oil level": Electronic
Functional requirements engine oil level check, refer
– Steptronic Sport transmission: to page 272.
Manual mode M/S and, if necessary, Dy- "Check Control": Check Con-
namic Traction Control DTC are acti- trol messages are stored in
vated. the background and can be
– Press the accelerator pedal all the way displayed on the Control
down. Display. Displaying stored
Check Control messages, re-
Display fer to page 133.
Successive gray illuminated fields indicate "Service required": display-
the upcoming shift moment. ing service requirements,
Shift up immediately when the red fields refer to page 136.
light up. "Teleservice Call": Serv-
When the maximum speed is reached, the ice Request.
entire display flashes red and the supply of
fuel is interrupted in order to protect the
engine.
Vehicle status
General information
The status can be displayed and actions per-
formed for several systems.
Opening the vehicle status

1. "My MINI"
147
CONTROLS Lights
Lights
Vehicle features and options Symbol Function
Parking lights.
the series. It also describes features that are Low beams.
country versions. This also applies to safety- Instrument lighting.
Parking lights, low beams and

Overview roadside parking lights
Switches in the vehicle General information
Position of switch: , ,
If the driver's door is opened when the igni-
tion is switched off, the exterior lighting is
automatically switched off.
Parking lights
Position of switch:
The vehicle is illuminated on all sides.
The light switch element is located next to Do not use the parking lights for extended
the steering wheel. periods; otherwise, the battery may become
discharged and it would then be impossible
Symbol Function to start the engine.
Front fog lights. When parking, switch on the one-sided
roadside parking light, refer to page 149.
Automatic headlight control. Low beams

Cornering light. Position of switch:
The low beams light up when the ignition is
Lights off. switched on.
Daytime running lights.
148
Lights CONTROLS
Canada: roadside parking light 3. "Lighting"

4. "Exterior lighting"
Concept
5. "Welcome lights"
The vehicle can be illuminated on one side.
currently used.
Switching on
Headlight courtesy delay feature
General information
The low beams stay lit for a short while if
the headlight flasher is switched on after
the vehicle's radio-ready state is switched
off.
Setting the duration

With radio-ready state switched off, press Via the Central Information Display (CID):
the lever either up or down past the resist-
ance point for approx. 2 seconds. 1. "My MINI"
Switching off 3. "Lighting"
Briefly press the lever to the resistance 4. "Exterior lighting"
point in the opposite direction.
5. "Pathway lighting"
6. Set length of time.
Welcome lights and headlight The setting is stored for the driver profile
courtesy delay feature currently used.
Welcome lights Automatic headlight control

General information
Concept
the ambient brightness, individual light The low beams are switched on and off au-
functions may be switched on briefly when tomatically depending on the ambient
the vehicle is unlocked. brightness, for example in tunnels, in twi-
light or if there is precipitation.
Position of switch: , General information
Via the Central Information Display (CID): A blue sky with the sun low on the horizon
can cause the lights to be switched on.
1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings" Activating
Position of switch:
149
CONTROLS Lights
The indicator light in the instrument cluster In tight curves, for instance on mountain-
is illuminated when the low beams are ous roads or when turning, an additional,
switched on. cornering light is switched on that lights up
the inside of the curve when the vehicle is
System limits moving below a certain speed.
The automatic headlight control cannot The cornering light is automatically
serve as a substitute for your personal judg- switched on depending on the steering an-
ment of lighting conditions. gle or, where applicable, the use of turn sig-
nals.
For example, the sensors are unable to de-
tect fog or hazy weather. In these situa- When driving in reverse, the cornering
tions, switch the lights on manually. lights may be automatically switched on re-
gardless of the steering angle.
Daytime running lights

Adaptive headlight range con-
General information trol
Position of switch: , ,
The adaptive headlight range control fea-
The daytime running lights light up when ture balances out acceleration and braking
the ignition is switched on. After the igni- processes as well as the vehicle load condi-
tion is switched off, the parking lights light tions in order to avoid dazzling oncoming
up in position . traffic. Illumination of the road is optimized.
In some countries, daytime running lights High-beam Assistant
are mandatory, so it may not be possible to
deactivate the daytime running lights.
Concept
The high-beam Assistant detects other traf-
1. "My MINI" fic participants early on and automatically
2. "Vehicle settings" switches the high beams on or off depend-
ing on the traffic situation.
3. "Lighting"
4. "Exterior lighting" General information
5. Select the desired setting. The high-beam Assistant ensures that the
Settings are stored for the currently used high beams are switched on, whenever the
vehicle key. traffic situation allows. In the low speed
range, the high beams are not switched on
by the system.
Cornering light The system responds to light from oncom-
ing traffic and traffic driving ahead of you,
and to ambient lighting, for instance in
General information towns and cities.
Position of switch:
150
Lights CONTROLS
The high beams can be switched on and off – In very unfavorable weather conditions,
manually at any time. such as fog or heavy precipitation.
– When detecting poorly-lit road users
Activating/deactivating such as pedestrians, cyclists, horseback
riders and wagons; when driving close
to train or ship traffic; or at animal
crossings.
– In tight curves, on hilltops or in depres-
sions, in crossing traffic or half-ob-
scured oncoming traffic on highways.
– In poorly-lit towns and cities or in the
presence of highly reflective signs.
– When the windshield in front of the in-
Position of switch, depending on the vehicle terior mirror is fogged over, dirty or cov-
equipment: , ered with stickers, etc.
Press the button on the turn signal lever.
The indicator light in the instrument Fog lights

cluster is illuminated when the low
beams are switched on. Front fog lights
The headlights are automatically switched
between low beams and high beams. Concept
The blue indicator light in the instru- The front fog lights work alongside the low
ment cluster lights up when the sys- beams to illuminate a wider area of the
tem switches on the high beams. roadway.
The high-beam Assistant is deactivated Functional requirement

when manually switching the high beams The low beams must be switched on before
on and off, refer to page 112. switching on the front fog lights.
To reactivate the high-beam Assistant,
press the button on the turn signal lever. Switching on/off
Press the button.
System limits
The green indicator light lights up if
The high-beam Assistant cannot serve as a the front fog lights are switched on.
substitute for the driver's personal judg-
ment of when to use the high beams. In sit- If the automatic headlight control, refer to
uation that require this, therefore switch off page 149, is activated, the low beams will
manually. come on automatically when you switch on
The system is not fully functional in the fol- the front fog lights.
lowing situations, and driver intervention When the high beams or headlight flasher
may be necessary: are activated, the front fog lights are not
switched on.
151
CONTROLS Lights
Instrument lighting Switching the interior lights on/off

Press the button.
The parking lights or low beams must be To switch off permanently: press the button
switched on to adjust the brightness. and hold for approx. 3 seconds.
Adjusting Switching the reading lights on and

Adjust the brightness with the off manually
thumbwheel. Press the button.
The reading lights are located in the front

next to the interior light.
Ambient light
Interior lights
General information
General information Depending on the equipment version, light-
Depending on the equipment, the interior ing can be adjusted for some lights in the
lights, footwell lights, entry lights, and cour- car's interior.
tesy lights are controlled automatically.
The thumbwheel for the instrument lighting Activating/deactivating
controls brightness of some of these fea- Via the Central Information Display (CID):
tures.
1. "My MINI"
Overview 2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Lighting"
4. "Interior lighting"
5. "Ambient lighting"
Settings are stored for the profile currently
used.
Changing color
1 Interior lights Push the switch forward or back:
2 Reading lights manual color change.
3 Ambient light Press the switch forward or back-
ward and hold for approx. 3 seconds,
until the ambient light illuminates
152
Lights CONTROLS
several times: automatic color change. Push

the switch again to end color changes.
Setting the brightness

Depending on the equipment, the bright-
ness of the ambient light can be adjusted
via the thumbwheel for the instrument
lighting or on the Control Display.
1. "My MINI"
3. "Lighting"
4. "Interior lighting"
5. "Brightness"
6. Adjust the brightness.
153
CONTROLS Safety
Safety
Airbags
1 Front airbag, driver 4 Side airbag

2 Front airbag, front passenger 5 Knee airbag
3 Head airbag
Front airbags Side airbag

Front airbags help protect the driver and In the event of a side impact, the side air-
the front passenger by responding to frontal bag protects the side of the body in the
impacts in which safety belts alone would chest and lap area.
not provide adequate protection.
154
Safety CONTROLS
Head airbag feet and legs in the floor area and does
In the event of a side impact, the head air- not support them on the dashboard.
bag protects the head. – Make sure that occupants keep their
heads away from the side airbag.
Ejection Mitigation – There should be no additional persons,
The head airbag system is designed as an animals or objects between an airbag
ejection mitigation countermeasure to re- and a person.
duce the likelihood of ejections of vehicle – Dashboard and windshield on the front
occupants through side windows during passenger side must stay clear - do not
rollovers or side impact events. attach adhesive labels or coverings and
do not attach brackets or cables, for in-
Knee airbag stance for GPS devices or mobile
phones.
The knee airbag protects the legs in the
event of a frontal impact. – Do not apply adhesive materials to the
airbag cover panels, do not cover them
Protective effect or modify them in any way.
Airbags are not triggered in every impact – Do not use the cover of the front airbag
situation, for instance in less severe acci- on the front passenger side as a storage
dents or rear-end collisions. area.
– Do not attach slip covers, seat cushions
Information on optimum effect of the or other objects to the front passenger
airbags seat that are not specifically suited for
seats with integrated side airbags.
– Do not place seat cushions or other ob-
Warning
jects on the front seats that are not spe-
If the seat position is incorrect or the de- cifically suited for seats with integrated
ployment area of the airbags is impaired, side airbags.
the airbag system cannot provide protec-
– Do not hang pieces of clothing, such as
tion as intended and may cause additional
jackets, over the backrests.
injuries due to triggering. There is a risk
of injuries or danger to life. Follow the in- – Never modify either the individual com-
formation on achieving the optimum pro- ponents or the wiring in the airbag sys-
tective effect of the airbag system. tem. This also applies to steering wheel
covers, the dashboard, and the seats.
– Keep a distance from the airbags. – Do not remove the airbag system.
– Always grasp the steering wheel on the Even when you follow all instructions very
steering wheel rim. Hold your hands at closely, injury from contact with the airbags
the 3 o'clock and 9 o'clock positions, to cannot be fully ruled out in certain situa-
keep the risk of injury to your hands or tions.
arms as low as possible when the airbag The ignition and inflation noise may lead to
is triggered. short-term and, in most cases, temporary
– Make sure that the front passenger is hearing impairment in sensitive occupants.
sitting correctly, i.e., keeps his or her Vehicle modifications for a person with dis-
abilities may affect the air bag system; con-
155
CONTROLS Safety
tact MINI Customer Relations for further in- Automatic deactivation of the
formation. front-seat passenger airbags
Warnings and information on the airbags
are also found on the sun visors. Concept
The system reads if the front passenger seat
Functional readiness of the airbag is occupied by measuring the human body's
system resistance.
Front, knee, and side airbag on the front
Safety information passenger's side are activated or deacti-
vated.
Warning
Individual components can be hot after
General information
triggering of the airbag system. There is a Before transporting a child on the front pas-
risk of injury. Do not touch individual senger seat, refer to the safety information
components. and instructions for children on the front
passenger seat, see Children.
Warning Safety information

Improperly executed work can lead to fail-
ure, malfunction or unintentional trigger- Warning
ing of the airbag system. In the case of a To ensure the front-seat passenger airbag
malfunction, the airbag system might not function, the system must be able to de-
trigger as intended despite the accident tect whether a person is sitting in the
severity. There is a risk of injuries or dan- front passenger seat. The entire seat cush-
ger to life. Have the airbag system ion area must be used for this purpose.
checked, repaired, dismantled and scrap- There is a risk of injuries or danger to life.
ped by a dealer’s service center or another Make sure that the front passenger keeps
qualified service center or repair shop. his or her feet in the floor area.
Correct function Malfunction of the automatic

When the ignition is switched on, deactivation system
the warning light in the instrument When transporting older children and
cluster lights up briefly and thereby adults, the front-seat passenger airbags may
indicates the operational readiness of the be deactivated in certain sitting positions.
entire airbag system and the belt tensioner. In this case, the indicator light for the front-
seat passenger airbags lights up.
Airbag system malfunctioning In this case, change the sitting position so
that the front-seat passenger airbags are ac-
– Warning light does not come on when
tivated and the indicator light goes out.
the ignition is switched on.
If it is not possible to activate the airbags,
– The warning light lights up continu-
have the person sit in the rear.
ously.
156
Safety CONTROLS
To enable correct recognition of the occu- Detected child restraint systems

pied seat cushion. The system generally detects children
– Do not attach covers, cushions, ball mats seated in a child restraint system, particu-
or other items to the front passenger larly in child restraint systems required by
seat unless they are specifically deter- NHTSA at the point in time when the vehi-
mined to be safe for use on the front cle was manufactured. After installing a
passenger seat. child restraint system, make sure that the
– Do not place any electronic devices on indicator light for the front-seat passenger
the front passenger seat if a child re- airbags lights up. This indicates that the
straint system is to be installed on it. child restraint system has been detected
and the front-seat passenger airbags are not
– Do not place objects under the seat that
activated.
could press against the seat from below.
– No moisture in or on the seat. Strength of the driver's and front-
Indicator light for the front-seat seat passenger airbag
passenger airbags The explosive power that activates driver's/
front-seat passenger airbags very much de-
pends on the positions of the driver's/front
passenger seat.
To maintain the accuracy of this function
over the long-term, calibrate the front seats
as soon as a relevant Check Control mes-
sage is displayed. A message also appears
on the Control Display.
Calibrating the front seats

The indicator light for the front-seat passen-
ger airbags indicates the operating state of
the front-seat passenger airbags. Warning
The light indicates whether the airbags are There is a risk of jamming when moving
either activated or deactivated. the seats. There is a risk of injury or risk
– The indicator light lights area of movement of the seat is clear prior
up when a child is properly to any adjustment.
seated in a child restraint
system or when the seat is An appropriate Check Control message is
empty. The airbags on the displayed.
front passenger side are
not activated. 1. Move the respective seat all the way for-
ward.
– The indicator light does not light up
when, for instance a correctly seated 2. Move the respective seat forward again.
person of sufficient size is detected on The seat moves forward briefly.
the seat. The airbags on the front pas- 3. Readjust the seat to the desired posi-
senger side are activated. tion.
157
CONTROLS Safety
The calibration procedure is completed Status display

when the Check Control message disap-
pears. Current status
If the message continues to be displayed, The system status can be displayed on the
repeat the calibration. Control Display, e.g., whether or not the sys-
If the message does not disappear after a re- tem is active.
peat calibration, have the system checked Via the Central Information Display (CID):
as soon as possible.
1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle status"
Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 3. "Tire Pressure Monitor"
The current status is displayed.
Concept
The system monitors tire inflation pressure Tire conditions
in the four mounted tires. The system warns
you if there is a significant loss of pressure General information
in one or more tires.
Tire and system status are indicated by the
color of the wheels and a SMS text message
General information on the Control Display.
Sensors in the tire valves measure the tire
inflation pressure and, depending on the All wheels green
model, the tire temperature. System is active and will issue a warning re-
Further information and instructions on us- lated to the tire inflation pressures stored
ing the system can also be found under Tire during the last reset.
inflation pressure, refer to page 246.
One to four yellow wheels
Functional requirements A flat tire or major drop in the tire inflation
The following conditions must be met for pressure has occurred in the indicated tires.
the system; otherwise, reliable flagging of a
loss of tire inflation pressure is not assured: Gray wheels
– After a tire or wheel replacement, a re- It may not be possible to identify tire infla-
set was performed with the correct tire tion pressure losses.
inflation pressure. Possible causes:
– After the tire inflation pressure was ad- – Malfunction.
justed to a new value, a reset was per-
formed. – The system is being reset.
– Wheels with TPM wheel electronics. Additional information
The status control display additionally
shows the current tire inflation pressures.
The values shown are instantaneous meas-
urements and may vary depending on driv-
ing style or weather conditions.
158
Safety CONTROLS
Resetting the system on run-flat tires and continued driving

Via the Central Information Display (CID): with these tires.
1. "My MINI"
If a tire inflation pressure check is
2. "Vehicle status"
required
3. "Tire Pressure Monitor"
4. Start the engine but do not drive off. Message
5. Reset the tire inflation pressure using A symbol with a Check Control message ap-
"Perform reset". pears on the Control Display.
6. Drive away. Symbol Possible cause
The wheels are displayed in gray and the The system has detected a
following is displayed "Resetting Tire wheel change, but no reset was
Pressure Monitor…". done.
After a travel time of several minutes, the No reset was performed for the
set tire inflation pressures are accepted as system. The system issues a
reference values. The resetting process is warning based on the tire infla-
completed automatically while driving. tion pressures stored during the
After successful completion of the reset, the last reset.
tires appear in green on the Control Display Inflation was not carried out ac-
and "Tire Pressure Monitor active. See label cording to specifications.
for recommended pressures." is displayed.
The tire inflation pressure has
You may interrupt this trip at any time. fallen below the level of the last
When you continue the reset resumes auto- reset.
matically.
Messages Measure
1. Check the tire pressure and correct as
General information needed.
A low tire inflation pressure may cause the 2. Reset the system.
DSC Dynamic Stability Control to be
switched on. If the tire inflation pressure is too low
Safety information Message

A yellow warning light is illuminated
Warning in the instrument cluster.
A damaged regular tire with low or miss-
In addition, a symbol with a Check Control
ing tire inflation pressure impacts han-
message appears on the Control Display.
dling, such as steering and braking re-
sponse. Run-flat tires can maintain limited
stability. There is a risk of accident. Do not
continue driving if the vehicle is equipped
with normal tires. Follow the information
159
CONTROLS Safety
Symbol Possible cause Measure

There is a tire inflation pressure 1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously.
loss. Avoid sudden braking and steering ma-
neuvers.
No reset was performed for the
system. The system issues a 2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted with
warning based on the tire infla- normal tires or run-flat tires.
tion pressures stored during the Run-flat tires, refer to page 257, are la-
last reset. beled with a circular symbol containing
the letters RSC marked on the tire's
Measure sidewall.
1. Reduce your speed and drive moder- Actions in the event of a flat tire
ately. Do not exceed a speed of
80 mph/130 km/h.
Normal tires
2. At the next opportunity, for instance gas
1. Identify the damaged tire.
station, check and correct the tire infla-
tion pressure in all four tires, if neces- To do this, check the tire inflation pres-
sary. sure in all four tires, for instance using
the tire pressure gage of a flat tire kit.
3. Reset the system.
If the tire inflation pressure in all four
If there is a significant loss of tire tires is correct, the Tire Pressure Moni-
inflation pressure tor may not have been reset. In this
case, perform the reset.
Message If the tire inflation pressure in all four
tires is correct, the Flat Tire Monitor
A yellow warning light is illuminated may not have been initialized. In this
in the instrument cluster. case, initialize the system.
In addition, a symbol with the affected tire If identification of flat tire damage is
appears in a Check Control message on the not possible, please contact a dealer’s
Control Display. service center or another qualified serv-
ice center or repair shop.
Symbol Possible cause
2. Repair the flat tire, e.g., with a flat tire
There is a flat tire or a major kit or by changing the wheel.
loss in tire inflation pressure. Use of sealant, for instance from the flat tire
No reset was performed for the kit, may damage the TPM wheel electronics.
system. The system issues a In this case, have the electronics checked
warning based on the tire infla- and replaced at the next opportunity.
tion pressures stored during the
last reset.
160
Safety CONTROLS
Run-flat tires the distance for which it may be safe to

drive may be up to 50 miles/80 km.
Safety information
Vehicle handling with damaged tires
Warning Vehicles driven with a damaged tire will
handle differently, potentially leading to
Your vehicle handles differently with a conditions such as the following:
run-flat tire with no or low inflation pres-
sure; for instance, your lane stability when – Greater likelihood of swerving off
braking is reduced, braking distances are course.
longer and the self-steering properties will – Longer braking distances.
change. There is a risk of accident. Drive – Changed self-steering properties.
moderately and do not exceed a speed of
Modify your driving style. Avoid abrupt
50 mph/80 km/h.
steering maneuvers or driving over obsta-
cles, for instance curbs or potholes.
Maximum speed
Final tire failure
You may continue driving with a damaged
tire at speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h. Vibrations or loud noises while driving can
indicate the final failure of a tire.
Continued driving with a flat tire Reduce speed and stop; otherwise, pieces of
If continuing to drive with a damaged tire: the tire could come loose and cause an acci-
dent.
1. Avoid sudden braking and steering ma- Do not continue driving. Contact a dealer’s
neuvers. service center or another qualified service
2. Do not exceed a speed of center or repair shop.
50 mph/80 km/h.
3. Check the tire inflation pressure in all System limits
four tires at the next opportunity.
If the tire inflation pressure in all four Temperature
tires is correct, the Tire Pressure Moni- The tire inflation pressure depends on the
tor may not have been reset. In this tire's temperature.
case, perform the reset. Driving or exposure to the sun will increase
the tire's temperature, thus increasing the
Possible driving range with a tire inflation pressure.
depressurized tire
The tire inflation pressure is reduced when
The distance for which it may be possible to the tire temperature falls again.
drive safely varies depending on how the
These circumstances may cause a warning
vehicle is loaded and used, e.g., speed, road
when temperatures fall very sharply.
conditions, external temperature. The driv-
ing range may be less but may also be more
if an economical driving style is used. Sudden tire pressure loss
If the vehicle is loaded with an average The system cannot indicate sudden serious
weight and used under favorable conditions, tire damage caused by external circumstan-
ces.
161
CONTROLS Safety
Failure performing a reset feature, your vehicle has been equipped

The system does not function properly if a with a tire pressure monitoring system
reset has not been carried out, for instance (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure
a flat tire is reported though tire inflation telltale when one or more of your tires is
pressures are correct. significantly under-inflated. Accordingly,
when the low tire pressure telltale illumi-
nates, you should stop and check your tires
Malfunction as soon as possible, and inflate them to the
The yellow warning light flashes and proper pressure. Driving on a significantly
is then illuminated continuously. A under-inflated tire causes the tire to over-
Check Control message is displayed. heat and can lead to tire failure. Under-infla-
It may not be possible to identify tire pres- tion also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
sure losses. tread life, and may affect the vehicle's han-
Examples and recommendations in the fol- dling and stopping ability. Please note that
lowing situations: the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire
– A wheel without TPM wheel electronics, maintenance, and it is the driver's responsi-
for instance an emergency wheel, is bility to maintain correct tire pressure, even
mounted: have it checked by a dealer’s if under-inflation has not reached the level
service center or another qualified serv- to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire
ice center or repair shop as needed. pressure telltale. Your vehicle has also been
equipped with a TPMS malfunction indica-
– Malfunction: have system checked by a tor to indicate when the system is not oper-
dealer’s service center or another quali- ating properly. The TPMS malfunction indi-
fied service center or repair shop. cator is combined with the low tire pressure
– The system was unable to complete the telltale. When the system detects a mal-
reset. Perform a system reset again. function, the telltale will flash for approxi-
– Interference caused by systems or devi- mately one minute and then remain contin-
ces with the same radio frequency: after uously illuminated. This sequence will
leaving the area of the interference, the continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups
system automatically becomes active as long as the malfunction exists. When the
again. malfunction indicator is illuminated, the
system may not be able to detect or signal
Declaration according to NHTSA/ low tire pressure as intended. TPMS mal-
FMVSS 138 Tire Pressure Monitoring functions may occur for a variety of rea-
System sons, including the installation of replace-
ment or alternate tires or wheels on the
Each tire, including the spare (if provided) vehicle that prevent the TPMS from func-
should be checked monthly when cold and tioning properly. Always check the TPMS
inflated to the inflation pressure recom- malfunction telltale after replacing one or
mended by the vehicle manufacturer on the more tires or wheels on your vehicle to en-
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure la- sure that the replacement or alternate tires
bel. (If your vehicle has tires of a different and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to
size than the size indicated on the vehicle function properly.
placard or tire inflation pressure label, you
should determine the proper tire inflation
pressure for those tires.) As an added safety
162
Safety CONTROLS
Flat Tire Monitor FTM – After the tire inflation pressure has
been adjusted.
– After a tire or wheel replacement.
Concept
The system detects tire inflation pressure Performing initialization
loss on the basis of rotation speed differen-
ces between the individual wheels while When initializing, the set tire inflation
driving. pressures serve as reference values in order
to detect a flat tire. Initialization is started
In the event of a tire inflation pressure loss, by confirming the tire inflation pressures.
the diameter and therefore the rotational
speed of the corresponding wheel changes. Do not initialize the system when driving
The difference will be detected and reported with snow chains.
as a flat tire. Via the Central Information Display (CID):
The system does not measure the actual in- 1. "My MINI"
flation pressure in the tires.
2. "Vehicle status"
Functional requirements 3. "Flat Tire Monitor"
The following conditions must be met for 4. Start the engine but do not drive off.
the system; otherwise, reliable flagging of a 5. Start the initialization with: "Perform
loss of tire inflation pressure is not assured: reset".
– After a tire or wheel replacement, an ini- 6. Drive away.
tialization was performed with the cor-
rect tire inflation pressure. The initialization is completed while driv-
ing, which can be interrupted at any time.
– After the tire pressure was adjusted to a
new value, an initialization was per- The initialization automatically continues
formed. when driving resumes.
Status display Messages

The current status of the flat tire monitor General information
can be displayed, for instance whether the
RPA is active. When a flat tire is indicated, DSC Dynamic
Stability Control is switched on, if needed.
1. "My MINI" Safety information
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Flat Tire Monitor" Warning
The status is displayed. A damaged regular tire with low or miss-
ing tire inflation pressure impacts han-
Initialization required dling, such as steering and braking re-
sponse. Run-flat tires can maintain limited
An initialization must be performed in the stability. There is a risk of accident. Do not
following situations: continue driving if the vehicle is equipped
with normal tires. Follow the information
163
CONTROLS Safety
on run-flat tires and continued driving If identification of flat tire damage is

with these tires. not possible, please contact a dealer’s
service center or another qualified serv-
Indication of a flat tire 2. Repair the flat tire, e.g., with a flat tire
A yellow warning light is illuminated kit or by changing the wheel.
in the instrument cluster. Use of sealant, for instance from the flat tire
kit, may damage the TPM wheel electronics.
In addition, a symbol with a Check Control In this case, have the electronics checked
message appears on the Control Display. and replaced at the next opportunity.
Symbol Possible cause
Run-flat tires
There is a flat tire or a major
loss in tire inflation pressure. Safety information
Measure Warning
1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously. Your vehicle handles differently with a
Avoid sudden braking and steering ma- run-flat tire with no or low inflation pres-
neuvers. sure; for instance, your lane stability when
2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted with braking is reduced, braking distances are
normal tires or run-flat tires. longer and the self-steering properties will
change. There is a risk of accident. Drive
Run-flat tires, refer to page 257, are la- moderately and do not exceed a speed of
beled with a circular symbol containing 50 mph/80 km/h.
the letters RSC marked on the tire's
sidewall.
Maximum speed
Actions in the event of a flat tire You may continue driving with a damaged
tire at speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h.
Normal tires
1. Identify the damaged tire. Continued driving with a flat tire
To do this, check the tire inflation pres- If continuing to drive with a damaged tire:
sure in all four tires, for instance using 1. Avoid sudden braking and steering ma-
the tire pressure gage of a flat tire kit. neuvers.
If the tire inflation pressure in all four 2. Do not exceed a speed of
tires is correct, the Tire Pressure Moni- 50 mph/80 km/h.
tor may not have been reset. In this
case, perform the reset. 3. Check the tire inflation pressure in all
four tires at the next opportunity.
If the tire inflation pressure in all four
tires is correct, the Flat Tire Monitor If the tire inflation pressure in all four
may not have been initialized. In this tires is correct, the Flat Tire Monitor
case, initialize the system. may not have been initialized. In this
case, initialize the system.
164
Safety CONTROLS
Possible driving range with a – Sudden serious tire damage caused by

depressurized tire external circumstances cannot be recog-
The distance for which it may be possible to nized in advance.
drive safely varies depending on how the – When the system has not been initial-
vehicle is loaded and used, e.g., speed, road ized.
conditions, external temperature. The driv- – When driving on a snowy or slippery
ing range may be less but may also be more road surface.
if an economical driving style is used.
– Sporty driving style: spinning traction
If the vehicle is loaded with an average wheels, high lateral acceleration (drift-
weight and used under favorable conditions, ing).
the distance for which it may be safe to
– When driving with snow chains.
drive may be up to 50 miles/80 km.
Vehicle handling with damaged tires

Vehicles driven with a damaged tire will
Intelligent Safety
handle differently, potentially leading to
conditions such as the following: Concept
– Greater likelihood of swerving off Intelligent Safety enables central operation
course. of the driver assistance systems.
– Longer braking distances. The intelligent safety systems can help pre-
– Changed self-steering properties. vent an imminent collision.
Modify your driving style. Avoid abrupt – Approach control warning with City
steering maneuvers or driving over obsta- light braking function, refer to
cles, for instance curbs or potholes. page 166.
– Daytime pedestrian collision mitigation,
Final tire failure refer to page 170.
Vibrations or loud noises while driving can
indicate the final failure of a tire. Safety information
Reduce speed and stop; otherwise, pieces of
the tire could come loose and cause an acci- Warning
dent. The system cannot serve as a substitute
Do not continue driving. Contact a dealer’s for the driver’s personal judgment in as-
service center or another qualified service sessing visibility and traffic situation.
center or repair shop. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving
System limits closely and actively intervene where ap-
The system could be delayed or malfunction propriate.
in the following situations:
– A natural, even tire inflation pressure
loss in all four tires will not be recog-
nized. Therefore, check the tire inflation
pressure regularly.
165
CONTROLS Safety
Press button briefly:

Warning – The menu for the Intelligent
Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a Safety system is displayed. The
substitute for the driver’s personal judg- systems are individually
ment. Due to its limits, the system may not switched off according to their
issue warnings or reactions, or these may respective settings.
be issued late or in a manner that is not – LED lights up orange or goes out respec-
consistent with their normal use. There is tive to their individual settings.
a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to
Adjust the settings as needed. The individ-
traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely
ual settings are stored for the driver profile
and actively intervene where appropriate.
currently in use.
Press button again:

Warning – All Intelligent Safety systems
Due to system limits, individual functions are switched on.
can malfunction during tow-starting/ – The LED lights up green.
towing with the Intelligent Safety systems
activated. There is a risk of accident. Hold down button:
Switch all Intelligent Safety systems off
– All Intelligent Safety systems
prior to tow-starting/towing.
are switched off.
– The LED goes out.
Overview
Button in the vehicle Approach control warning
with city light braking func-
tion
Concept
The system may prevent some accidents. In
the event of an accident, the system may re-
duce impact speed.
The system sounds a warning before an im-
Intelligent Safety button minent collision and activates brakes inde-
pendently, if needed.
The Brake Assistant function activates and
Switching on/off applies the brakes with limited force and
Some Intelligent Safety systems are auto- duration.
matically active after every departure. Some A camera at the base of the interior mirror
Intelligent Safety systems activate accord- controls the system.
ing to the last setting. The approach control warning is available
even if cruise control has been deactivated.
166
Safety CONTROLS
With the vehicle approaching another vehi-

cle intentionally, the approach control warn- Warning
ing and braking are delayed in order to Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a
avoid false system reactions. substitute for the driver’s personal judg-
ment. Due to its limits, the system may not
General information issue warnings or reactions, or these may
The system warns at two levels of an immi- be issued late or in a manner that is not
nent danger of collision at speeds from ap- consistent with their normal use. There is
prox. 3 mph/5 km/h. The timing of warn- a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to
ings may vary with the current driving traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely
situation. and actively intervene where appropriate.
Braking is performed at speeds up to ap-
proximately 35 mph/60 km/h.
Warning
Detection range Due to system limits, individual functions
can malfunction during tow-starting/
activated. There is a risk of accident.
Switch all Intelligent Safety systems off
Overview
Button in the vehicle
Objects that the system can detect are
taken into account.
Safety information
Warning
sessing visibility and traffic situation.
There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving Intelligent Safety button
closely and actively intervene where ap-
propriate.
167
CONTROLS Safety
Camera – The LED goes out.
Setting the warning time

The warning time can be set via the Central
Information Display (CID).
1. "My MINI"
3. "Intelligent Safety"
4. "Warning time"
The camera is installed near the interior
mirror. 5. Select the desired setting.
Keep the windshield in front of the interior The selected warning time is stored for the
mirror clean and clear. driver profile currently in use.
Switching on/off Warning with braking function

Display
Switching on automatically
A warning symbol appears in the instru-
The system is automatically active after ev-
ment cluster and in the Head-up Display if a
ery driving off.
collision with a detected vehicle is immi-
nent.
Switching on/off manually
Symbol Measure
– The menu for the Intelligent Symbol lights up red: prewarn-
Safety system is displayed. The ing.
systems are individually Brake and increase distance.
switched off according to their
Symbol flashes red and an
respective settings.
acoustic signal sounds: acute
– LED lights up orange or goes out respec- warning.
tive to their individual settings.
Brake and make an evasive ma-
Adjust the settings as needed. The individ- neuver, if necessary.
currently in use.
Prewarning
Press button again: This warning is provided, for instance when
– All Intelligent Safety systems there is impending danger of a collision or
are switched on. the distance to the vehicle ahead is too
small.
– The LED lights up green.
If a prewarning is provided, respond by
Hold down button: braking as warranted.
are switched off.
168
Safety CONTROLS
Acute warning with braking function System limits

An acute warning is displayed when there
is an imminent danger of collision due to Safety information
the vehicle approaching another object at a
high speed. Warning
The driver must intervene actively when The system is designed to operate in cer-
there is an acute warning. If necessary, the tain conditions and circumstances. Due to
driver is assisted by a minor automatic conditions or other factors, the system
braking intervention in a possible risk of may not respond. There may be a risk of
collision. accident or risk of damage to property. Ac-
Acute warnings may be provided even when tively intervene as warranted. Refer to the
there has been no prior warning. information in this Owner’s Manual re-
garding the scope of the system’s opera-
Braking intervention tion and limitations.
The warning prompts the driver to inter-
vene. During a warning, the maximum brak-
ing force is used. In order to activate the Detection range
Brake Assistant function, you must apply The system's detection potential is limited.
the brakes quickly and forcefully. If there is Thus, a system reaction might not come or
a risk of collision, the system may assist might come late.
with braking. When the vehicle is traveling
The following situations may not be de-
at a low speed, the vehicle may come to a
tected, for example:
complete stop.
– Slow moving vehicles when you ap-
Manual transmission: during a braking in-
proach them at high speed.
tervention up to a complete stop, the engine
may be shut down. – Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front
of you, or sharply decelerating vehicles.
The braking intervention occurs only if ve-
hicle stability has not been restricted, – Vehicles with an unusual rear appear-
for instance by deactivating the DSC Dy- ance.
namic Stability Control. – Two-wheeled vehicles ahead of you.
The driver may interrupt the braking inter-
vention function by stepping on the acceler- Functional limitations
ator pedal or by actively moving the steer- The system may not be fully functional in
ing wheel. the following situations:
The system’s ability to detect objects may – In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snow-
be limited in some circumstances. Refer to fall.
the information in this Owner’s Manual re- – In tight curves.
garding the limitations of the system and
actively intervene as warranted. – If the field of view of the camera or the
windshield is dirty or covered.
– If the driving stability control systems
are deactivated, for instance DSC OFF.
169
CONTROLS Safety
– Up to 10 seconds after the start of the Detection range

engine via the Start/Stop button.
– During calibration of the camera imme-
– If there are constant blinding effects be-
cause of oncoming light, for instance
from the sun low in the sky.
Warning sensitivity
The more sensitive the warning settings
are, the more warnings are displayed. The detection area in front of the vehicle is
Therefore, there may also be an excess of divided into two areas:
premature or unjustified warnings and reac- – Central area, arrow 1, directly in front of
tions. the vehicle.
– Expanded area, arrow 2, to the right and
left of the central area.
Daytime pedestrian collision
A collision is imminent if pedestrians are lo-
mitigation cated within the central area. A warning is
issued about pedestrians who are located
Concept within the extended area only if they are
The system may prevent some accidents moving in the direction of the central area.
with pedestrians.
When driving at city speeds, the system Safety information
will issue a warning if there is imminent
risk of a collision with pedestrians, and sup-
Warning
port this with a light braking function.
The camera at the base of the interior mir-
ror controls the system.
sessing visibility and traffic situation.
There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving
General information style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic
In sufficiently bright conditions, the system closely and actively intervene where ap-
issues a warning of a possible risk of colli- propriate.
sion with pedestrians in the speed range
from approx. 6 mph/10 km/h to approx.
35 mph/60 km/h Warning
The system reacts to people who are within Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a
the detection range of the system. substitute for the driver’s personal judg-
ment. Due to its limits, the system may not
issue warnings or reactions, or these may
be issued late or in a manner that is not
consistent with their normal use. There is
a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to
170
Safety CONTROLS
traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely Switching on/off

and actively intervene where appropriate.
The system is automatically active after ev-
Warning ery driving off.
Due to system limits, individual functions
can malfunction during tow-starting/ Switching on/off manually
activated. There is a risk of accident.
Switch all Intelligent Safety systems off – The menu for the Intelligent
prior to tow-starting/towing. Safety system is displayed. The
systems are individually
switched off according to their
Overview respective settings.
– LED lights up orange or goes out respec-
Button in the vehicle tive to their individual settings.
Adjust the settings as needed. The individ-
currently in use.
Press button again:

are switched on.
– The LED lights up green.
Hold down button:

Intelligent Safety button
are switched off.
Camera – The LED goes out.
Warning with braking function

Display
If a collision with a detected person is im-
minent, a warning symbol appears on the
instrument cluster and in the Head-up Dis-
play.
The red symbol is displayed and a
The camera is installed near the interior signal sounds.
mirror.
Intervene immediately by braking or
Keep the windshield in front of the interior make an evasive maneuver.
mirror clean and clear.
171
CONTROLS Safety
Braking intervention Detection range

The warning prompts the driver to inter- The detection potential of the camera is lim-
vene. During a warning, the maximum brak- ited.
ing force is used. In order to activate the Thus, a warning might not be issued or be
Brake Assistant function, you must apply issued late.
the brakes quickly and forcefully. If there is
a risk of collision, the system may assist The following situations may not be de-
tected, for example:
with braking. When the vehicle is traveling
at a low speed, the vehicle may come to a – Partially covered pedestrians.
complete stop. – Pedestrians that are not detected as
Manual transmission: during a braking in- such because of the viewing angle or
tervention up to a complete stop, the engine contour.
may be shut down. – Pedestrians outside of the detection
The braking intervention occurs only if ve- range.
hicle stability has not been restricted, – Pedestrians having a body size less than
for instance by deactivating the DSC Dy- 32 in/80 cm.
namic Stability Control.
The driver may interrupt the braking inter- Functional limitations
vention function by stepping on the acceler- The system may not be fully functional or
ator pedal or by actively moving the steer- may not be available in the following situa-
ing wheel. tions:
The system’s ability to detect objects may – In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snow-
be limited in some circumstances. Refer to fall.
the information in this Owner’s Manual re- – In tight curves.
garding the limitations of the system and
actively intervene as warranted. – If the field of view of the camera or the
System limits – If the driving stability control systems
are deactivated, for instance DSC OFF.
Safety information – Up to 10 seconds after the start of the
engine via the Start/Stop button.
Warning – During calibration of the camera imme-
The system is designed to operate in cer-
tain conditions and circumstances. Due to – If there are constant blinding effects be-
conditions or other factors, the system cause of oncoming light, for instance
may not respond. There may be a risk of from the sun low in the sky.
accident or risk of damage to property. Ac- – When it is dark outside.
tively intervene as warranted. Refer to the
information in this Owner’s Manual re-
garding the scope of the system’s opera-
tion and limitations.
172
Safety CONTROLS
Brake force display driver is rested and alert. Adjust driving

style to traffic conditions.
Concept
Additional brake lights indicate emergency Function
braking to the traffic behind. This can re- The system is switched on each time the en-
duce the risk of a rear-end collision. gine is started and cannot be switched off.
After travel has begun, the system monitors
General information certain aspects of the driver's behavior, so
that decreasing alertness or fatigue can be
detected.
This procedure takes the following criteria
into account:
– Personal driving style, for instance
steering behavior.
– Driving conditions, for instance time,
length of trip.
Starting at approximately 43 mph/70 km/h,
– During normal brake application, the the system is active and can display a rec-
brake lights light up. ommendation to take a break.
– During heavy brake application, the
flashers additionally light up. Break recommendation
If the driver becomes less alert or fatigued,
a message is displayed in the Control Dis-
Fatigue alert play with the recommendation to take a
break.
Concept A recommendation to take a break is dis-
played only once during an uninterrupted
The system can detect decreasing alertness trip.
or fatigue of the driver during long, monoto-
nous trips, for instance on highways. In this After a break, another recommendation to
situation, it is recommended that the driver take a break cannot be displayed until after
takes a break. approximately 45 minutes.
Safety information System limits

The function may be limited in the follow-
ing situations and may issue an incorrect
Warning warning or no warning at all:
The system cannot serve as a substitute – When the clock is set incorrectly.
sessing one's physical state. An increasing – When the vehicle speed is mainly below
lack of alertness or fatigue may not be de- about 43 mph/70 km/h.
tected or not be detected in time. There is
a risk of accident. Make sure that the
173
CONTROLS Safety
– With a sporty driving style, such as dur- Interrupting automatic braking

ing rapid acceleration or when corner- It can be necessary to interrupt automatic
ing fast. braking in certain situations, for instance
– In active driving situations, such as for an evasive maneuver.
when changing lanes frequently. Interrupt automatic braking:
– When the road surface is poor. – By pressing the brake pedal.
– In the event of strong side winds. – By pressing the accelerator pedal.
The system is reset approx. 45 minutes af-
ter parking the vehicle, for instance in the
case of a break during longer trips on high-
ways.
PostCrash – iBrake
Concept
In the event of an accident, the system can
bring the vehicle to a halt automatically
without intervention by the driver in cer-
tain situations. This can reduce the risk of a
further collision and the consequences
thereof.
At standstill
After coming to a halt, the brake is released
automatically. Secure the vehicle against
rolling.
Harder vehicle braking

In certain situations, it can be necessary to
bring the vehicle to a halt more quickly than
the Brake Assistant allows.
To do this, quickly apply extra force to the
brake. For a brief period, the braking pres-
sure will be higher than the braking pres-
sure that is achieved by the automatic brak-
ing function. This interrupts automatic
braking.
174
Driving stability control systems CONTROLS
Driving stability control systems

Vehicle features and options DSC Dynamic Stability Control
This chapter describes all standard, country- Concept
specific and optional features offered with Within the physical limits, the system helps
the series. It also describes features that are to keep the vehicle on a steady course by
not necessarily available in your vehicle, for reducing engine speed and by applying
instance, due to the selected options or brakes to the individual wheels.
these functions and systems, the applicable General information
laws and regulations must be observed. DSC detects the following unstable driving
conditions, for instance:
– Fishtailing, which can lead to oversteer-
Anti-lock Braking System ABS ing.
– Loss of traction of the front wheels,
ABS prevents locking of the wheels during which can lead to understeering.
braking. Dynamic Traction Control DTC, refer to
The vehicle maintains its steering power page 176, is a version of the DSC where for-
even during full brake applications, thus in- ward momentum is optimized.
creasing active safety.
ABS is operational every time you start the Safety information
engine.
Warning
Brake assistant for the driver’s personal judgment in as-
sessing the traffic conditions. Based on
When you apply the brakes rapidly, this sys- the limits of the system, it cannot inde-
tem automatically boosts the vehicle brak- pendently react to all traffic situations.
ing capability to the furthest possible ex- There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving
tent. It reduces the braking distance to a style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic
minimum during an emergency stop. This closely and actively intervene where ap-
system utilizes all of the capabilities pro- propriate.
vided by the Antilock Brake System ABS.
Do not reduce the pressure on the brake
pedal for the duration of the emergency Warning
stop. When driving with a roof load, for in-
stance with roof-mounted luggage rack,
the vehicle's center of gravity is higher,
which increases the risk of the vehicle tip-
ping in critical driving situations. There
175
CONTROLS Driving stability control systems
may be a risk of accident or risk of damage Automatic activation

to property. Do not deactivate DSC Dy-
When DSC is deactivated, automatic activa-
namic Stability Control when driving with
tion occurs in the following situations:
roof load.
– The vehicle has a flat tire.
– When activating cruise control in
Indicator/warning lights TRACTION or DSC OFF mode.
The indicator light flashes: DSC con-
trols the drive and braking forces.
The indicator light lights up: DSC has
DTC Dynamic Traction Con-
malfunctioned. trol
Deactivating DSC: DSC OFF Concept

DTC is a version of the DSC Dynamic Stabil-
General information ity Control where forward momentum is op-
When DSC is deactivated, driving stability timized.
is reduced during acceleration and when The system ensures maximum headway on
driving in curves. special road conditions, for instance unp-
To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC lowed snowy roads or loose road surfaces,
again as soon as possible. but with somewhat limited vehicle stability.
When DTC is activated, the vehicle has
Deactivating DSC maximum traction. Driving stability is lim-
ited during acceleration and when driving
Press and hold this button but not in curves.
longer than approx. 10 seconds, un-
til the indicator light for DSC OFF Drive carefully.
lights up in the instrument cluster and dis- You may find it useful to briefly activate
plays DSC OFF. DTC under the following special circum-
DSC is switched off. stances:
– When driving in slush or on uncleared,
snow-covered roads.
Activating DSC
– When driving off from deep snow or
Press the button. loose ground.
DSC OFF and the DSC OFF indicator – When driving with snow chains.
light go out.
Deactivating/activating DTC
Indicator/warning lights Dynamic Traction Control
When DSC is deactivated, DSC OFF is dis-
played in the instrument cluster. Activating DTC
The indicator light lights up: DSC is Press the button.
deactivated.
176
TRACTION is displayed in the instrument MINI Driving Modes switch

cluster and the indicator light for DSC OFF
lights up.
Concept
Deactivating DTC The MINI Driving Modes switch helps to
fine-tune the vehicle's settings and features.
Press the button again. Choose between three different programs.
TRACTION and the DSC OFF indica- Pressing the MINI Driving Modes switch
tor light go out. will activate the particular program.
Operating the programs

Performance Control MINI Driving Modes switch Program
Performance Control enhances the agility of SPORT
the vehicle. MID
To increase maneuverability, wheels are GREEN
braked individually when a sporty driving
style is used.
MID
Adaptive chassis MID provides balanced tuning.
With each starting operation, MID is acti-
Concept vated using the Start/Stop button.
The tuning of the suspension can be
changed with the system. GREEN
The system offers several different pro- Concept
grams.
GREEN, refer to page 234, provides consis-
The programs are selected via the MINI
tent tuning to maximize range.
Driving Modes switch.
Activating GREEN
Programs
Press the MINI Driving Modes switch
MID/GREEN downward until GREEN is displayed in the
instrument cluster.
Balanced tuning of the shock absorbers for
more comfort. Configuring GREEN
SPORT Via MINI Driving Modes switch
Consistently sporty tuning of the shock ab- 1. Activate GREEN.
sorbers for greater driving agility.
2. "Configure GREEN"
3. Configure the program.
177
CONTROLS Driving stability control systems
This configuration is retrieved when Configuring driving program

GREEN is activated.
Settings can be made for the following driv-
ing programs in Driving mode:
Via the Central Information Display (CID)
– GREEN, refer to page 177.
1. "My MINI"
– SPORT, refer to page 178.
3. If necessary, "Driving mode" Displays
4. "Configure GREEN"
Program selection
This configuration is retrieved when Pressing the MINI Driving
GREEN is activated. Modes switch displays a list of
programs, which can be se-
lected.
SPORT
Concept
Selected program
Consistently sporty tuning of the drivetrain
for greater driving agility. The instrument cluster dis-
plays the selected program.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the
tuning of the chassis and suspension also
changes and SPORT can be individually
configured.
The configuration is stored for the driver
profile currently in use.
Drive-off assistant
Activating SPORT
Press the MINI Driving Modes switch up- Concept
ward until SPORT is displayed in the instru- This system supports driving off on uphill
ment cluster. grades. The parking brake is not required.
Configuring SPORT Driving off with the drive-off

Via the Central Information Display (CID): assistant
1. "My MINI" 1. Hold the vehicle in place with the foot
brake.
2. Release the foot brake and drive off
3. If necessary, "Driving mode" without delay.
4. "Configure SPORT" After the foot brake is released, the vehicle
5. Select the desired setting. is held in place for approx. 2 seconds.
This configuration is retrieved when SPORT
is activated.
178
Servotronic
Servotronic is a speed-dependent power
steering function.
The system provides the steering force with
more support at low speeds than at higher
ones. This makes it easier to park, for in-
stance, and makes steering firmer when
driving at faster speeds.
Furthermore, the steering force adapts ac-
cording to the driving program, so that a
firm, sporty feel or a comfortable steering
response is conveyed.
179
CONTROLS Driving comfort
Driving comfort
Vehicle features and options Safety information
This chapter describes all standard, country- Warning

specific and optional features offered with The system cannot serve as a substitute
the series. It also describes features that are for the driver’s personal judgment in as-
not necessarily available in your vehicle, for sessing the traffic conditions. Based on
instance, due to the selected options or the limits of the system, it cannot inde-
country versions. This also applies to safety- pendently react to all traffic situations.
related functions and systems. When using There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving
these functions and systems, the applicable style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic
laws and regulations must be observed. closely and actively intervene where ap-
propriate.
Camera-based cruise control
Warning
Concept The desired speed can be incorrectly ad-
Using this system, a desired speed and a justed or called up by mistake. There is a
distance to a vehicle ahead can be adjusted risk of accident. Adjust the desired speed
using the buttons on the steering wheel. to the traffic conditions. Watch traffic
The system maintains the desired speed on closely and actively intervene where ap-
clear roads. For this purpose, the vehicle ac- propriate.
celerates or brakes automatically.
If a vehicle is driving ahead of you, the sys-
tem adjusts the speed of your vehicle so Warning
that the set distance to the vehicle ahead is Risk of accident due to too high speed dif-
maintained. The speed is adjusted as far as ferences to other vehicles, for instance in
the given situation allows. the following situations:
The distance can be adjusted in several – When fast approaching a slowly mov-
steps. For safety reasons, it depends on the ing vehicle.
respective speed. – Vehicle suddenly swerving into own
lane.
General information – When fast approaching standing ve-
A camera on the interior mirror is used to hicles.
detect vehicles driving ahead. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life.
Depending on the settings, the characteris- Watch traffic closely and actively inter-
tics of cruise control many change in cer- vene where appropriate.
tain ranges.
180
Driving comfort CONTROLS
Overview Functional requirements

Buttons on the steering wheel Speed range
The system is best used on well-constructed
Button Function roads.
Cruise control on/off, refer to The system is functional at speeds begin-
page 181. ning at approx. 20 mph/30 km/h.
Store/maintain speed, refer to The max. speed that can be set is
page 182. 85 mph/140 km/h.
Active cruise control is paused below ap-
Pause cruise control, refer to
prox. 20 mph/30 km/h. The system does not
page 181.
brake to a stop.
Continue cruise control with the
last setting, refer to page 183. Switching on/off and interrupting
Reduce distance, refer to cruise control
page 182.
Increase the distance, refer to Switching on
page 182. Press the button on the steering
Increase speed, refer to wheel.
page 182.
Display in the instrument cluster
Reduce speed, refer to page 182. lights up.

Buttons are arranged according to vehicle's lights up. The current speed is
series, optional features and country speci- adopted as desired speed and dis-
fications. played with symbol.
Camera Cruise control is active and maintains the

set speed.
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched
on, if necessary.
Switching off
wheel.
The displays go out. The stored desired
speed is deleted.
The camera is installed near the interior
mirror. Interrupting manually
Keep the windshield in front of the interior
mirror clean and clear.
wheel.
181
Interrupting automatically If active, the displayed speed is stored and

The system is automatically interrupted in the vehicle reaches the stored speed when
the following situations: the road is clear.
– When the driver applies the brakes. – or button: each time it is pressed
to the point of resistance, the desired
– Manual transmission: when the clutch speed increases or decreases by approx.
pedal is depressed for a few seconds or 1 mph/1 km/h.
released while a gear is not engaged.
– or button: each time it is pressed
– If selector lever position N is set. past the resistance point, the desired
– Dynamic Traction Control DTC is acti- speed changes by a maximum of 5 mph/
vated or DSC Dynamic Stability Control 10 km/h.
is deactivated. or button: hold down to repeat the
– If DSC Dynamic Stability Control interaction.
venes.
– If the detection range of the camera is Adjusting the distance
impaired, for instance by soiling, heavy
precipitation or glare effects from the Safety information
sun.
– If the vehicle in front decelerates below Warning
a speed of approx. 20 mph/30 km/h.
for the driver’s personal judgment. Due to
Setting the speed the system limits, braking can be late.
There may be a risk of accident or risk of
Maintaining/storing the speed damage to property. Be aware to the traffic
Press or button in the interrupted situation at all times. Adjust the distance
state. to the traffic and weather conditions and
When the system is switched on, the cur- maintain the prescribed safety distance,
rent speed is maintained and stored as the possibly by braking.
desired speed.
The stored speed is displayed on the Reduce distance
symbol.
Press the button repeatedly until
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is the desired distance is set.
switched on, if necessary.
The speed can also be stored as follows: The set distance is briefly displayed
in the left part of the instrument
Press the button. cluster.
Changing the speed Increase the distance

or button: press until the desired Press the button repeatedly until
speed is set. the desired distance is set.
182
The set distance is briefly displayed Switching distance control off

in the left part of the instrument Distance control can be switched off and on
cluster. when driving with cruise control activated.
Press and hold this button.
Continuing cruise control
Or:
General information
An interrupted cruise control can be contin- Press and hold this button.
ued by calling up the stored speed.
Make sure that the difference between cur- The indicator light in the instrument
rent speed and stored speed is not too large cluster lights up.
before calling up the stored speed. Other-
wise, unintentional braking or accelerating To switch distance control back on, press
may occur. one of the two buttons again briefly.
In the following cases, the stored speed After changing over distance control, a
value is deleted and cannot be called up Check Control message is displayed.
again:
– When the system is switched off. Displays in the instrument cluster
– When the ignition is switched off.
Desired speed and stored speed
Calling up the stored speed and In addition to the indicator light, the
distance desired speed is displayed in the Info
Display.
Press the button with the system in-
terrupted. Cruise control is contin- – Display lights up green: system is active,
ued with the stored values. The se- the display indicates the desired speed.
lected distance is briefly displayed in the – Display lights up orange: system is in-
Info Display. terrupted, the display indicates the
stored speed.
Switching distance control on/off – No display: system is switched off.
If no speed is indicated, it is possible that
Safety information the conditions necessary for operation are
not currently fulfilled.
Warning
The system does not react to traffic driv-
Distance to vehicle ahead of you
ing ahead of you, but instead maintains Selected distance from the vehicle driving
the stored speed. There may be a risk of ahead is briefly displayed in the left hand
accident or risk of damage to property. Ad- portion of the Info Display.
just the desired speed to the traffic condi-
tions and brake as needed.
183
Distance display pedal is being pressed; a vehicle was de-

tected.
Distance 1
Displays in the Head-up Display

Distance 2 The information from Active Cruise Control
can also be displayed in the Head-up Dis-
play.
Distance 3
System limits
Distance 4 Detection range
This value is set automatically af-
ter the system is switched on.
Detected vehicle
Symbol lights up orange:
A vehicle has been detected ahead of
you.
Indicator/warning lights The detection capacity of the system and

Symbol flashes orange: the automatic braking capacity are limited.
The conditions are not adequate for Two-wheeled vehicles for instance might
the system to work. not be detected.
The system was deactivated but applies the
brakes until you actively resume control by Deceleration
pressing on the brake pedal or accelerator
The system does not decelerate in the fol-
pedal.
lowing situations:
Symbol flashes red and a signal – For pedestrians, cyclists or similarly
sounds: slow-moving road users.
Brake and make an evasive maneu- – For red traffic lights.
ver, if necessary. – For cross traffic.
– For oncoming traffic.
The system has been interrupted or
distance control is temporarily sup- – Unlit vehicles or vehicles with nonwork-
pressed because the accelerator ing lighting at night.
pedal is being pressed; a vehicle was not de-
tected.
Distance control is temporarily sup-

pressed because the accelerator
184
Swerving vehicles vehicle driving ahead will not be detected

or will be detected very late.
A vehicle driving in front of you is not de-

tected until it is completely within the same When you approach a curve the system may
lane as your vehicle. briefly report vehicles in the next lane due
If a vehicle driving ahead of you suddenly to the bend of the curve. If the system de-
swerves into your lane, the system may not celerates you may compensate it by briefly
be able to automatically restore the selected accelerating. After releasing the accelerator
distance. It may not be possible to restore pedal the system is reactivated and controls
the selected distance in certain situations, speed independently.
including if you are driving significantly
faster than vehicles driving ahead of you,
for instance when rapidly approaching a Weather
truck. When a vehicle driving ahead of you The following restrictions can occur under
is reliably detected, the system requests unfavorable weather or light conditions:
that the driver intervene by braking and – Poorer vehicle recognition.
carrying out evasive maneuvers, if needed. – Short-term interruptions for vehicles
that are already recognized.
Cornering Examples of unfavorable weather or light
conditions:
– Wet conditions.
– Snowfall.
– Slush.
– Fog.
– Glare.
Drive attentively, and react to the current
traffic situation. If necessary, intervene ac-
If the desired speed is too high for a curve, tively, for instance by braking, steering or
the speed is reduced slightly, although evading.
curves cannot be anticipated in advance.
Therefore, drive into a curve at an appropri- Engine power
ate speed. The desired speed may not be maintained
The system has a limited detection range. on uphill grades if engine power is insuffi-
Situations can arise in tight curves where a cient.
185
Malfunction Safety information

A Check Control message is displayed if the
system fails or was automatically deacti- Warning
vated.
The system may not be fully functional in for the driver’s personal judgment in as-
the following situations: sessing the traffic conditions. Based on
– When an object was not correctly de- the limits of the system, it cannot inde-
tected. pendently react to all traffic situations.
– In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snow- There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving
fall. style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic
– In tight curves. propriate.
– If the field of view of the camera or the
– When driving toward bright lights. Warning
– Up to 20 seconds after the start of the The use of the system can lead to an in-
engine, via the Start/Stop button. creased risk of accidents in the following
– During calibration of the camera imme- situations, for instance:
diately after vehicle delivery. – On winding roads.
– In heavy traffic.
Cruise control – On slippery roads, in fog, snow, or
wet conditions, or on a loose road
surface.
Concept There may be a risk of accident or risk of
Using this system, a desired speed can be damage to property. Only use the system if
adjusted using the buttons on the steering driving at constant speed is possible.
wheel. The system maintains the desired
speed. The system accelerates and brakes
automatically as needed. Overview
General information Buttons on the steering wheel
The system is functional at speeds begin-
ning at approx. 20 mph/30 km/h. Button Function
Depending on the settings, the cruise con- Cruise control on/off, refer to
trol settings many change under certain page 187.
conditions. Store speed, refer to page 187.
Pause cruise control, refer to

page 187.
Continue cruise control with the
last setting, refer to page 188.
186
Button Function – If the clutch pedal is depressed for a few

seconds or released while a gear is not
Increase speed, refer to engaged.
page 187.
– If the gear engaged is too high for the
Reduce speed, refer to page 187. current speed.
– If selector lever position N is set.
– Dynamic Traction Control DTC is acti-
Switching on/off and interrupting vated or DSC Dynamic Stability Control
cruise control is deactivated.
– If DSC Dynamic Stability Control inter-
Switching on venes.
wheel. Setting the speed
The indicator light in the instrument Maintaining/storing the speed
cluster lights up. Press or button in the interrupted
state.
The current speed is adopted as the When the system is switched on, the cur-
desired speed and is displayed with rent speed is maintained and stored as the
the symbol in the instrument cluster. desired speed.
Cruise control is active and maintains the The stored speed is displayed in the instru-
set speed. ment cluster.
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched
on, if necessary. on, if necessary.
The speed can also be stored as follows:
Switching off
Press the button.
wheel.
The displays go out. The stored desired Changing the speed
speed is deleted. or button: press until the desired
speed is set.
Interrupting manually If active, the displayed speed is stored and
When active, press the button on the vehicle reaches the stored speed when
the steering wheel. the road is clear.
– or button: each time it is pressed
to the point of resistance, the desired
Interrupting automatically speed increases or decreases by approx.
The system is automatically interrupted in 1 mph/1 km/h.
the following situations: – or button: each time it is pressed
– When the driver applies the brakes. past the resistance point, the desired
187
speed changes by a maximum of 5 mph/ – Display lights up green: system is active,

10 km/h. the display indicates the desired speed.
– or button: pressing it to the re- – Display lights up orange: system is in-
sistance point and holding it accelerates terrupted, the display indicates the
or decelerates the vehicle without restored speed.
quiring pressure on the accelerator – No display: system is switched off.
pedal. After the button is released, the
If no speed is indicated, it is possible that
vehicle maintains its final speed. Press-
the conditions necessary for operation are
ing the switch beyond the resistance
not currently fulfilled.
point causes the vehicle to accelerate
more rapidly.
System limits
Continuing cruise control
Engine power
General information The desired speed is also maintained down-
An interrupted cruise control can be contin- hill, but may not be maintained on uphill
ued by calling up the stored speed. grades if engine power is insufficient.
Make sure that the difference between cur-
rent speed and stored speed is not too large
before calling up the stored speed. Other- PDC Park Distance Control
wise, unintentional braking or accelerating
may occur. Concept
Calling up the stored speed PDC is a support when parking. The system
detects objects behind the vehicle. If the ve-
Press the button on the steering hicle is equipped with front PDC, objects in
wheel. front of the vehicle are detected too. Ob-
jects that you are approaching slowly are in-
The stored speed is reached again and main- dicated by signal tones and a visual display.
tained.
General information
Displays in the instrument cluster
The ultrasound sensors for measuring the
Indicator light distances are located in the bumpers.
The delete range, depending on obstacles
Depending on how the vehicle is and environmental conditions, is approx.
equipped, the indicator light in the 6 ft/2 m.
instrument cluster indicates whether
the system is switched on. An acoustic warning is first given in the fol-
lowing situations:
– By the front middle sensors and the two
Desired speed and stored speed corner sensors at approx. 24 in/60 cm
The desired speed is displayed to- from the object.
gether with the symbol. – By the rear middle sensors at ap-
prox. 5 ft/1.50 m from the object.
– When a collision is imminent.
188
Safety information Functional requirements

Ensure full functionality:
Warning – Do not cover sensors, for instance with
The system cannot serve as a substitute stickers, bicycle racks.
for the driver’s personal judgment in as- – Keep the sensors clean and unob-
sessing the traffic conditions. There is a structed.
risk of accident. Adjust driving style to
traffic conditions. Watch traffic and vehi- Switching on/off
cle surroundings closely and actively in-
tervene where appropriate. Switching on automatically
The system switches on automatically in the
following situations:
Warning
– If selector lever position R is engaged
Due to high speeds when PDC Park Dis- when the engine is running.
tance Control is activated, the warning can
The rearview camera also switches on.
be delayed due to physical circumstances.
There is a risk of injury or risk of damage – With front PDC: when obstacles are de-
to property. Avoid approaching an object tected behind or in front of the vehicle
too fast. Avoid driving off fast while PDC by PDC and the speed is slower than ap-
Park Distance Control is not yet active. prox. 2.5 mph/4 km/h.
With front PDC: automatic activation on ob-
stacle detection can be switched off. Via the
Overview Central Information Display (CID):
With front PDC: button in vehicle 1. "My MINI"

3. "Parking"
4. "Automatic PDC activation": depending
on the vehicle equipment.
5. "Automatic PDC activation"
The setting is stored for the driver pro-
file currently used.
Automatic deactivation during

Park assistance button forward travel
The system switches off when a certain
driving distance or speed is exceeded.
Ultrasound sensors
Switch the system back on, if needed.
Ultrasound sensors of the
PDC, for instance in the bump-
ers.
189
With front PDC: switching on/off The setting is stored for the driver profile
manually currently used.
Press the park assistance button. Visual warning
The approach of the vehicle to an object can
– On: the LED lights up. be shown on the Control Display. Objects
– Off: the LED goes out. that are farther away are already displayed
The rearview camera image is displayed if on the Control Display before a signal
the reverse gear is engaged when pressing sounds.
the park assistance button. A display appears as soon as Park Distance
Control (PDC) is activated.
Warning The range of the sensors is represented in
colors: red, green and yellow.
Signal tones When the image of the rearview camera is
An intermittent tone indicates when the ve- displayed, the switch can be made to PDC:
hicle is approaching an object. For instance, "Rear view camera"
if an object is detected to the left rear of the
vehicle, a signal tone sounds from the left
rear speaker.
System limits
The shorter the distance to the object, the Safety information
shorter the intervals.
If the distance to a detected object is less
than approx. 10 inches/25 cm, a continuous Warning
tone is sounded. The system is designed to operate in cer-
With front PDC: if objects are simultane- tain conditions and circumstances. Due to
ously located both in front of and behind conditions or other factors, the system
the vehicle, an alternating continuous sig- may not respond. There may be a risk of
nal is sounded. accident or risk of damage to property. Ac-
tively intervene as warranted. Refer to the
The signal tone is switched off, when selec- information in this Owner’s Manual re-
tor lever position P is engaged on vehicles garding the scope of the system’s opera-
with Steptronic transmission. tion and limitations.
Volume
The ratio of the PDC signal tone volume to With rear luggage rack or when the
the entertainment volume can be adjusted. trailer power socket is in use
1. "My MINI" The rear PDC functions are switched off.
2. "System settings" A Check Control message is displayed.
3. "Tone" Limits of ultrasonic measurement
4. "Volume settings" Ultrasonic measuring might not function
5. "PDC" under the following circumstances:
6. Set the desired value. – For small children and animals.
190
– For persons with certain clothing, for in- – In large buildings with right angles and
stance coats. smooth walls, for instance in under-
– With external interference of the ultra- ground garages.
sound, for instance from passing vehi- – In automatic vehicle washes.
cles or loud machines. – Due to heavy exhaust.
– When sensors are dirty, iced over, dam- – Due to other ultrasound sources, for in-
aged or out of position. stance sweeping machines, high pres-
– If cargo protrudes. sure steam cleaners or neon lights.
– Under certain weather conditions such The malfunction is signaled by a contin-
as high relative humidity, wet condi- uous tone alternating between the front
tions, snowfall, extreme heat, or strong and rear speakers. As soon as the mal-
wind. function due to other ultrasound sources
– With tow bars and trailer couplings of is no longer present, the system is again
other vehicles. fully functional.
– With thin or wedge-shaped objects. With front PDC: to reduce false alarms,
switch off automatic PDC activation on ob-
– With moving objects. stacle detection, for instance in vehicle
– With elevated, protruding objects such washes; see Switching on/off.
as ledges or cargo.
– With objects with corners and sharp Malfunction
edges. A Check Control message is displayed in the
– With objects with a fine surface struc- instrument cluster.
ture such as fences.
Red symbol is displayed, and the
– For objects with porous surfaces. range of the sensors is dimmed on
– Low objects already displayed, for in- the Control Display.
stance curbs, can move into the blind
area of the sensors before or after a con- PDC has failed. Have the system checked by
tinuous tone sounds. a dealer's service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
False warnings
The system may issue a warning under the
following conditions even though there is Rearview camera
no obstacle within the detection range:
– In heavy rain. Concept
– When sensors are very dirty or covered The rearview camera provides assistance in
with ice. parking and maneuvering backwards. The
area behind the vehicle is shown on the
– When sensors are covered in snow.
Control Display.
– On rough road surfaces.
– On uneven surfaces, such as speed
bumps.
191
Safety information Switching on/off
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute The system is switched on automatically if
for the driver’s personal judgment in as- selector lever position R is engaged when
sessing the traffic conditions. There is a the engine is running.
risk of accident. Adjust driving style to
traffic conditions. Watch traffic and vehi- Automatic deactivation during
cle surroundings closely and actively in- forward travel
tervene where appropriate. The system switches off when a certain
driving distance or speed is exceeded.
Switch the system back on, if needed.
Overview
Depending on the vehicle equipment:
Depending on the vehicle equipment: switching on/off manually
button in the vehicle
Press the park assistance button.
– On: the LED lights up.

– Off: the LED goes out.
The parking assistance functions are shown
on the Control Display.
Switching the view via the Central

Information Display (CID)
Park assistance button If the rearview camera view is not dis-
played, change the view via the Central In-
formation Display (CID):
Camera "Rear view camera"
The rearview camera image is displayed.
Display on the Control Display

– The rearview camera is switched on.
– The tailgate is fully closed.
– Keep the recording range of the camera
clear.
The camera lens is located in the handle of
the tailgate. Protruding cargo or carrier systems that
are not connected to a trailer power
The image quality may be impaired by dirt. socket can lead to malfunctions.
If necessary, clean the camera lens.
192
Activating assistance functions Turning radius lines

More than one assistance function can be
active at the same time.
The zoom function for trailer operation can
only be activated separately.
– Parking aid lines
"Parking aid lines"
Lanes and turning radius lines are indi-
cated.
– Obstacle marking Turning radius lines can be superimposed
"Obstacle marking" on the image of the rearview camera.
Obstacles are marked, depending on the Turning radius lines show the course of the
vehicle equipment. smallest possible turning radius on a level
– Trailer hitch road.
"Trailer hitch - zoom" Only one turning radius line is displayed af-
ter the steering wheel is turned past a cer-
A zoomed image of the trailer hitch is
tain angle.
shown.
Pathway lines Obstacle marking
Pathway lines can be superimposed on the Depending on the vehicle equipment, obsta-
image of the rearview camera. cle markings can be faded into the image of
Pathway lines help you to estimate the the rearview camera.
space required when parking and maneu- The colored thresholds of the obstacle mark-
vering on level roads. ings match the markings of the PDC Park
Pathway lines depend on the current steer- Distance Control.
ing angle and are continuously adjusted to
the steering wheel movements. Zoom on trailer hitch
To make it easier to attach a trailer, you can
zoom in on the view of the trailer hitch.
193
2. Turn the steering wheel to the point

where the pathway line covers the cor-
responding turning radius line.
Two static circle segments show the dis-

tance between the trailer and the trailer
hitch.
A docking line dependent on the steering
angle helps with aiming for the trailer with Display settings
the trailer hitch.
The zoom function can be activated when Brightness
the camera is switched on. With the rearview camera switched on:
When zooming in, remember that the view
may no longer show certain obstacles. 1. Select the symbol.
If necessary, the zoom function can also be 2. Turn the Controller until the desired set-
activated when a rear luggage rack is used. ting is reached and press the Controller.
Contrast
Parking using pathway and turning With the rearview camera switched on:
radius lines
1. Position the vehicle so that the turning 1. Select the symbol.
radius lines lead to within the limits of 2. Turn the Controller until the desired set-
the parking space. ting is reached and press the Controller.
System limits
Detection of objects
Very low obstacles or high, protruding ob-
jects such as ledges may not be recognized
by the system.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, some
assistance functions also consider data from
the PDC Park Distance Control.
Follow the notes in the PDC Park Distance
Control chapter.
The objects displayed on the Control Dis-
play may be closer than they appear. There-
194
fore, do not estimate the distance from the Safety information

objects on the display.
Warning
Parking assistant The system cannot serve as a substitute
sessing the traffic conditions. Based on
Concept the limits of the system, it cannot inde-
pendently react to all traffic situations.
There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving
propriate.
Warning
If the trailer hitch is used, the parking as-
This system assists the driver in parking sistant can cause damage due to covered
parallel to the road. sensors. There may be a risk of accident or
risk of damage to property. The parking as-
General information sistant should not be used during trailer
towing or if the trailer hitch is used, for in-
Parking assistant handling is divided into stance bicycle rack.
three steps:
– Switching on and activating.
– Parking space search. NOTICE
– Parking. The parking assistant can steer the vehicle
Ultrasound sensors measure parking spaces over or onto curbs. There is a risk of dam-
on both sides of the vehicle. age to property. Watch traffic closely and
The parking assistant calculates the best actively intervene where appropriate.
possible parking line and takes control of
steering during the parking procedure. The safety information of the PDC Park Dis-
tance Control applies in addition.
System status and instructions on required
actions are displayed on the Control Dis-
play.
A component of the parking assistant is the
PDC Park Distance Control.
195
Overview – Maximum distance to row of parked ve-

hicles: 5 ft/1.5 m.
Button in the vehicle
Suitable parking space
– Gaps behind an object that has a min.
length of 5 ft/1.5 m.
– Gap between two objects with a mini-
mum length of approx. 5 ft/1.5 m.
– Min. length of gap between two objects:
your vehicle's length plus approx.
3.3 ft/1.0 m.
– Minimum depth: approx. 5 ft/1.5 m.
Park assistance button
For parking
– Doors and tailgate are closed.
Ultrasound sensors – The parking brake is released.
– When parking in parking spaces on the
driver's side, the corresponding turn sig-
nal must be switched on.
Switching on and activating

Switching on with the button
Press the park assistance button.
The LED lights up.
The ultrasound sensors for measuring park-
ing spaces are located on the wheel hous- The current status of the parking space
ing. search is indicated on the Control Display.
Parking assistant is activated automati-
Functional requirements cally.
Ultrasound sensors Switching on with reverse gear

Ensure full functionality: Shift into reverse.
– Do not cover sensors, for instance with The current status of the parking space
stickers. search is indicated on the Control Display.
– Keep the sensors clean and unob- To activate: "Parking Assistant"
structed.
For measuring parking spaces

– Maximum speed while driving forward
approx. 22 mph/35 km/h.
196
Display on the Control Display Parking using the parking assistant

System activated/deactivated Parking
Symbol Meaning 1. Press the park assistance button or

shift into reverse gear to switch on the
Gray: the system is not availa- parking assistant, refer to page 196. Ac-
ble. tivate the parking assistant, if needed.
White: the system is available Parking assistant is activated.
but not activated.
2. Pass the row of parked vehicles at a
The system is activated. speed of up to approx. 22 mph/35 km/h
and at a distance of maximum
Parking space search and system 5 ft/1.5 m.
status The status of the parking space search
and possible parking spaces are dis-
played on the display, refer to page 197.
3. Follow the instructions on the display.
The best possible parking position will
come after gear change on the station-
ary vehicle - wait for the automatic
steering wheel move.
The end of the parking procedure is in-
dicated on the display.
– Symbol P on the vehicle image: the park- 4. Adjust the parking position yourself, if
ing assistant is activated and the park- needed.
ing space search is active.
– Control Display shows suitable parking Interrupting manually
spaces at the edge of the road next to The parking assistant can be interrupted at
the vehicle symbol. When the parking any time:
assistant is active, suitable parking
– Press the park assistance button.
spaces are highlighted.
– The parking procedure is
active. Steering control – "Parking Assistant"
has been taken over by
system. Interrupting automatically
The system is interrupted automatically in
– Parking space search is always active the following situations:
whenever the vehicle is moving forward – If the driver grasps the steering wheel
slow and straight, even if the system is or takes over steering.
deactivated. When the system is deacti- – If a gear is selected that does not match
vated, the displays on the Control Dis- the instruction on the display.
play are shown in gray.
197
– If the vehicle speed exceeds approx. No parking assistance

6 mph/10 km/h. The parking assistant does not offer assis-
– Possibly on snow-covered or slippery tance in the following situations:
road surfaces. – In tight curves.
– If a maximum number of parking at- – With mounted rear luggage rack.
tempts or the time taken for parking is
exceeded. Functional limitations
– If the PDC Park Distance Control dis- The system may not be fully functional in
plays clearances that are too small. the following situations:
– When switching into other functions of – On bumpy road surfaces such as gravel
the radio. roads.
A Check Control message is displayed. – On slippery ground.
Resuming – With accumulations of leaves/snow in
the parking space.
An interrupted parking procedure can be
continued, if needed. – With a mounted emergency wheel.
Reactivate the parking assistant, refer to – With ditches or edges, for instance an
page 196, and follow the instructions on the edge of a port.
display.
Limits of ultrasonic measurement
Switching off Ultrasonic measuring might not function
under the following circumstances:
The system can be switched off as follows:
– For small children and animals.
– Press the park assistance button.
– For persons with certain clothing, for in-
stance coats.
– Switching off the ignition.
– With external interference of the ultra-
System limits sound, for instance from passing vehi-
cles or loud machines.
Safety information – When sensors are dirty, iced over, dam-
aged or out of position.
– If cargo protrudes.
Warning
– Under certain weather conditions such
The system is designed to operate in cer-
as high relative humidity, wet condi-
tain conditions and circumstances. Due to
tions, snowfall, extreme heat, or strong
conditions or other factors, the system
wind.
may not respond. There may be a risk of
accident or risk of damage to property. Ac- – With tow bars and trailer couplings of
tively intervene as warranted. Refer to the other vehicles.
information in this Owner’s Manual re- – With thin or wedge-shaped objects.
garding the scope of the system’s opera- – With moving objects.
tion and limitations.
– With elevated, protruding objects such
as ledges or cargo.
198
– With objects with corners and sharp

edges.
– With objects with a fine surface struc-
ture such as fences.
– For objects with porous surfaces.
– Low objects already displayed, for in-
stance curbs, can move into the blind
area of the sensors before or after a con-
tinuous tone sounds.
– The parking assistant may identify park-
ing spaces that are not suitable for park-
ing.
Tire size
The parking position may vary depending
on the tire size.
Malfunction
A Check Control message is displayed.
The parking assistant failed. Have the sys-
tem checked by a dealer's service center or
another qualified service center or repair
shop.
199
CONTROLS Climate control
Climate control
Vehicle features and options – Emission tested passenger compart-
ment.
This chapter describes all standard, country- – Microfilter.
specific and optional features offered with – Air conditioning system to control the
the series. It also describes features that are temperature, air flow and recirculated-
not necessarily available in your vehicle, for air mode.
instance, due to the selected options or Depending on the equipment specification:
– Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter.
these functions and systems, the applicable – Automatic climate control.
laws and regulations must be observed. – Parked-car ventilation.
Interior air quality

The air quality in the vehicle is improved by
the following components:
Air conditioner
1 Air distribution settings 2 Air flow
200
Climate control CONTROLS
3 Temperature 7 Rear window defroster

4 Seat heating, right 92 8 Windshield defroster
5 Air conditioning 9 Seat heating, left 92
6 Recirculated-air mode
Climate control functions in detail Switching on/off

Press the button.
Switching the system on/off The LED is illuminated with air con-
ditioning switched on.
Switching on
Set any air flow. Depending on the weather, the windshield
may fog up briefly when the engine is
Switching off started.
Turn the wheel for air flow all The air conditioner produces condensation
the way to the left. water, refer to page 231, that will exit from
below the vehicle.
Recirculated-air mode
Temperature Concept
You may react to unpleasant odors or pollu-
Concept tants in the immediate environment by tem-
The system heats or cools, depending on the porarily suspending the supply of outside
set temperature. air. The system then recirculates the air
flow within the vehicle.
Adjusting
Operation
Turn the wheel to set the de-
sired temperature. Press the button:
The LED is illuminated when recir-
culated-air mode is switched on. The supply
of outside air is shut off.
When recirculated-air mode is switched off,
Air conditioning fresh air is directed into the vehicle's inte-
rior.
Concept
To prevent window condensation, recircu-
The air in the car's interior will be cooled lated-air mode switches off automatically af-
and dehumidified and, depending on the ter a certain amount of time, depending on
temperature setting, warmed again. the external temperature.
The car's interior can only be cooled with With constant recirculated-air mode, the air
the engine running. quality in the car's interior deteriorates and
window fogging increases.
201
If the windows fog over, switch off recircu- – Windows, upper body region, and
lated-air mode and increase the air flow, if floor area.
needed.
To defrost windows and remove
Controlling the air flow manually condensation
Make the following settings to defrost the
Concept windows and remove condensation:
The air flow for climate control can be ad- – Direct the air distribution onto the win-
justed manually. dows.
Operation – Increasing the air flow.
– Increase the temperature.
Turn the ring to set the de-
sired air flow. – Switch on the air conditioning if needed.
The higher the air flow, the
more effective the heating or
Windshield defroster
cooling will be. Press the button. The LED lights up.
The front window defroster
The air flow from the air conditioner may be
switches off automatically after a certain
reduced automatically to save battery
period of time.
power.
Controlling the air distribution Rear window defroster

manually Press the button. The LED lights up.
Concept The rear window defroster switches
off automatically after a certain period of
The air distribution for climate control can time.
be adjusted manually.
When GREEN Mode is activated, the heat-
Operation ing output is reduced.
Turn the wheel to select the
desired program or the desired Microfilter
intermediate setting. In external and recirculated-air mode, the
microfilter filters dust and pollen from the
air.
– Windows. Have this filter changed during vehicle
– Upper body region. maintenance, refer to page 278.
– Floor area.
202
Automatic climate control
1 Temperature, left 9 Maximum cooling

2 Display 10 Air conditioning
3 Air flow, AUTO intensity 11 Recirculated-air mode
4 AUTO program 12 Rear window defroster
5 Air distribution, manual 13 Windshield defroster
6 Display 14 To defrost windows and remove conden-
7 Temperature, right sation
8 Seat heating, right 92 15 Seat heating, left 92
Climate control functions in detail Switching off

Turn wheel for air flow to the
Switching the system on/off left until the control switches
off.
Switching on
Set any air flow.
Temperature
Concept
The automatic climate control achieves the
set temperature as quickly as possible, if
203
necessary by using the maximum cooling or Maximum cooling

heating power, and then keeps it constant.
Concept
Adjusting The system is set to the lowest temperature,
Turn the wheel to set the de- maximum air flow and recirculated-air
sired temperature. mode.
General information
The function is available with external tem-
Do not rapidly switch between different peratures beyond approx. 32 ℉/0 ℃ and
temperature settings. The automatic climate with the engine running.
control will not have sufficient time to ad- Air flows out of the vents to the upper body
just the set temperature. region. The vents need to be open for this.
The air flow can be adjusted with the pro-
Air conditioning gram active.
Concept Switching on/off
The air in the car's interior will be cooled Press the button.
and dehumidified and, depending on the
temperature setting, warmed again. The LED is illuminated with the
system switched on.
The car's interior can only be cooled with
the engine running. The system is set to the lowest temperature,
optimum air flow and air circulation mode.
Switching on/off
Press the button. AUTO program
The LED is illuminated with air con-
Concept
ditioning switched on.
The AUTO program cools, ventilates or
Depending on the weather, the windshield heats the car's interior automatically.
may fog up briefly when the engine is The air distribution and temperature are
started. controlled automatically depending on the
The cooling function is switched on auto- temperature in the car's interior and the de-
matically with the AUTO program. sired temperature setting including the se-
When using the automatic climate control, lected intensity of the air flow.
condensation water, refer to page 231, de-
velops and drains underneath the vehicle. Switching on/off
This is normal. Press the button.
The LED is illuminated with the
AUTO program switched on.
Depending on the selected temperature,
AUTO intensity and outside influences, the
204
air is directed to the windshield, side winter a certain amount of time, depending on
dows, upper body, and into the floor area. the external temperature.
Point the side vents toward the side win- With constant recirculated-air mode, the air
dows. quality in the car's interior deteriorates and
The following features are switched on au- window fogging increases.
tomatically with the AUTO program: If the windows fog over, switch off recircu-
– The air conditioning, refer to page 204. lated-air mode and increase the air flow, if
needed.
To switch off the program: press the button
again or manually adjust the air distribu-
tion.
Adjusting the air flow manually
Concept
Intensity
The air flow for climate control can be ad-
With the AUTO program activated, the au-
justed manually.
tomatic intensity control can be changed.
Turn the ring to set the de- General information
sired intensity from soft to in- To adjust the air flow manually switch off
tensive. AUTO program first.
Operation
The set intensity is displayed via the posi- Turn the ring to set the de-
tion of the illuminated LED segment. sired air flow.
Recirculated-air mode
Concept
The manually adjusted air flow is displayed
You may react to unpleasant odors or pollu- via illuminated LED segments.
tants in the immediate environment by tem-
porarily suspending the supply of outside The air flow of the automatic climate con-
air. The system then recirculates the air trol may be reduced automatically to save
flow within the vehicle. battery power.
Operation Adjusting the air distribution

manually
Press the button:
The LED is illuminated when recir- Concept
culated-air mode is switched on. The supply The air distribution for climate control can
of outside air is shut off. be adjusted manually.
When recirculated-air mode is switched off,
fresh air is directed into the vehicle's inte- Operation
rior.
Press the button repeatedly to se-
To prevent window condensation, recircu- lect a program:
lated-air mode switches off automatically af-
205
– Windows, upper body region, and floor When GREEN Mode is activated, the heat-
area. ing output is reduced.
– Upper body region and floor area.
– Floor area.
Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter
– Windows and floor area. In external and recirculated-air mode, the
microfilter/activated charcoal filter filters
– Windows. dust, pollen, and gaseous pollutants out of
– Windows and upper body region. the air.
– Upper body region. Have this filter changed during vehicle
maintenance, refer to page 278.
To defrost windows and remove
condensation
Ventilation
Concept
Ice and condensation are quickly removed Setting
from the windshield and the front side win-
The air flow directions can be individually
dows.
adjusted:
Switching on/off – Direct ventilation:
Press the button. The air flow is directly pointed onto the
person. The air flow heats or cools no-
The LED is illuminated with the ticeably, depending on the adjusted tem-
system switched on. perature.
Ice and condensation are quickly removed – Indirect ventilation:
from the windshield and the front side win-
dows. If the vents are fully or partly closed, the
air is directly routed into the car's inte-
The air flow can be adjusted with the pro- rior.
gram active.
If there is window condensation, switch on Front ventilation
the air conditioning too.
Windshield defroster
Press the button. The LED lights up.
The front window defroster
switches off automatically after a certain
period of time.
Rear window defroster – Turn knob for continuous opening and

Press the button. The LED lights up. closing of the vents.
The rear window defroster switches – Swivel the vents to alter the direction of
off automatically after a certain period of the vent flow, arrows.
time.
206
Parked-car ventilation The symbol on the automatic climate

control flashes if the system is switched on.
Concept Preselecting the activation time
The parked-car ventilation ventilates the Via the Central Information Display (CID):
car's interior and lowers its temperature, if
needed. 1. "My MINI"
General information
3. If necessary, "Climate functions"
The parked-car ventilation can be switched
on and off directly or by using two preset 4. "Comfort ventilation"
activation times. The system remains 5. Select the desired activation time.
switched on for 30 minutes. 6. Set the desired time.
The parked-car ventilation system is oper-
ated via the Central Information Display Activating the activation time
(CID).
Functional requirements 1. "My MINI"
– Direct operation: vehicle is in radio- 2. "Vehicle settings"
ready state. 3. If necessary, "Climate functions"
– Direct operation or preset activation
4. "For start time at:"
time: does not depend on external tem-
perature. Activate the desired activation time.
– Battery is sufficiently charged. The symbol on the automatic climate
control lights up when the activation time is
If parked-car ventilation is switched on,
activated.
the vehicle battery will be discharged.
Thus, limit the maximum activation time The symbol on the automatic climate
to save the vehicle battery. The system control flashes when the system has been
will be available again after the engine switched on.
is started or after a short trip. The system will only be switched on within
– Make sure that the vehicle's date and the next 24 hours. After that, it needs to be
time are set correctly. reactivated.
– Open the vents to allow air to flow out.
Switching on/off directly

1. "My MINI"
3. If necessary, "Climate functions"
4. "Activate comfort ventilation now"
207
CONTROLS Interior equipment
Interior equipment
This chapter describes all standard, country- Warning

specific and optional features offered with The operation of remote-controlled sys-
the series. It also describes features that are tems with the integrated universal remote
not necessarily available in your vehicle, for control, such as the garage door, may re-
instance, due to the selected options or sult in injury, for example, body parts be-
country versions. This also applies to safety- coming jammed in a garage door. There is
related functions and systems. When using a risk of injury or risk of damage to prop-
these functions and systems, the applicable erty. Make sure that the area of movement
laws and regulations must be observed. of the respective system is clear during
programming and operation. Also follow
the safety information of the hand-held
Integrated Universal Remote transmitter.
Control
Compatibility
Concept
If this symbol is printed on the pack-
The integrated Universal Remote Control in aging or in the owner's manual of the
the interior mirror can operate up to 3 func- system to be controlled, the system
tions of remote-controlled systems such as is generally compatible with the integrated
garage door drives, barriers, or lighting sys- Universal Remote Control.
tems.
Additional questions are answered by:
General information – A dealer's service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.
The Integrated Universal Remote Control
replaces up to 3 different hand-held trans- – www.homelink.com on the Internet.
mitters. To operate the remote control, the
HomeLink is a registered trademark of Gen-
buttons on the interior mirror must be pro-
tex Corporation.
grammed with the desired functions. The
hand-held transmitter for the particular sys-
tem is required in order to program the re-
mote control.
Before selling the vehicle, delete the stored
functions for the sake of security.
If possible, do not install the antenna of the
remote-controlled system, e.g. the garage
door drive, near metal objects to ensure the
best possible operation.
208
Interior equipment CONTROLS
Overview down the interior mirror button and re-

peatedly press and release the hand-held
transmitter button for 2 seconds.
6. – The LED lights up green: program-
ming completed.
Release the button.
– The LED flashes fast: programming
is not complete.
Press the button on the interior mir-
ror for 2 seconds and release. Per-
1 LED form this procedure three times to
2 Programmable keys complete the programming proce-
dure.
3 Hand-held transmitters of the system
If the integrated universal remote
control remains nonoperational, con-
Programming tinue with the special features for
change code wireless systems.
General information – LED does not flash green after
The battery of the hand-held transmitter 60 seconds: programming not com-
must be fully charged at the time of pro- pleted.
gramming to ensure an optimal range of the Repeat steps 3 to 6.
integrated universal remote control.
To program other functions on other but-
1. Switch on the ignition. tons, repeat steps 3 to 5.
2. Initial setup:
Special feature of the rolling code
Press and hold the two outer buttons on wireless system
the interior mirror simultaneously for
approximately 10 seconds until the LED If you are unable to operate the system af-
flashes green rapidly. This erases all pro- ter repeated programming, please check if
gramming of the buttons on the interior the system to be controlled features a roll-
mirror. ing code radio system.
3. Press the interior mirror button to be Refer to the owner's manual for the system.
programmed. The LED on the interior For systems with a rolling code radio sys-
mirror will slowly begin flashing orange. tem, the integrated Universal Remote Con-
4. Hold the hand-held transmitter for the trol and the system also have to be
system to be used approx. 1 to 12 in/2.5 synchronized.
to 30 cm away from the buttons on the Please read the owner's manual to find out
interior mirror. The required distance how to synchronize the system.
depends on the hand-held transmitter. Synchronizing is easier with the aid of a
5. Press and hold the button of the desired second person.
function on the hand-held transmitter.
Canada: if programming with the hand-
held transmitter was interrupted, hold
209
Synchronizing the universal remote control – The LED flashes fast: the hand-held
with the system: transmitter was detected but pro-
gramming is not complete.
1. Park the vehicle within range of the re-
mote-controlled system. Press the button on the interior mir-
ror for 2 seconds and release. Per-
2. Program the relevant button on the inte- form this procedure three times to
rior mirror as described. complete the programming proce-
3. Locate and press the synchronizing but- dure.
ton on the system being programmed, If the integrated universal remote
e.g. at the garage gate. You have approx. control remains nonoperational, con-
30 seconds for the next step. tinue with the special features for
4. Hold down the programmed button on change code wireless systems.
the interior mirror for approximately – LED does not flash green after
3 seconds and then release it. If neces- 60 seconds: programming not com-
sary, repeat this step up to three times pleted.
in order to finish synchronization. Once
Repeat steps 3 to 6.
synchronization is complete, the pro-
grammed function will be carried out. If the programming procedure is not com-
pleted, the previous programming will re-
Reprogramming individual buttons main unchanged.
1. Switch on the ignition. Operation
2. Press and hold the interior mirror but-
ton to be programmed.
Warning
3. As soon as the LED on the interior mir-
ror flashes orange after approx. 20 sec- The operation of remote-controlled sys-
onds, release the button. tems with the integrated universal remote
control, such as the garage door, may re-
4. Hold the hand-held transmitter for the sult in injury, for example, body parts be-
system to be used approx. 1 to 12 in/2.5 coming jammed in a garage door. There is
to 30 cm away from the buttons on the a risk of injury or risk of damage to prop-
interior mirror. The required distance erty. Make sure that the area of movement
depends on the hand-held transmitter. of the respective system is clear during
5. Press and hold the button of the desired programming and operation. Also follow
function on the hand-held transmitter. the safety information of the hand-held
Canada: if programming with the hand- transmitter.
held transmitter was interrupted, hold
down the interior mirror button and re- The system, such as the garage door, can be
peatedly press and release the hand-held operated using the button on the interior
transmitter button for 2 seconds. mirror while the engine is running or when
the ignition is started. To do this, hold down
6. The LED can light up in different ways.
the button within receiving range of the
– The LED lights up green: the pro- system until the function is activated. The
gramming procedure is completed. interior mirror LED stays lit while the wire-
Release the button. less signal is being transmitted.
210
Deleting stored functions Mirror display

All stored functions will be deleted. The The point of the compass is displayed in the
functions cannot be deleted individually. mirror when driving straight.
Press and hold the two outer buttons on the
interior mirror simultaneously for approxi- Operating concept
mately 10 seconds until the LED on the in- Various functions can be called up by press-
terior mirror flashes green rapidly. ing the control button with a pointed object,
such as the tip of a ballpoint pen or similar
object. The following setting options are
Digital compass displayed in succession, depending on how
long the control button is pressed:
Overview – Pressed briefly: turns display on/off.
– 3 to 6 seconds: compass zone setting.
– 6 to 9 seconds: compass calibration.
– 9 to 12 seconds: left/right-hand steering
setting.
– 12 to 15 seconds: language setting.
Setting the compass zones

Sets the particular compass zones on the ve-
hicle so that the compass operates correctly;
1 Control button refer to World map with compass zones.
2 Mirror display
211
World map with magnetic zones
Procedure Procedure
1. Press and hold the control button for ap- 1. Make sure that there are no large metal-
prox. 3 to 4 seconds. The number of the lic objects or overhead power lines near
set compass zone appears in the mirror. the vehicle and that there is sufficient
2. To change the zone setting, press the room to drive around in a circle.
control button quickly and repeatedly 2. Set the currently applicable compass
until the number of the compass zone zone.
that corresponds with your location ap- 3. Press and hold the control button for ap-
pears in the mirror. prox. 6 to 7 seconds so that "C" appears
The set zone is stored automatically. The on the display. Next, drive in a complete
compass is ready for use again after approx- circle at least once at a speed of no more
imately 10 seconds. than 4 mph/7 km/h. If calibration is suc-
cessful, the "C" is replaced by the points
Calibrating the digital compass of the compass.
The digital compass must be calibrated in
the event of the following: Left/right-hand steering
– The wrong compass point is displayed. The digital compass is already set for right
or left-hand steering at the factory.
– The point of the compass displayed does
not change despite changing the direc-
tion of travel. Setting the language
– Not all points of the compass are dis- Press and hold the control button for ap-
played. prox. 12 to 13 seconds. Briefly press the
212
control button again to switch between Ashtray/cigarette lighter

English "E" and German "O".
Settings are stored automatically after ap-
proximately 10 seconds.
Overview
Sun visor
Glare shield
To provide protection against glare, fold the
sun visor down or pivot it to the side.
Vanity mirror The ashtray is located in one of the frontal

A vanity mirror is located in the sun visor cup holders, the cigarette lighter above it in
behind a cover. the center console.
When the cover is opened, the mirror light-
ing switches on. Ashtray
In order to empty the ashtray, remove the
ashtray from the cup holder.
Front passenger side dash-
board Cigarette lighter
Decorative trim Safety information
Warning
Contact with the hot heating element or
the hot socket of the cigarette lighter can
cause burns. Flammable materials can ig-
nite if the cigarette lighter falls down or is
held against the objects. There is a risk of
fire and injuries. There is a risk of damage
to property. Take hold of the cigarette
Customized decorative trim panels for the lighter by its handle. Make sure that chil-
dashboard on the front passenger side are dren do not use the cigarette lighter.
available as original MINI accessories de-
pending on the equipment specification.
Follow the assembly instructions.
213
NOTICE NOTICE
If metal objects fall into the socket, they Battery chargers for the vehicle battery
can cause a short circuit. There is a risk of can work with high voltages and currents,
damage to property. Replace the cigarette which means that the 12 volt on-board
lighter or socket cover again after using network can be overloaded or damaged.
the socket. There is a risk of damage to property. Only
connect battery chargers for the vehicle
battery to the starting aid terminals in the
Operation engine compartment.
Push in the cigarette lighter.
The cigarette lighter can be
removed as soon as it pops NOTICE
back out. If metal objects fall into the socket, they
can cause a short circuit. There is a risk of
damage to property. Replace the cigarette
lighter or socket cover again after using
Sockets the socket.
Concept In the center console

The lighter socket can be used as a socket
for electrical equipment while the ignition
is switched on or the engine is running.
General information
The total load of all sockets must not exceed
140 watts at 12 volts.
Do not damage the socket by using non-
compatible connectors.
Remove the cover or cigarette lighter.
Safety information
Warning
Devices and cables in the unfolding area of
the airbags, such as portable navigation
devices, can hinder the unfolding of the
airbag or be thrown around in the car's in-
terior during unfolding. There is a risk of
injury. Make sure that devices and cables
are not in the airbag's area of unfolding.
214
In the cargo area – For charging mobile devices and for

data transfer.
– Charge current: max. 1.5 A.
The socket is located on the right side in

the cargo area.
USB interface
Concept
Mobile devices with a USB port can be con-
nected to the USB interface.
General information
Follow the information regarding the con-
nection of mobile devices to the USB inter-
face in the section on USB connections, re-
fer to page 60.
In the center console
Depending on the vehicle equipment, one or

two USB interfaces are located in the front
of the center console.
Properties:
– USB port Type A.
215
CONTROLS Storage compartments
Storage compartments
Vehicle features and options – Glove compartment on the front passen-
ger side.
This chapter describes all standard, country- – Compartments in the doors.
specific and optional features offered with – Storage compartment in the center arm-
the series. It also describes features that are rest.
not necessarily available in your vehicle, for – Storage compartment in front of the cup
instance, due to the selected options or holders.
– Clothes hooks
these functions and systems, the applicable – Storage tray in the center console.
laws and regulations must be observed. – Pockets on the backrests of the front
seats.
Safety information
Glove compartment
Warning Safety information
Loose objects or devices with a cable con-
nection to the vehicle, for instance mobile Warning
phones, can be thrown into the car's inte-
rior while driving, for instance in the Folded open, the glove compartment pro-
event of an accident or during braking and trudes in the car's interior. Objects in the
evasive maneuvers. There is a risk of in- glove compartment can be thrown into the
jury. Secure loose objects or devices with car's interior while driving, for instance in
a cable connection to the vehicle in the the event of an accident or during braking
car's interior. and evasive maneuvers. There is a risk of
injury. Always close the glove compart-
ment immediately after using it.
NOTICE
Anti-slip pads such as anti-slip mats can
damage the dashboard. There is a risk of
damage to property. Do not use anti-slip
pads.
Overview
The following storage compartments are
available in the car's interior:
216
Storage compartments CONTROLS
Opening Center armrest

General information
The center armrest contains a storage com-
partment.
Opening
Pull the handle.

The light in the glove compartment
switches on.
Closing
Fold up the cover.
Press button, arrow 1, and open center arm-
rest upward, arrow 2.
Compartments in the doors
Adjusting the height
General information
There are storage compartments in the
doors.
Safety information
Warning
Breakable objects, such as glass bottles or
glasses, can break in the event of an acci-
Press button, arrow 1, and swing center
dent or a braking or evasive maneuver.
armrest upward or downward into the de-
Broken glass can be scattered in the car's
sired height, arrow 2.
interior. There is a risk of injury or risk of
damage to property. Do not use any break-
able objects while driving. Only stow
breakable objects in closed storage com-
partments.
217
CONTROLS Storage compartments
Cup holders Rear
Safety information
Warning
Unsuitable containers in the cup holders
may damage the cup holders or be thrown
about the car’s interior in the event of an
accident, an evasive maneuver, or forceful
braking. Spilled liquids can distract from
the traffic conditions and lead to an acci- For 3-door models: in front of the rear seats
dent. Hot drinks can damage the cup and in the side armrests.
holder or lead to scalding. There is a risk
of injury or risk of damage to property. Do
not force objects into the cup holder. Use
lightweight, shatterproof, and sealable
containers. Do not transport hot bever-
ages.
Front
For 5-door models: in front of the rear seats.
Clothes hooks
General information
3-door models: The clothes hooks are lo-
cated above the side windows in the rear.
In the center console.
5-door models: The clothes hooks are lo-
cated above the rear doors.
Safety information
Warning
Clothing articles on the clothes hooks can
obstruct the view while driving. There is a
risk of accident. When suspending cloth-
ing articles from the clothes hooks, ensure
218
Storage compartments CONTROLS
that they will not obstruct the driver's

view.
Warning
Improper use of the clothes hooks can lead
to a risk of objects flying about during
braking and evasive maneuvers. There is a
risk of injury and risk of damage to prop-
erty. Only hang lightweight objects, for in-
stance clothing articles, from the clothes
hooks.
219
CONTROLS Cargo area
Cargo area
Vehicle features and options a cable connection to the vehicle in the
car's interior.
the series. It also describes features that are Warning
not necessarily available in your vehicle, for Improperly stowed objects can shift and
instance, due to the selected options or be thrown into the car's interior, for in-
country versions. This also applies to safety- stance in the event of an accident or dur-
related functions and systems. When using ing braking and evasive maneuvers. Vehi-
these functions and systems, the applicable cle occupants can be hit and injured. There
laws and regulations must be observed. is a risk of injury. Stow and secure objects
and cargo properly.
Loading
NOTICE
Safety information Fluids in the cargo area can cause damage.
There is a risk of damage to property.
Make sure that no fluids leak in the cargo
Warning area.
High gross weight can overheat the tires,
damage them internally and cause a sud-
den drop in tire inflation pressure. Driving Steps for Determining Correct Load
characteristics may be negatively im- Limit
pacted, reducing lane stability, lengthen-
1. Locate the statement “The combined
ing the braking distances and changing
weight of occupants and cargo should
the steering response. There is a risk of
never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs” on
accident. Pay attention to the permitted
your vehicle’s placard.
load capacity of the tires and never exceed
the permitted gross weight. 2. Determine the combined weight of the
driver and passengers that will be riding
in your vehicle.
Warning 3. Subtract the combined weight of the
Loose objects or devices with a cable con- driver and passengers from XXX kg or
nection to the vehicle, for instance mobile XXX lbs
phones, can be thrown into the car's inte- 4. The resulting figure equals the available
rior while driving, for instance in the amount of cargo and luggage load ca-
event of an accident or during braking and pacity. For example, if the “XXX”
evasive maneuvers. There is a risk of in- amount equals 1,400 lbs and there will
jury. Secure loose objects or devices with be five 150 lbs passengers in your vehi-
cle, the amount of available cargo and
220
Cargo area CONTROLS
luggage load capacity is 650 lbs (1,400 - Stowing and securing cargo
750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs)
– Cover sharp edges and corners on the
5. Determine the combined weight of lug- cargo.
gage and cargo being loaded on the ve- – Heavy cargo: stow as far forward as pos-
hicle. That weight may not safely exceed sible, directly behind and at the bottom
the available cargo and luggage load ca- of the rear passenger seat backrests.
pacity calculated in Step 4.
– Very heavy cargo: when the rear seat is
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, not occupied, secure each of the outer
load from your trailer will be transferred safety belts in the opposite buckle.
to your vehicle. Consult this manual to
determine how this reduces the availa- – If necessary, fold down the rear back-
ble cargo and luggage load capacity of rests to stow large cargo.
your vehicle. – Do not stack cargo above the top edge of
the backrests.
Load – Small and light cargo: secure with
ratchet straps or draw straps.
On 3-door models
– Larger and heavy cargo: secure with
cargo straps.
Lashing eyes in the cargo area
On 5-door models
Without storage compartment package: to

secure the cargo there are two lashing eyes,
arrow 1, in the cargo area.
With storage compartment package: to se-
cure the cargo there are six lashing eyes, ar-
rows 1 and 2, in the cargo area.
The maximum load is the sum of the weight Attach load securing aids, such as lashing
of the occupants and the cargo. straps, tensioning straps, draw straps or
The greater the weight of the occupants, cargo nets, to the lashing eyes in the cargo
the less cargo that can be transported. area.
221
CONTROLS Cargo area
Cargo cover 2. Attach the left and right retaining straps

at the tailgate.
General information
When the tailgate is opened, the cargo Storage space under cargo
cover is raised.
floor panel
Safety information
Warning
Loose objects or devices with a cable con-
nection to the vehicle, for instance mobile
phones, can be thrown into the car's inte-
rior while driving, for instance in the
event of an accident or during braking and
evasive maneuvers. There is a risk of in-
jury. Secure loose objects or devices with Located under the cargo floor panel on the
a cable connection to the vehicle in the right side is a trough for the onboard vehi-
car's interior. cle tool kit.
Fold the right side of the cargo floor panel
Removing upward to remove the onboard vehicle tool
kit.
For storing bulky objects the cargo cover
can be removed.
1. Detach the left and right retaining Enlarging the cargo area
straps at the tailgate.
2. Pull the cargo cover out of the brackets
on the left and right. Concept
The cargo area can be enlarged as follows:
– The rear seat backrests can be folded
down.
– The rear seat backrests can be moved
into an upright loading position using
the cargo setting.
General information
The rear seat backrest is divided into two
parts at a ratio of 60 to 40. The left rear seat
Installing backrest is connected to the center section.
1. Slide the cargo cover forward horizon- The rear seat backrests can be folded down
tally into the two side brackets until it from the rear.
audibly engages.
222
Cargo area CONTROLS
Safety information
Warning
Warning Body parts can be jammed when moving
the head restraint. There is a risk of injury.
Danger of jamming with folding down the Make sure that the area of movement is
backrests. There is a risk of injury or risk clear when moving the head restraint.
area of movement of the rear backrest and
the of the head restraint is clear prior to Folding down the rear seat
folding down.
backrest from the rear
1. Before the rear seat backrest is folded
down, hook the corresponding safety
Warning
belt into the belt buckle on the side.
If a rear seat backrest is not locked, unse-
cured cargo can be thrown about the car’s 2. Pull the lever up, arrow 1, and fold the
interior; for instance, in the event of an ac- rear seat backrest forward, arrow 2.
cident, braking or an evasive maneuver.
There is a risk of injury. Make sure that
the rear seat backrest is locked after fold-
ing it back.
Warning
With a rear backrest that is not locked, the
protective function of the middle safety
belt is not guaranteed. There is a risk of
injuries or danger to life. If you are using Cargo position
the middle safety belt, lock the wider rear
seat backrest. Concept
The rear seat backrests can be moved into
an upright loading position.
Warning
The stability of the child restraint system Adjusting
is limited or compromised with incorrect 1. Release the backrest, and tilt it forward.
seat adjustment or improper installation of
the child seat. There is a risk of injuries or
danger to life. Make sure that the child re-
straint system fits securely against the
backrest. If possible, adjust the backrest
adjust the seats. Make sure that seats and
backrests are securely engaged or locked.
restraints or remove them.
223
CONTROLS Cargo area
2. Fold the frame up until it engages. Removing the cargo floor panel
3. Fold back and engage the rear seat 5-door models: To change the position of
backrest. the cargo area floor, first fold up the rear
part of the cargo area floor.
Folding back the backrest
Fold up the backrest and press it into the
latch. Make sure that the safety belt is not
caught behind the backrest or in between
the backrest and the rear seats.
Variable cargo area floor

Concept Grasp the cargo floor panel in the rear and
With the variable cargo area floor, the cargo fold slightly upward. Next, pull it backward
area can be configured corresponding to from the supports.
transport requirements. The cargo floor panel can be removed from
the cargo area above the tail lights.
General information
Follow instructions on securing cargo, refer
to page 220.
Lower position
– Larger objects can be transported.
224
Cargo area CONTROLS
– Space for smaller objects remains be- Upper position

tween the fixed and variable cargo area
floor.
Folded up position
Safety information
Warning
Improper use of the variable cargo floor
panel can lead to a danger of objects flying – With the backrests folded down, a long,
about during braking and evasive maneu- flat loading surface is produced.
vers. There is a risk of injury and risk of – For 3-door models:
damage to property. Maximum load in this position:
– Do not use the variable cargo floor 330 lbs/150 kg.
panel to separate the cargo area and – For 5-door models:
car's interior in the sense of a parti-
Maximum load in this position:
tion net.
441 lbs/200 kg.
– Only use the variable cargo floor
– Space for objects remains between the
panel in the folded-up position when
fixed and variable cargo area floor.
the backrests are folded up and
locked.
– Fold down the variable cargo floor
panel before driving off.
– Always secure cargo against shifting,
using straps, belts and lashing eyes,
for instance.
Fold up the cargo floor panel
Fold up the cargo floor panel in the lower

position and push it behind the locks, arrow.
You've reached the maximum cargo height.
225
226
DRIVING TIPS
Things to remember when driving .................................................. 228
Saving fuel ............................................................................................... 233
227
DRIVING TIPS Things to remember when driving
Things to remember when driving

Vehicle features and options Engine, transmission, and axle
drive
specific and optional features offered with Up to 1,200 miles/2,000 km
the series. It also describes features that are Do not exceed the maximum engine and
not necessarily available in your vehicle, for road speed:
instance, due to the selected options or – For gasoline engine 4,500 rpm and
country versions. This also applies to safety- 100 mph/160 km/h.
these functions and systems, the applicable Avoid full load or kickdown under all cir-
laws and regulations must be observed. cumstances.
From 1,200 miles/2,000 km

Breaking-in period The engine and vehicle speed can gradually
be increased.
General information Tires
Moving parts need to begin working to-
Tire traction is not optimal due to manufac-
gether smoothly.
turing circumstances when tires are brand-
The following instructions will help you to new; they achieve their full traction poten-
achieve a long vehicle life and good effi- tial after a break-in time.
ciency.
Drive conservatively for the first
During break-in, do not use the Launch 200 miles/300 km.
Control, refer to page 128.
Brake system
Safety information Brake discs and brake pads only reach their
full effectiveness after ap-
Warning prox. 300 miles/500 km. Drive moderately
Due to new parts and components, safety during this break-in period.
and driver assistance systems can react
with a delay. There is a risk of accident. Clutch
After installing new parts or with a new The function of the clutch reaches its opti-
vehicle, drive conservatively and inter- mal level only after a distance driven of ap-
vene early if necessary. Observe the break- prox. 300 miles/500 km. During this break-
in procedures of the respective parts and in period, engage the clutch gently.
components.
Following part replacement
The same break-in procedures should be ob-
served if any of the components mentioned
228
Things to remember when driving DRIVING TIPS
above have to be renewed in the course of sure that no combustible materials can
the vehicle's operating life. come in contact with hot vehicle parts in
driving operation, idle or during parking.
Do not touch the hot exhaust gas system.
General driving notes
Mobile communication devices in
Closing the tailgate the vehicle
Safety information
Warning
Warning Vehicle electronics and mobile phones can
influence one another. There is radiation
An open tailgate protrudes from the vehi- due to the transmission operations of mo-
cle and can endanger occupants and other bile phones. There is a risk of injury or
traffic participants or damage the vehicle risk of damage to property. If possible, in
in the event of an accident, braking or eva- the car's interior use only mobile phones
sive maneuvers. In addition, exhaust with direct connections to an exterior an-
fumes may enter the car's interior. There tenna in order to exclude mutual interfer-
is a risk of injury or risk of damage to ence and deflect the radiation from the
property. Do not drive with the tailgate car's interior.
open.
Hydroplaning
Driving with the tailgate open
On wet or slushy roads, a wedge of water
If driving with the tailgate open cannot be can form between the tires and road sur-
avoided: face.
– Close all windows and the glass sunroof. This phenomenon is referred to as hydro-
– Greatly increase the air flow from the planing. It is characterized by a partial or
vents. complete loss of contact between the tires
– Drive moderately. and the road surface, ultimately undermin-
ing your ability to steer and brake the vehi-
Hot exhaust gas system cle.
Driving through water

Warning
During driving operation, high tempera- General information
tures can occur underneath the vehicle When driving through water, follow the fol-
body, for instance caused by the exhaust lowing:
gas system. If combustible materials, such
as leaves or grass, come in contact with – Drive through calm water only.
hot parts of the exhaust gas system, these – Drive through water only if it is not
materials can ignite. There is a risk of in- deeper than maximum 9.8 inches/25 cm.
jury or risk of damage to property. Do not – Drive through water no faster than
remove the heat shields installed and walking speed, up to 3 mph/5 km/h.
never apply undercoating to them. Make
229
Safety information securely fastened again after they were re-

moved, for instance for cleaning.
NOTICE
When driving too quickly through too Driving in wet conditions
deep water, water can enter into the en- When roads are wet, salted, or in heavy
gine compartment, the electrical system or rain, gently press the brake pedal every few
the transmission. There is a risk of damage miles.
to property. When driving through water,
Ensure that this action does not endanger
do not exceed the maximum indicated wa-
other traffic.
ter level and the maximum speed for driv-
ing through water. The heat generated during braking dries
brake discs and brake pads and protects
them against corrosion.
Braking safely In this way braking efficiency will be avail-
able when you need it.
General information
The vehicle is equipped with ABS as a Hills
standard feature.
Perform an emergency stop in situations General information
that require such. Drive long or steep downhill gradients in
Steering is still responsive. You can still the gear that requires least braking effort.
avoid any obstacles with a minimum of Otherwise, the brakes may overheat and re-
steering effort. duce brake efficiency.
Pulsation of the brake pedal and sounds You can increase the engine's braking effect
from the hydraulic circuits indicate that by shifting down, going all the way to first
ABS is in its active mode. gear, if needed.
Safety information
Objects in the area around the pedals
Warning
Warning
Light but consistent brake pressure can
Objects in the driver's floor area can limit
lead to high temperatures, brakes wearing
the pedal distance or block a depressed
out and possibly even brake failure. There
pedal. There is a risk of accident. Stow ob-
is a risk of accident. Avoid placing exces-
jects in the vehicle such that they are se-
sive stress on the brake system.
cured and cannot enter into the driver's
floor area. Use floor mats that are suitable
for the vehicle and can be safely attached
to the floor. Do not use loose floor mats Warning
and do not layer several floor mats. Make In idle state or with the engine switched
sure that there is sufficient clearance for off, safety functions, for instance engine
the pedals. Ensure that the floor mats are braking effect, braking assistance and
steering assistance, may not be available.
There is a risk of accident. Do not attempt
230
Things to remember when driving DRIVING TIPS
to drive in idle state or with the engine Roof racks are available as special accesso-
switched off. ries.
Securing
Brake disc corrosion
Follow the installation instructions of the
Corrosion on the brake discs and contami- roof rack.
nation on the brake pads are increased by
the following circumstances: Loading
– Low mileage.
Because roof-mounted luggage racks raise
– Extended periods when the vehicle is the vehicle's center of gravity when loaded,
not used at all. they have a major effect on vehicle handling
– Infrequent use of the brakes. and steering response.
– Aggressive, acidic, or alkaline cleaning Therefore, note the following when loading
agents. and driving:
Corrosion buildup on the brake discs will – Do not exceed the approved roof/axle
cause a pulsating effect on the brakes in loads and the approved gross vehicle
their response - generally this cannot be weight.
corrected. – Be sure that adequate clearance is main-
tained for tilting and opening the glass
Condensation water under the sunroof.
parked vehicle – Distribute the roof load uniformly.
When using the automatic climate control, – The roof load should not extend past the
condensation water develops and collects loading area.
underneath the vehicle. – Always place the heaviest pieces on the
bottom.
Ground clearance – Secure the roof luggage firmly, for in-
stance using ratchet straps.
NOTICE – Do not let objects project into the open-
If the ground clearance is insufficient, e.g., ing path of the tailgate.
curbs or underground garage entrances, – Drive cautiously and avoid sudden ac-
contact with vehicle parts, e.g., spoiler, celeration and braking maneuvers. Take
and the underbody may occur. There is a corners gently.
risk of damage to property. Ensure that
there is sufficient ground clearance availa-
ble. Rear luggage rack
General information
Roof-mounted luggage rack Installation only possible with rear luggage
rack preparation.
General information Rear racks are available as special accesso-
Installation only possible with roof rack. ries.
231
Securing Power consumption

Before starting to drive, check the function
COOPER
of the rear luggage rack lights. Before start-
ing to drive, check the function of the
trailer tail lights.
The rear luggage rack lights must not con-
sume more than:
– Turn signals: 42 watts per side.
– Rear lights: 50 watts per side.
– Brake lights: 84 watts in total.
– Rear fog lights: 42 watts in total.
COOPER S – Backup light: 42 watts in total.
Keep activation times of power consumers
short with the engine switched off to pro-
tect the vehicle battery.
Driving on racetracks
Higher mechanical and thermal loads during
racetrack operation lead to increased wear.
This wear is not covered by the warranty.
The fixing points, arrow 1, and the socket, The vehicle is not designed for use in motor
arrow 2, are located below the covers in the sports competition.
bumper.
Remove the covers before installing the
rear luggage rack.
Loading
Because rear luggage racks raise the vehi-
cle's center of gravity when loaded, they
have a major effect on vehicle handling and
steering response.
Therefore, note the following when loading
and driving:
– Do not exceed the approved axle load
and the approved gross vehicle weight.
– Drive smoothly. Avoid sudden accelera-
tion and braking maneuvers. Take cor-
ners gently.
232
Saving fuel DRIVING TIPS
Saving fuel
Vehicle features and options Attached parts on the vehicle impair the
aerodynamics and increase the fuel con-
sumption.
not necessarily available in your vehicle, for Close the windows and glass
instance, due to the selected options or sunroof
related functions and systems. When using Driving with the glass sunroof and windows
these functions and systems, the applicable open results in increased air resistance and
laws and regulations must be observed. raises fuel consumption.
General information Tires

The vehicle contains advanced technologies General information
for the reduction of consumption and emis-
sion values. Tires can affect consumption in various
ways, for instance tire size may influence
Fuel consumption depends on a number of consumption.
different factors.
The implementation of certain measures, Check the tire inflation pressure
driving style and regular maintenance can
influence fuel consumption and environ-
regularly
mental impact. Check and, if needed, correct the tire infla-
tion pressure at least twice a month and be-
fore starting on a long trip.
Remove unnecessary cargo Low tire inflation pressure increases rolling
resistance and thus raises fuel consumption
Additional weight increases fuel consump- and tire wear.
tion.
Drive away without delay
Remove attached parts follow-
Do not wait for the engine to warm-up
ing use while the vehicle remains stationary. Start
driving right away, but at moderate engine
Remove roof-mounted or rear luggage racks speeds.
which are no longer required following use.
This is the fastest way for the cold engine
to reach its operating temperature.
233
DRIVING TIPS Saving fuel
Look well ahead when driving If the engine is switched off and then re-
started rather than leaving the engine run-
ning constantly, fuel consumption and emis-
Driving smoothly and proactively reduces sions are reduced. Savings can begin within
fuel consumption. a few seconds of switching off the engine.
Avoid unnecessary acceleration and brak- In addition, fuel consumption is also deter-
ing. mined by other factors, such as driving
By maintaining a suitable distance to the style, road conditions, maintenance or envi-
vehicle driving ahead of you. ronmental factors.
Avoid high engine speeds Switch off any functions that

are not currently needed
Driving at low engine speeds lowers fuel
consumption and reduces wear.
Functions such as seat heating and the rear
If necessary, observe the vehicle's gear shift window defroster require a lot of energy
indicator, refer to page 137. and consume additional fuel, especially in
city and stop-and-go traffic.
Switch off these functions if they are not
Use coasting conditions needed.
When approaching a red light, take your

foot off the accelerator and let the vehicle Have maintenance carried out
coast to a halt.
For going downhill take your foot off the ac- Have the vehicle maintained regularly to
celerator and let the vehicle roll. achieve optimal vehicle efficiency and serv-
The flow of fuel is interrupted while coast- ice life. MINI recommends that mainte-
ing. nance work be performed by a MINI service
center.
Also note the MINI maintenance systems,
Switch off the engine during refer to page 278.
longer stops
GREEN Mode
Switching off the engine
Switch off the engine during longer stops,
for instance at traffic lights, railroad cross-
Concept
ings or in traffic congestion. GREEN Mode supports a driving style that
saves on consumption. For this purpose, the
Auto Start/Stop function engine control and comfort features, for in-
stance the climate control output, are ad-
The Auto Start/Stop function of the vehicle justed.
automatically switches off the engine dur-
ing a stop. For Steptronic transmission:
234
Under certain conditions the engine is auto- Via the Central Information Display
matically decoupled from the transmission (CID)
in the D selector lever position. The vehicle
1. "My MINI"
continues traveling with the engine idling
to reduce consumption. The D selector lever 2. "Vehicle settings"
position remains engaged. 3. "Configure GREEN"
In addition, context-sensitive instructions 4. Select the desired setting.
are displayed to assist with an efficient
driving style. Activating/deactivating the functions
The achieved extended range is displayed in The following functions can be activated/
the instrument cluster as bonus range. deactivated:
General information – "GREEN speed warning"
– "GREEN climate control"
The system includes the following MINI-
MALISM functions and MINIMALISM dis- – "Coasting"
plays: Settings are stored for the driver profile
– GREEN bonus range, refer to page 236. currently used.
– GREEN tip, driving instruction, refer to
page 236. GREEN Limit
– GREEN climate control, refer to – Activate the GREEN Limit:
page 235. "GREEN speed warning":
– MINIMALISM analyzer, refer to A GREEN tip is displayed if the speed of
page 238. the set GREEN Limit is exceeded.
– Coasting driving condition, refer to – Setting the speed for the GREEN Limit:
page 237. "Tip at:"
Select the desired speed.
Activating GREEN Mode
Press the MINI Driving Modes GREEN climate control
switch downward until Climate control is set to be efficient.
GREEN is displayed in the in- By making a slight change to the set tem-
strument cluster. perature, or adjusting the rate of heating or
cooling of the car's interior consumption
can be economized.
Configuring GREEN The power output to the seat heater and ex-
terior mirror is reduced.
Via MINI Driving Modes switch
1. Activating GREEN Mode. Coasting
2. "Configure GREEN" Efficiency can be optimized by disengaging
3. Select the desired setting. the engine and coasting, refer to page 237,
with the engine idling.
This function is only available in GREEN
Mode.
235
Deactivate the function to use the braking GREEN tip, driving instruction
effect of the engine when traveling down-
hill.
GREEN potential savings

Shows potential savings with the current
settings in percentages.

GREEN bonus range The GREEN tip indicates that your driving
A modified driving style helps style can be modified to be more efficient,
you extend your driving range. for example by backing off the accelerator.
The range extension can be
displayed as the bonus range Activating/deactivating the display
in the instrument cluster.
Activate information relating to the driving
The bonus range is shown in the range dis- style and GREEN tips in the instrument
play. cluster using the Central Information Dis-
The bonus range is automatically reset ev- play (CID):
ery time the vehicle is refueled.
1. "My MINI"
– Green display: efficient driving style. 2. "System settings"
– Gray display: modify driving style, for 3. "Displays"
instance by backing off the accelerator
pedal. 4. "Instrument panel"
5. "GREEN info"
Efficiency display
A bar display in the instru- GREEN tip, symbols
ment cluster indicates your An additional symbol and text instructions
current driving efficiency. are displayed.
Mark in the left area, arrow 1: Symbol Measure
display for energy recovered
by coasting or when braking. For an efficient driving style,
look well ahead when driving,
Mark in the right area, arrow 2: display accelerate conservatively, and
when accelerating. delay accelerating.
The efficiency of your driving style is
shown by the position of the mark: Reduce speed to the selected
GREEN speed.
– Mark inside the green range: efficient
driving style. Steptronic transmission:
– Mark outside the green range: modify Switch from M/S to D and avoid
driving style, for example by backing off manual shift interventions.
the accelerator.
236
Symbol Measure Coasting

Manual transmission:
Concept
Follow the shift instructions.
The function helps to conserve fuel.
Manual transmission: To do this, under certain conditions the en-
Engage neutral for an engine gine is automatically decoupled from the
stop. transmission when selector lever position D
is set. The vehicle continues traveling with
the engine idling to reduce consumption.
Indications on the Control Display Selector lever position D remains engaged.
This driving condition is referred to as
Displaying MINIMALISM information coasting.
The current efficiency of the functions in
As soon as you step on the brake or acceler-
GREEN Mode can be displayed on the Con-
ator pedal, the engine is automatically cou-
trol Display.
pled again.
1. "My MINI" General information
2. "Technology in action" Coasting is a component of the GREEN driv-
ing mode.
3. "MINIMALISM"
Coasting is automatically activated when
Information is shown on the following func- the GREEN driving mode is called via the
tions: MINI Driving Modes switch, refer to
– Auto Start/Stop function. page 177.
– Energy recovery. A proactive driving style helps the driver to
– Climate control output. use the function often and supports the effi-
cient effect of coasting.
– Coasting.
Displaying the MINIMALISM analyzer
The function is available in the speed range
Via the Central Information Display (CID): from approx. 15 mph/25 km/h up to
1. "My MINI" 100 mph/160 km/h.
2. "Technology in action" – Accelerator pedal and brake pedal are
not operated.
3. "MINIMALISM Analyser"
– The selector lever is in selector lever po-
Further information on the MINIMALISM sition D.
analyzer, refer to page 238.
– Engine and transmission are at operat-
ing temperature.
Open GREEN Tip display
– With a camera in the area of the interior
mirror: the system does not detect any
1. "My MINI" vehicles ahead of you.
2. "Technology in action"
3. "GREEN tips"
237
Operation via shift paddles – If driving in the dynamic limit range.

– If driving on steep uphill or downhill
Concept grades.
Depending on your vehicle's equipment, the – The battery charge state is temporarily
coasting mode can be influenced with the too low.
shift paddles.
– The vehicle electrical system is drawing
excessive current.
Activating/deactivating coasting via shift
paddles
MINIMALISM analyzer
1. Shift to the highest gear by pulling the
right shift paddle. Concept
2. To activate coasting mode, actuate the The function helps develop an especially ef-
right shift paddle again. ficient driving style and to conserve fuel.
To deactivate, actuate the left shift paddle. For this purpose, the driving style is ana-
lyzed. The assessment is done in various
Display categories and is displayed on the Control
Display.
This display will help you adjust your driv-
The bar display below the ing style and save some fuel.
tachometer is filled in green The last 15 minutes of a trip are evaluated.
and the mark appears at the
zero point. The tachometer The range of the vehicle can be extended by
shows the idle speed. adopting an efficient driving style. This gain
in range is displayed as a bonus range in the
instrument cluster and on the Control Dis-
Indications on the Control Display play.
The coasting driving condition is displayed
in the MINIMALISM Info while driving. Functional requirement
The distance traveled in the coasting driv- This function is available in GREEN Mode.
ing condition is indicated by a counter.
Displaying the MINIMALISM analyzer
Displaying MINIMALISM information Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
1. "My MINI" 2. "Technology in action"
2. "Technology in action" 3. "MINIMALISM Analyser"
3. "MINIMALISM"
Display on the Control Display
System limits The display of the MINIMALISM analyzer
The function is not available if one of the consists of a fish in a water glass, a table of
following conditions applies: values and the display of the achieved bo-
– DSC OFF and TRACTION are activated. nus range.
– Cruise control is activated.
238
The fish and the movements of the water in

the bowl symbolize the efficiency of the
driving style.
The more efficient the driving style, the less
the water sloshes around in the bowl and
the better is the fish's mood. If the driving
style is inefficient, the water oscillates, the
fish's mood worsens, and a reduced number
of stars is displayed.
The table of values contains stars and evalu-
ates the driving style in different catego-
ries. The more efficient the driving style,
the more stars are displayed in the table.
The bonus range achieved by a driving style
that minimizes consumption is displayed
below the table of values. The more effi-
cient the driving style, the faster the bonus
range increases.
To assist with an efficient driving style,
GREEN tips are displayed while driving.
Tips for an energy-saving driving style, Sav-
ing fuel, refer to page 233.
239
240
MOBILITY
Refueling .................................................................................................. 242
Fuel ............................................................................................................ 244
Wheels and tires .................................................................................... 246
Engine compartment ............................................................................ 269
Engine oil ................................................................................................. 272
Coolant ...................................................................................................... 276
Maintenance ........................................................................................... 278
Replacing components ......................................................................... 280
Breakdown assistance .......................................................................... 289
Care ............................................................................................................ 297
241
MOBILITY Refueling
Refueling
Vehicle features and options Fuel cap
This chapter describes all standard, country- Opening
1. Grasp the fuel filler flap at the rear edge
and open it.
General information
Follow the fuel recommendation, refer to 2. Turn the fuel cap counterclockwise.
page 244, prior to refueling.
Safety information
NOTICE
With a driving range of less than
30 miles/50 km the engine may no longer
have sufficient fuel. Engine functions are
not ensured anymore. There is a risk of 3. Place the fuel cap in the bracket at-
damage to property. Refuel promptly. tached to the fuel filler flap.
242
Refueling MOBILITY
Closing Safety information
Warning NOTICE
The retaining strap of the fuel cap can be Fuels are toxic and aggressive. Overfilling
jammed and crushed during closing. The of the fuel tank can damage the fuel sys-
cap cannot be correctly closed. Fuel or fuel tem. Painted surfaces may be damaged by
vapors can escape. There is a risk of injury contact with fuel. Escaping fuel can harm
or risk of damage to property. Pay atten- the environment. There is a risk of damage
tion that the retaining strap is not jammed to property. Avoid overfilling.
or crushed when closing the cap.
1. Fit the cap and turn it clockwise until

you clearly hear a click.
2. Press on the fuel filler flap until it en-
gages.
Emergency unlocking
It may be necessary in certain situations to
unlock the fuel filler flap manually, for in-
stance with an electrical fault.
Have fuel filler flap unlocked by a dealer’s
service center or another qualified service
Follow the following when re-

fueling
General information
When refueling, insert the filler nozzle
completely into the filler pipe. Lifting up the
fuel pump nozzle during refueling causes:
– Premature switching off.
– Reduced return of the fuel vapors.
The fuel tank is full when the filler nozzle
clicks off the first time.
Make sure that the fuel cap is closed prop-
erly after refueling, otherwise the emissions
warning light may light up.
Follow safety regulations posted at the gas
station.
243
MOBILITY Fuel
Fuel
This chapter describes all standard, country- NOTICE

specific and optional features offered with Even small quantities of the wrong fuel or
the series. It also describes features that are wrong fuel additives can damage the fuel
not necessarily available in your vehicle, for system and engine. Furthermore, the cata-
instance, due to the selected options or lytic converter is permanently damaged.
country versions. This also applies to safety- There is a risk of damage to property. Do
related functions and systems. When using not refuel or add the following in the case
these functions and systems, the applicable of gasoline engines:
– Leaded gasoline.
– Metallic additives, for instance man-
Fuel recommendation ganese or iron.
Do not press the Start/Stop button after
refueling with the wrong fuel. Contact a
General information dealer’s service center or another qualified
Depending on the region, many gas stations service center or repair shop.
sell fuel that has been customized to winter
or summer conditions. Fuel that is available
in winter, for instance helps make a cold NOTICE
start easier.
Incorrect fuels can damage the fuel system
Gasoline and the engine. There is a risk of damage
to property. Do not use fuels with a higher
percentage of ethanol than recommended.
General information Do not refuel with fuels containing metha-
For the best fuel efficiency, the gasoline nol, e.g. M5 to M100.
should be sulfur-free or very low in sulfur
content.
Fuels that are marked on the gas pump as NOTICE
containing metal must not be used.
Fuel that does not comply with the mini-
Fuels with a maximum ethanol content of mum quality can compromise engine func-
25 %, i. e. E10 or E25, may be used for refu- tion or cause engine damage. There is a
eling. risk of damage to property. Do not fill with
Ethanol should meet the following quality fuel that does not comply with the mini-
standards: mum quality.
US: ASTM 4806–xx
CAN: CGSB-3.511–xx
xx: comply with the current standard in
each case.
244
Fuel MOBILITY
CAUTION
The use of poor-quality fuels may result in
harmful engine deposits or damage. Addi-
tionally, problems relating to drivability,
starting and stalling, especially under cer-
tain environmental conditions such as
high ambient temperature and high alti-
tude, may occur.
If drivability problems are encountered,
we recommend switching to a high quality
gasoline brand and a higher octane grade
— AKI number — for a few tank fills. To
avoid harmful engine deposits, it is highly
recommended to purchase gasoline from
Top Tier retailers.
Failure to comply with these recommenda-
tions may result in the need for unsched-
uled maintenance.
Recommended fuel grade

MINI recommends AKI 91.
John Cooper Works:
Refuel with this gasoline to achieve the
rated performance and consumption values.
Minimum fuel grade

John Cooper Works:
If you use gasoline with this minimum AKI
Rating, the engine may produce knocking
sounds when starting at high external tem-
peratures. This has no effect on the engine
life.
245
MOBILITY Wheels and tires
Wheels and tires

Vehicle features and options Tire inflation pressure
specifications
specific and optional features offered with In the tire inflation pressure table
the series. It also describes features that are The tire inflation pressure table, refer to
not necessarily available in your vehicle, for page 248, contains all tire inflation pres-
instance, due to the selected options or sure specifications for the specified tire
country versions. This also applies to safety- sizes at the ambient temperature. The tire
related functions and systems. When using inflation pressure values apply to tire sizes
these functions and systems, the applicable approved by the manufacturer of the vehicle
laws and regulations must be observed. for the vehicle type.
To identify the correct tire inflation pres-
sure, please note the following:
Tire inflation pressure – Tire sizes of your vehicle.
– Maximum permitted driving speed.
General information
The tire characteristics and tire inflation Checking the tire inflation pressure
pressure influence the following:
– The service life of the tires. General information
– Road safety. Tires heat up while driving. The tire infla-
– Driving comfort. tion pressure increases with the tire tem-
perature.
– Fuel consumption.
Tires have a natural, consistent loss of tire
inflation pressure.
Safety information
The displays of inflation devices may under-
read by up to 0.1 bar/2 psi.
Warning
A tire with too little or no tire inflation Checking using tire inflation pressure
pressure may heat up significantly and specifications in the tire inflation
sustain damage. This will have a negative pressure table
impact on aspects of handling, such as
The tire inflation pressure specifications in
steering and braking response. There is a
the tire inflation pressure table only relate
risk of accident. Regularly check the tire
to cold tires or tires at the same tempera-
inflation pressure, and correct it as
ture as the ambient temperature.
needed, for instance twice a month and be-
fore a long trip. Only check the tire inflation pressure levels
when the tires are cold, i.e.:
– Driving range of max. 1.25 miles/2 km
has not been exceeded.
246
Wheels and tires MOBILITY
– If the vehicle has not moved again for at

least 2 hours after a trip.
1. Determine the intended tire inflation
pressure levels for the mounted tires.
2. Check the tire inflation pressure in all
four tires, using a pressure gage, for ex-
ample.
3. Correct the tire inflation pressure if the
actual tire inflation pressure deviates
These pressure values can also be found on
from the intended tire inflation pres-
the tire inflation pressure label on the driv-
sure.
er's door pillar.
4. Check whether all valve caps are
screwed onto the tire valves. Do not exceed a speed of 100 mph/
160 km/h.
After correcting the tire inflation
pressure
For run-flat tires: reinitialize run-flat tires.
For the Tire Pressure Monitor TPM: reset
the Tire Pressure Monitor TPM.
Checking the tire inflation pressure of

the emergency wheel
Located behind the bumper on the under-

side of the vehicle is an opening for check-
ing the tire inflation pressure.
Tire inflation pressures up to

100 mph/160 km/h
For speeds of up to 100 mph/160 km/h and
for optimum driving comfort, note the pres-
sure values in the tire inflation pressure ta-
ble, refer to page 248, and adjust as neces-
sary.
247
Tire pressure values up to On 3-door models: COOPER S

100 mph/160 km/h
Tire size Pressure specifica-
On 3-door models: COOPER tions in bar/PSI
Specifications
Tire size Pressure specifica- in bar/PSI with
tions in bar/PSI cold tires
Specifications in
bar/PSI with cold
195/55 R 16 87 2.4 / 35 2.2 / 32
tires
V A/S
195/55 R 16 87
175/65 R 15 84 2.4 / 35 2.2 / 32 H M+S
H A/S 205/45 R 17 88 2.5 / 36 2.2 / 32
195/55 R 16 87 V XL A/S
V A/S 205/45 R 17 88
205/45 R 17 88 W XL
V XL A/S 205/45 R 17 88
195/55 R 16 87 V XL M+S
W
205/40 R 18 86 2.7 / 39 2.3 / 33
205/45 R 17 88 W XL
W XL
175/60 R 16 86
175/65 R 15 88 H XL M+S
H XL M+S
185/50 R 17 86
195/55 R 16 87 H XL M+S
H M+S
205/45 R 17 88
V XL M+S
205/40 R 18 86 2.6 / 38 2.3 / 33
W XL
175/60 R 16 86
H XL M+S
185/50 R 17 86
H XL M+S
248
On 3-door models: JOHN COOPER On 5-door models: COOPER

WORKS
Tire size Pressure specifications tions in bar/PSI
in bar/PSI
Specifications in
Specifications bar/PSI with cold
in bar/PSI with tires
cold tires
175/65 R 15 84 2.5 / 36 2.3 / 33
205/45 R 17 88 2.8 / 41 2.4 / 35 H A/S
V XL A/S 195/55 R 16 87
205/45 R 17 88 V A/S
W XL 205/45 R 17 88
205/40 R 18 86 V XL A/S
W XL 195/55 R 16 87
185/50 R 17 86 W
H XL M+S 205/45 R 17 88
205/45 R 17 88 W XL
V XL M+S 175/65 R 15 88
H XL M+S
195/55 R 16 87
H M+S
205/45 R 17 88
V XL M+S
205/40 R 18 86 2.7 / 39 2.5 / 36
W XL
175/60 R 16 86
H XL M+S
185/50 R 17 86
H XL M+S
249
On 5-door models: COOPER S Tire inflation pressure values over

100 mph/160 km/h
tions in bar/PSI On 3-door models: COOPER
Specifications
in bar/PSI with Tire size Pressure specifica-
cold tires tions in bar/PSI
Specifications in
bar/PSI with cold
195/55 R 16 87 2.3 / 33 2.2 / 32
tires
V A/S
195/55 R 16 87
H M+S 175/65 R 15 84 2.7 / 39 2.5 / 36
205/45 R 17 88 2.6 / 38 2.4 / 35 H A/S
V XL A/S 195/55 R 16 87
205/45 R 17 88 V A/S
W XL 205/45 R 17 88
205/45 R 17 88 V XL A/S
V XL M+S 195/55 R 16 87
W
205/40 R 18 86 2.7 / 39 2.5 / 36
W XL 205/45 R 17 88
W XL
175/60 R 16 86
H XL M+S 175/65 R 15 88
H XL M+S
185/50 R 17 86
H XL M+S 195/55 R 16 87
H M+S
205/45 R 17 88
Tire inflation pressures at max. V XL M+S
speeds above 100 mph/160 km/h
205/40 R 18 86 2.9 / 42 2.5 / 36
W XL
Warning 175/60 R 16 86
In order to drive at maximum speeds in ex- H XL M+S
cess of 100 mph/160 km/h, please ob- 185/50 R 17 86
serve, and, if necessary, adjust tire pres- H XL M+S
sures for speeds exceeding 100 mph/
160 km/h from the relevant table on the
following pages. Otherwise, tire damage
and accidents could occur.
For speeds over 100 mph/160 km/h and for

optimum driving comfort, note the pressure
values in the tire inflation pressure table,
refer to page 250, and adjust as necessary.
250
On 3-door models: COOPER S On 3-door models: JOHN COOPER

WORKS
tions in bar/PSI Tire size Pressure specifications
in bar/PSI
Specifications in
bar/PSI with Specifications
cold tires in bar/PSI with
cold tires
195/55 R 16 87 2.8 / 41 2.4 / 35
V A/S 205/45 R 17 88 3.4 / 49 3.0 / 44
195/55 R 16 87 V XL A/S
H M+S 205/45 R 17 88
205/45 R 17 88 3.1 / 45 2.7 / 39 W XL
V XL A/S 205/40 R 18 86
205/45 R 17 88 W XL
W XL 185/50 R 17 86
205/45 R 17 88 H XL M+S
V XL M+S 205/45 R 17 88
205/40 R 18 86 V XL M+S
W XL
175/60 R 16 86
H XL M+S
185/50 R 17 86
H XL M+S
251
On 5-door models: COOPER On 5-door models: COOPER S
Tire size Pressure specifica- Tire size Pressure specifica-

tions in bar/PSI tions in bar/PSI
Specifications in Specifications
bar/PSI with cold in bar/PSI with
tires cold tires
175/65 R 15 84 2.8 / 41 2.6 / 38 195/55 R 16 87 2.9 / 42 2.7 / 39

H A/S V A/S
195/55 R 16 87 195/55 R 16 87
V A/S H M+S
205/45 R 17 88 205/45 R 17 88 3.2 / 46 2.9 / 42
V XL A/S V XL A/S
195/55 R 16 87 205/45 R 17 88
W W XL
205/45 R 17 88 205/45 R 17 88
W XL V XL M+S
175/65 R 15 88
205/40 R 18 86 3.2 / 46 2.9 / 42
H XL M+S
W XL
195/55 R 16 87
175/60 R 16 86
H M+S
H XL M+S
205/45 R 17 88
185/50 R 17 86
V XL M+S
H XL M+S
205/40 R 18 86 3.0 / 44 2.7 / 39
W XL
175/60 R 16 86 Tire identification marks
H XL M+S
185/50 R 17 86 Tire size
H XL M+S
205/45 R 17 84 V
205: nominal width in mm
45: aspect ratio in %
R: radial tire code
17: rim diameter in inches
84: load rating, not for ZR tires
V: speed rating, before the R on ZR tires
252
Maximum tire load Manufacture date

Maximum tire load is the maximum permis- You can find the manufacture date of the
sible weight for which the tire is approved. tire on the tire's sidewall.
Locate the maximum tire load on the tire Designation Manufacture date
sidewall and the Gross Axle Weight Rating
– GAWR – on the certification label on the DOT … 2119 21st week, 2019
driver’s door pillar. Divide the tire load by
1.1. It must be greater than one-half of the Uniform Tire Quality Grading
vehicle’s Gross Axle Weight Rating – Quality grades can be found where applica-
GAWR. Note, front vs. rear GAWR and tire ble on the tire sidewall between tread
loads, respectively. shoulder and maximum section width.
Speed letter E.g.: Treadwear 200; Traction AA; Tempera-
ture A
Designation Maximum speed
DOT Quality Grades
Q up to 100 mph/160 km/h Treadwear
R: up to 106 mph/170 km/h Traction AA A B C
S up to 112 mph/180 km/h Temperature A B C
T up to 118 mph/190 km/h All passenger vehicle tires must conform to
Federal Safety Requirements in addition to
H up to 131 mph/210 km/h these grades.
V up to 150 mph/240 km/h
Treadwear
W up to 167 mph/270 km/h
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating
Y up to 186 mph/300 km/h based on the wear rate of the tire when
tested under controlled conditions on a
Tire Identification Number specified government test course. E.g., a
tire graded 150 would wear one and one-
DOT-Code: DOT xxxx xxx 2119 half, 1 g, times as well on the government
xxxx: manufacturer code for the tire brand course as a tire graded 100. The relative
xxx: tire size and tire design performance of tires depends upon the ac-
tual conditions of their use, however, and
2119: tire age
may depart significantly from the norm due
Tires with DOT codes meet the guidelines to variations in driving habits, service prac-
of the U.S. Department of Transportation. tices and differences in road characteristics
and climate.
Tire age
Traction
Recommendation The traction grades, from highest to lowest,
Regardless of the tire tread, replace tires at are AA, A, B, and C.
least every 6 years. Those grades represent the tire's ability to
stop on wet pavement as measured under
253
controlled conditions on specified govern- M+S

ment test surfaces of asphalt and concrete.
Winter and all-season tires with better cold
A tire marked C may have poor traction per-
weather performance than summer tires.
formance.
The traction grade assigned to this tire is
based on straight-ahead braking traction Tire tread
tests, and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction
characteristics. Summer tires
Do not drive with a tire tread of less than
Temperature 0.12 in/3 mm, otherwise there is an in-
The temperature grades are A, the highest, creased risk of hydroplaning.
B, and C, representing the tire's resistance
to the generation of heat and its ability to Winter tires
dissipate heat when tested under controlled Do not drive with a tire tread of less than
conditions on a specified indoor laboratory 0.16 in/4 mm, as such tires are less suitable
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can for winter operation.
cause the material of the tire to degenerate
and reduce tire life, and excessive tempera- Minimum tread depth
ture can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of perform-
ance which all passenger car tires must
meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standard No. 109. Grades Band A
represent higher levels of performance on
the laboratory test wheel than the minimum
required by law.
Warning
Wear indicators are distributed around the
The temperature grade for this tire is es-
tire's circumference and have the legally re-
tablished for a tire that is properly inflated
quired minimum height of 0.063 in-
and not overloaded. Excessive speed, un-
ches/1.6 mm.
derinflation, or excessive loading, either
separately or in combination, can cause The positions of the wear indicators are
heat buildup and possible tire failure. marked on the tire sidewall with TWI, Tread
Wear Indicator.
RSC – Run-flat tires
Run-flat tires, refer to page 257, are labeled
with a circular symbol containing the let-
ters RSC marked on the sidewall.
254
Tire damage center or repair shop. Have vehicle towed

or transported as needed. Do not repair
damaged tires, but have them replaced.
General information
Inspect your tires regularly for damage, for-
eign objects lodged in the tread, and tread Warning
wear.
Tires can become damaged by driving over
Driving over rough or damaged road surfa- obstacles, e.g., curbs or road damage, at
ces, as well as debris, curbs and other obsta- high speed. Larger wheels have a smaller
cles can cause serious damage to wheels, tire cross-section. The smaller the tire
tires and suspension parts. This is more cross-section, the higher the risk of tire
likely to occur with low-profile tires, which damage. There is a danger of accidents and
provide less cushioning between the wheel property damage. If possible, avoid driving
and the road. Be careful to avoid road haz- over objects or road conditions that may
ards and reduce your speed, especially if damage tires, or drive over them slowly
your vehicle is equipped with low-profile and carefully.
tires.
Indications of tire damage or other vehicle
malfunctions:
– Unusual vibrations. Changing wheels and tires
– Unusual tire or running noises.
– Unusual handling such as a strong ten- Mounting and wheel balancing
dency to pull to the left or right. Have mounting and wheel balancing carried
Damage can be caused by the following sit- out by a dealer’s service center or another
uations, for instance: qualified service center or repair shop.
– Driving over curbs.
Wheel and tire combination
– Road damage.
– Tire inflation pressure too low. General information
– Vehicle overloading. You can ask the dealer's service center or
– Incorrect tire storage. another qualified service center or repair
shop about the correct wheel/tire combina-
Safety information tion and wheel rim versions for the vehicle.
Safety information
Warning
Damaged tires can lose tire inflation pres-
Warning
sure, which can lead to loss of vehicle con-
trol. There is a risk of accident. If tire dam- Wheels and tires which are not suitable
age is suspected while driving, for your vehicle can damage parts of the
immediately reduce speed and stop. Have vehicle, for instance due to contact with
wheels and tires checked. For this pur- the body due to tolerances despite the
pose, drive carefully to the nearest dealer’s same official size rating. There is a risk of
service center or another qualified service an accident. The manufacturer of your ve-
255
hicle strongly suggests that you use new; they achieve their full traction poten-
wheels and tires that have been recom- tial after a break-in time.
mended by the vehicle manufacturer for Drive conservatively for the first
your vehicle type. 200 miles/300 km.
Retreaded tires
Warning
Incorrect wheel/tire combinations will Warning
have a negative impact on the vehicle's
handling and on the function of a variety Retreaded tires can have different tire cas-
of systems, such as the Anti-lock Brake ing structures. With advanced age the
System or Dynamic Stability Control. service life can be limited. There is a risk
There is a risk of accident. To maintain of an accident. The manufacturer of your
good handling and vehicle response, use vehicle does not recommend the use of re-
only tires with a single tread configuration treaded tires.
from a single manufacturer. The manufac-
turer of the vehicle recommends that you The manufacturer of the vehicle does not
use wheels and tires that have been rec- recommend the use of retreaded tires.
ommended by the vehicle manufacturer
for your vehicle type. Following tire dam- Winter tires
age, have the original wheel/tire combina- Winter tires are recommended for operat-
tion remounted on the vehicle as soon as ing on winter roads.
possible. Although so-called all-season M+S tires pro-
vide better winter traction than summer
tires, they usually do not provide the same
Recommended tire brands level of performance as winter tires.
Maximum speed of winter tires

If the maximum speed of the vehicle is
higher than the permissible speed for the
winter tires, then attach a label showing the
permissible maximum speed in the field of
view. The label is available from a dealer's
service center or another qualified service
For each tire size, the manufacturer of the With winter tires mounted, observe and do
vehicle recommends certain tire brands. not exceed the permissible maximum speed.
The tire brands can be identified by a star
on the tire sidewall. Changing runflat tires
For your own safety, use only runflat tires.
New tires No spare tire is available in the case of a flat
Tire traction is not optimal due to manufac- tire. Further information is available from a
turing circumstances when tires are brand- dealer's service center or another qualified
256
Rotating wheels between axles Safety information

Different wear patterns can occur on the
front and rear axles depending on individual Warning
driving conditions. The tires can be rotated
Your vehicle handles differently with a
in pairs between the axles to achieve even
run-flat tire with no or low inflation pres-
wear. Further information is available from
sure; for instance, your lane stability when
a dealer's service center or another qualified
braking is reduced, braking distances are
service center or repair shop. After rotating,
longer and the self-steering properties will
check the tire pressure and correct, if
change. There is a risk of accident. Drive
needed.
moderately and do not exceed a speed of
50 mph/80 km/h.
Storing tires
Tire inflation pressure Label
Do not exceed the maximum tire inflation
pressure indicated on the side wall of the
tire.
Storage
Store wheels and tires in a cool, dry and
dark place.
Always protect tires against all contact with
oil, grease, and solvents.
Do not leave tires in plastic bags. The tires are marked on the tire sidewall
Remove dirt from wheels or tires. with RSC Run-flat System Component.
Run-flat tires Repairing a flat tire

Concept Safety measures
Run-flat tires permit continued driving un- – Park the vehicle as far away as possible
der restricted conditions even in the event from passing traffic and on solid ground.
of a complete loss of tire inflation pressure.
– Switch on the hazard warning system.
General information – Secure the vehicle against rolling away
by setting the parking brake.
The wheels are composed of tires that are
self-supporting to a limited degree. – Turn the steering wheel until the front
wheels are in the straight-ahead posi-
The support of the sidewall allows the tire tion and engage the steering wheel lock.
to remain drivable to a restricted degree in
the event of a tire inflation pressure loss. – Have all vehicle occupants get out of the
vehicle and ensure that they remain out-
Follow the instructions for continued driv-
ing with a flat tire.
257
side the immediate area in a safe place, Overview

such as behind a guardrail.
– If necessary, set up a warning triangle Storage
at an appropriate distance. The Mobility System is located under the
cargo floor panel.
Mobility System Sealant container
Concept
With the Mobility System, minor tire dam-
age can be sealed temporarily to enable con-
tinued travel. To accomplish this, sealant is
pumped into the tires, which seals the dam-
age from the inside.
General information
– Follow the instructions on using the – Sealant container, arrow 1.
Mobility System found on the compres- – Filling hose, arrow 2.
sor and sealant container.
Observe use-by date on the sealant con-
– Use of the Mobility System may be inef- tainer.
fective if the tire puncture measures ap-
prox. 1/8 inches/4 mm or more.
Compressor
– Contact a dealer's service center or an-
shop if the tire cannot be made drivable.
– Do not remove foreign bodies that have
penetrated the tire. Only remove foreign
objects if they are visibly protruding
from the tire.
– Pull the speed limit sticker off the seal-
ant container and apply it to the steer-
ing wheel.
– The use of a sealant can damage the 1 Sealant container unlocking
TPM wheel electronics. In this case, 2 Sealant container holder
have the TPM wheel electronics re- 3 Tire pressure gage
placed at the next opportunity.
4 Reduce tire inflation pressure button
– The compressor can be used to check
5 On/off switch
the tire inflation pressure.
6 Compressor
7 Connector/cable for socket
8 Connection hose
258
Safety measures Filling

– Park the vehicle as far away as possible 1. Shake the sealant container.
from passing traffic and on solid ground.
– Switch on the hazard warning system.
– Secure the vehicle against rolling away
by setting the parking brake.
– Turn the steering wheel until the front
wheels are in the straight-ahead posi-
tion and engage the steering wheel lock.
– Have all vehicle occupants get out of the
vehicle and ensure that they remain out-
side the immediate area in a safe place, 2. Pull filling hose completely out of the
such as behind a guardrail. cover of the sealant container. Do not
– If necessary, set up a warning triangle kink the hose.
at an appropriate distance.
Filling the tire with sealant

Safety information
DANGER
If the exhaust pipe is blocked or ventila-
tion is insufficient, harmful exhaust gases
can enter into the vehicle. The exhaust 3. Slide the sealant container into the
gases contain pollutants which are color- holder on the compressor housing, en-
less and odorless. In enclosed areas, ex- suring that it engages audibly.
haust gases can also accumulate outside of
the vehicle. There is danger to life. Keep
the exhaust pipe free and ensure sufficient
ventilation.
NOTICE
The compressor can overheat during ex-
tended operation. There is a risk of dam-
age to property. Do not run the compres-
sor for more than 10 minutes.
259
4. Screw the filling hose of the sealant con- Checking and adjusting the tire
tainer onto the tire valve of the non- inflation pressure
working wheel.
Checking
1. Switch off the compressor.
2. Read the tire inflation pressure on the
tire pressure gage.
To continue the trip, a tire inflation pres-
sure of at least 2 bar must be reached.
Removing and stowing the sealant

container
5. With the compressor switched off, in-
sert the plug into the power socket in- 1. Unscrew the filling hose of the sealant
side the vehicle. container from the tire valve.
2. Press the red unlocking device.
3. Remove the sealant container from the
compressor.
4. Wrap and store the sealant container in
suitable material to avoid dirtying the
cargo area.
Minimum tire inflation pressure is not

reached
6. With the ignition switched on or the en- 1. Pull the connector out of the power
gine running, switch on the compressor. socket inside the vehicle.
2. Drive 33 ft/10 m forward and back to
distribute the sealant in the tire.
3. Screw the connection hose of the com-
pressor directly onto the tire valve stem.
Let the compressor run for max. 10 minutes

to fill the tire with sealant and achieve a
tire inflation pressure of approx. 2.5 bar.
While the tire is being filled with sealant,
the tire inflation pressure may sporadically
reach approx. 5 bar. Do not switch off the
compressor at this point.
260
4. Insert the connector into the power Adjustment

socket inside the vehicle. 1. Stop at a suitable location.
2. Screw the connection hose of the com-
pressor directly onto the tire valve stem.
5. With the ignition switched on or the en-

gine running, switch on the compressor.
If a tire inflation pressure of at least 3. Insert the connector into the power
2 bar cannot be reached, contact your socket inside the vehicle.
dealer's service center or another quali-
fied service center or repair shop.
If a tire inflation pressure of at least
2 bar is reached, see Minimum tire infla-
tion pressure is reached.
6. Unscrew the connection hose of the
compressor from the tire valve.
7. Pull the connector out of the power
socket inside the vehicle.
8. Stow the Mobility System in the vehicle. 4. Correct the tire inflation pressure to at
least 2.0 bar.
Minimum tire inflation pressure is – Increase tire inflation pressure: with
reached the ignition switched on or the en-
1. Unscrew the connection hose of the gine running, switch on the com-
compressor from the tire valve. pressor.
2. Pull the connector out of the power – Reduce tire inflation pressure: press
socket inside the vehicle. the button on the compressor.
3. Stow the Mobility System in the vehicle. 5. Unscrew the connection hose of the
4. Immediately drive approx. compressor from the tire valve.
5 miles/10 km to ensure that the sealant 6. Pull the connector out of the power
is evenly distributed in the tire. socket inside the vehicle.
Do not exceed a speed of 7. Stow the Mobility System in the vehicle.
50 mph/80 km/h.
If possible, do not drive at speeds less Continuing the trip
than 12 mph/20 km/h. Do not exceed the maximum permissible
speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
261
Reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor, refer to Use

page 163.
Use only in pairs on the front wheels, equip-
Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor, refer to ped with the tires of the following size:
page 158.
– 175/65 R 15.
Replace the nonworking tire and the sealant
– 175/60 R 16.
container of the Mobility System promptly.
– 185/50 R 17.
John Cooper Works:
Snow chains 185/50 R 17.
Follow the snow chain manufacturer's in-
Safety information structions.
Do not initialize the Flat Tire Monitor after
Warning mounting snow chains, as doing so may re-
sult in incorrect readings.
With the mounting of snow chains on un-
suitable tires, the snow chains can come Do not reset the Tire Pressure Monitor TPM
into contact with vehicle parts. There may after mounting snow chains, as doing so
be a risk of accident or risk of damage to may result in incorrect readings.
property. Only mount snow chains on tires When driving with snow chains, briefly ac-
that are designated by their manufacturer tivate Dynamic Traction Control DTC, if
as suitable for the use of snow chains. needed.
Maximum speed with snow chains

Warning Do not exceed a speed of 30 mph/50 km/h
Insufficiently tight snow chains may dam- when using snow chains.
age tires and vehicle components. There
may be a risk of accident or risk of damage
to property. Make sure that the snow Changing wheels/tires
chains are always sufficiently tight. Re-
tighten as needed according to the snow General information
chain manufacturer's instructions.
When using run-flat tires or a flat tire kit, a
wheel does not always need to be changed
Fine-link snow chains immediately when there is a loss of tire in-
flation pressure due to a flat tire.
The manufacturer of the vehicle recom-
mends the use of fine-link snow chains. Cer- If needed, the tools for changing wheels are
tain types of fine-link snow chains have available as accessories from a dealer’s
been tested by the manufacturer of the ve- service center or another qualified service
hicle and recommended as road-safe and center or repair shop.
suitable.
Information regarding suitable snow chains
is available from a dealer’s service center or
shop.
262
Safety information
Warning
DANGER On soft, uneven or slippery ground, for ex-
ample snow, ice, tiles, etc., the vehicle jack
The vehicle jack is only provided for short- can slip away. There is a risk of injury. If
term lifting of the vehicle for wheel possible, change the wheel on a flat, solid,
changes. Even if all safety measures are and slip-resistant surface.
observed, there is a risk of the raised vehi-
cle falling, if the vehicle jack tips over.
There is a risk of injuries or danger to life.
If the vehicle is raised, do not lie under the Warning
vehicle and do not start the engine. The vehicle jack is optimized for lifting
the vehicle and for the jacking points on
the vehicle only. There is a risk of injury.
DANGER Do not lift any other vehicle or cargo using
the vehicle jack.
Supports such as wooden blocks under the
vehicle jack reduce the capacity of the ve-
hicle jack to bear weight. They have the
potential to exert too much strain on the Warning
vehicle jack, causing it to tip over and the If the vehicle jack is not inserted into the
vehicle to fall. There is a risk of injuries or jacking point provided for this purpose,
danger to life. Do not place supports under the vehicle may be damaged or the vehicle
the vehicle jack. jack may slip when it is being cranked up.
to property. When cranking up the vehicle
Warning jack, ensure that it is inserted in the jack-
ing point next to the wheel housing.
The jack, issued by the vehicle manufac-
turer, is provided in order to perform a
wheel change in the event of a breakdown.
The jack is not designed for frequent use; Warning
for example, changing from summer to A vehicle that is raised on a vehicle jack
winter tires. Using the jack frequently may may fall off of the jack if lateral forces are
cause it to become jammed or damaged. exerted on it. There is a risk of injury and
There is a risk of injury and risk of damage risk of damage to property. While the ve-
to property. Only use the jack to attach an hicle is raised, do not exert lateral forces
emergency or spare wheel in the event of on the vehicle or pull abruptly on the vehi-
a breakdown. cle. Have a stuck wheel removed by a deal-
er’s service center or another qualified
263
Securing the vehicle against rolling Lug bolt lock

General information Concept
The vehicle manufacturer recommends to The wheel lug bolts have a special coding.
additionally secure the vehicle against roll- The lug bolts can only be released with the
ing away when changing a wheel. adapter which matches the coding.
On a level surface Overview

The adapter of the lug bolt lock is located in
the onboard vehicle tool kit, refer to
page 280.
Place wheel chocks or other suitable objects

in front and behind the wheel that is diago-
nal to the wheel to be changed.
– Lug bolt, arrow 1.
On a slight downhill gradient – Adapter, arrow 2.
Unscrewing
1. Attach the adapter to the lug bolt.
2. Unscrew the lug bolt.
3. Remove the adapter after unscrewing
the lug bolt.
Screwing on
If you need to change a wheel on a slight 1. Attach the adapter to the lug bolt. If
downhill grade, place chocks and other suit- necessary, turn the adapter until it fits
able objects, for instance a rock, under the on the lug bolt.
wheels of both the front and rear axles 2. Screw on the lug bolt. The tightening
against the rolling direction. torque is 140 Nm.
3. Remove the adapter and stow it after
screwing on the lug bolt.
Preparing the vehicle

– Park the vehicle on solid and non-slip
ground at a safe distance from traffic.
264
– Switch on the hazard warning system. Jacking up the vehicle

– Set the parking brake.
– Engage a gear or move the selector lever Warning
to position P. Hands and fingers can be jammed when
– As soon as permitted by the traffic flow, using the vehicle jack. There is a risk of
have all vehicle occupants get out of the injury. Comply with the described hand
vehicle and ensure that they remain out- position and do not change this position
side the immediate area in a safe place, while using the vehicle jack.
such as behind a guardrail.
– Depending on the vehicle equipment, 1. Hold the vehicle jack with one hand, ar-
get wheel change tools and, if necessary, row 1, and grasp the vehicle jack crank
the emergency wheel from the vehicle. or lever with your other hand, arrow 2.
– If necessary, set up a warning triangle
or portable hazard warning light at an
appropriate distance.
– Secure the vehicle additionally against
rolling.
– Loosen the lug bolts a half turn.
Jacking points for the vehicle jack

2. Insert the vehicle jack into the rectan-
gular recess of the jacking point closest
to the wheel to be changed.
The jacking points for the vehicle jack are

located at the marked positions.
265
3. Extend the vehicle jack by turning the ground and the relevant wheel is maxi-
vehicle jack crank or lever clockwise. mum 1.2 inches/3 cm above ground.
Mounting a wheel
Mount one emergency wheel only, as re-
quired.
1. Unscrew the lug bolts.
2. Remove the wheel.
3. Put the new wheel or emergency wheel
on and screw in at least two lug bolts in
4. Take your hand away from the vehicle a crosswise pattern until hand-tight.
jack as soon as the vehicle jack is under If non-original light-alloy wheels of the
load and continue turning the vehicle vehicle manufacturer are mounted, the
jack crank or lever with one hand. accompanying lug bolts may have to be
5. Make sure that the vehicle jack foot used as well.
stands vertically and at a right angle be- 4. Hand-tighten the remaining lug bolts
neath the jacking point. and tighten all lug bolts well in a cross-
wise pattern.
5. Turn the vehicle jack crank counter-
clockwise to retract the vehicle jack and
lower the vehicle.
6. Remove the vehicle jack and stow it se-
curely.
After the wheel change

1. Tighten the lug bolts crosswise. The
6. Make sure that the vehicle jack foot tightening torque is 101 lbs ft/140 Nm.
stands vertically and perpendicularly be- 2. Stow the nonworking wheel in the cargo
neath the jacking point after extending area, if necessary.
the vehicle jack.
The nonworking wheel cannot be stored
under the cargo floor panel because of
its size.
3. Check tire inflation pressure at the next
opportunity and correct as needed.
4. Reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor.
Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor TPM.
5. Check to make sure the lug bolts are
tight with a calibrated torque wrench.
7. Crank the vehicle up, until the vehicle 6. Have the damaged tire replaced at the
jack is with the entire surface on the nearest dealer's service center or an-
266
other qualified service center or repair Removing the emergency wheel

shop.
1. Loosen the nut using the wheel wrench
from the onboard vehicle tool kit.
Emergency wheel
Concept
In the event of a flat tire, the emergency
wheel can be used in place of the wheel
with the defective tire. The emergency
wheel is only intended for temporary use
until the defective tire/wheel has been re-
placed.
2. Remove the retaining plate.
General information 3. Screw wheel lug wrench onto the thread
and hold in place with one hand.
Mount one emergency wheel only.
Also check the tire inflation pressure of the
emergency wheel in the cargo area regu-
larly, and correct it as needed.
Safety information
Warning
The emergency wheel has particular di-
mensions. When driving with an emer- 4. Unlock the locking hexagon of the emer-
gency wheel, changed driving properties gency wheel well using the hexagon at-
may occur, for instance reduced lane sta- tached to retaining plate.
bility when braking, longer braking dis-
tance, and changed self-steering proper-
ties in the limit area. There is a risk of
accident. Drive moderately and do not ex-
ceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
Overview
The emergency wheel is housed in a well on
the underbody of the vehicle. The screw
connection of the emergency wheel is under 5. Lower the emergency wheel with the
the cargo floor panel, on the floor of the wheel wrench.
storage compartment for the onboard vehi- 6. Unscrewing the wheel wrench
cle tool kit.
7. Pull out the well with emergency wheel
The wheel change tools are under the cargo
under the vehicle toward the rear.
floor panel.
267
8. Remove the spacer and emergency

wheel from the well.
9. Stow the well and spacer in the vehicle.
Replacing the tires

1. Have the damaged tire replaced.
2. Replace the emergency wheel with the
new wheel.
Installing the emergency wheel

Have the emergency wheel installed back
into the vehicle by a dealer’s service center
or another qualified service center or repair
shop.
268
Engine compartment MOBILITY
Engine compartment
Overview
1 Filler neck for washer fluid 4 Jump-starting, positive terminal

2 Vehicle identification number 5 Jump-starting, negative terminal
3 Oil filler neck 6 Coolant reservoir
269
MOBILITY Engine compartment
Hood
Warning
Safety information Body parts can be jammed when opening
and closing the hood. There is a risk of in-
jury. Make sure that the area of movement
Warning of the hood is clear during opening and
Improperly executed work in the engine closing.
compartment can damage vehicle compo-
nents and impair vehicle functions. There
is a risk of an accident and damage to NOTICE
property. Have work in the engine com- Folded-away wipers can be jammed when
partment performed by a dealer’s service the hood is opened. There is a risk of dam-
center or another qualified service center age to property. Make sure that the wipers
or repair shop. with the wiper blades mounted are folded
down onto the windshield before opening
the hood.
Warning
The engine compartment accommodates
moving components. Certain components NOTICE
in the engine compartment can also move When the hood is closed, it must engage
with the vehicle switched off, for instance on both sides. Pressing again can damage
the radiator fan. There is a risk of injury. the hood. There is a risk of damage to
Do not reach into the area of moving parts. property. Open the hood again and then
Keep articles of clothing and hair away close it energetically. Avoid pressing
from moving parts. again.
Warning Opening the hood

There are protruding parts, for instance 1. Pull lever, arrow 1.
locking hook, on the inside of the hood. Hood is unlocked.
There is a risk of injury. If the hood is
open, pay attention to protruding parts
and keep clear of these areas.
Warning
An incorrectly locked hood can open while
driving and restrict visibility. There is a
risk of accident. Stop immediately and cor-
rectly close the hood.
2. After the lever is released, pull the lever
again, arrow 2.
Hood can be opened.
270
Engine compartment MOBILITY
Indicator/warning lights
When the hood is opened, a Check Control
message is displayed.
Closing the hood
Energetically close the hood from approx.

20 in/50 cm.
The hood must engage on both sides.
271
MOBILITY Engine oil
Engine oil
Vehicle features and options
NOTICE
This chapter describes all standard, country- Too much engine oil can damage the en-
specific and optional features offered with gine or the catalytic converter. There is a
the series. It also describes features that are risk of damage to property. Do not add too
not necessarily available in your vehicle, for much engine oil. When too much engine
instance, due to the selected options or oil is added, have the engine oil level cor-
country versions. This also applies to safety- rected by a dealer’s service center or an-
related functions and systems. When using other qualified service center or repair
these functions and systems, the applicable shop.
General information Electronic oil measurement
The engine oil consumption is dependent on General information

your driving style and driving conditions. The electronic oil measurement has two
Therefore, regularly check the engine oil measuring principles:
level after refueling by taking a detailed – Monitoring.
measurement. – Detailed measurement.
The engine oil consumption can increase in When making frequent short-distance trips
the following situations, for instance: or using a dynamic driving style, for in-
– Sporty driving style. stance when taking curves aggressively,
– Break-in of the engine. regularly perform a detailed measurement.
– Idling of the engine.
Monitoring
– With use of engine oil types that are
classified as not suitable. Concept
Different Check Control messages appear, The engine oil level is monitored electroni-
depending on the engine oil level. cally while driving and can be shown on the
Control Display.
If the engine oil level is outside its permis-
Safety information sible operating range, a Check Control mes-
sage is displayed.
A red indicator light indicates that
NOTICE
the engine oil pressure is too low.
An engine oil level that is too low causes
engine damage. There is a risk of damage
to property. Immediately add engine oil.
272
Engine oil MOBILITY
Functional requirements – Engine is running and is at operating

A current measured value is available after temperature.
approx. 30 minutes of normal driving.
Performing a detailed measurement
Displaying the engine oil level Via the Central Information Display (CID):
Via the Central Information Display (CID): 1. "My MINI"
1. "My MINI" 2. "Vehicle status"
2. "Vehicle status" 3. "Engine oil level"
3. "Engine oil level" 4. "Measure engine oil level"
The engine oil level is displayed. 5. "Start measurement"
The engine oil level is checked and dis-
System limits played via a scale.
When making frequent short-distance trips
or using a dynamic driving style, it may not
be possible to calculate a measured value. Adding engine oil
In this case, the measured value for the last,
sufficiently long trip is displayed.
General information
Detailed measurement Only add engine oil when the message is
displayed in the instrument cluster. The
Concept quantity to be added is indicated in the
message displayed in the instrument clus-
The engine oil level is checked when the ve- ter.
hicle is stationary and displayed via a scale.
Only add suitable types of engine oil, refer
If the engine oil level is outside its permis- to page 274.
sible operating range, a Check Control mes-
sage is displayed. Safely park the vehicle and switch off the
ignition before adding engine oil.
General information Take care not to add too much engine oil.
During the measurement, the idle speed is
increased somewhat. Safety information
Functional requirements Warning

– Vehicle is parked in a horizontal posi- Operating materials, for instance oils,
tion. greases, coolants, fuels, can contain harm-
– Manual transmission: shift lever in neu- ful ingredients. There is a risk of injuries
tral position, clutch and accelerator ped- or danger to life. Follow the instructions
als not depressed. on the containers. Avoid the contact of ar-
– Steptronic transmission: selector lever ticles of clothing, skin or eyes with operat-
in selector lever position N or P and ac- ing materials. Do not refill operating mate-
celerator pedal not depressed. rials into different bottles. Store operating
materials out of reach of children.
273
MOBILITY Engine oil
Engine oil types to add

NOTICE
An engine oil level that is too low causes General information
engine damage. There is a risk of damage
to property. Immediately add engine oil. The engine oil quality is critical for the life
of the engine.
Only add the types of engine oil which are
NOTICE listed.
Too much engine oil can damage the en-
gine or the catalytic converter. There is a
Safety information
risk of damage to property. Do not add too
much engine oil. When too much engine NOTICE
oil is added, have the engine oil level cor- Oil additives can damage the engine.
rected by a dealer’s service center or an- There is a risk of damage to property. Do
other qualified service center or repair not use oil additives.
shop.
Overview NOTICE
The oil filler neck is located in the engine Incorrect engine oil can cause malfunc-
compartment, refer to page 269. tions in the engine or damage it. There is a
risk of damage to property. When select-
Adding engine oil ing an engine oil, make sure that the en-
gine oil has the correct oil rating.
1. Open the hood, refer to page 270.
2. Open the lid counterclockwise.
Suitable engine oil types
Add engine oils that meet the following oil
rating standards:
Gasoline engine
BMW Longlife-01 FE.
BMW Longlife-14 FE+.
BMW Longlife-17 FE+.
3. Add engine oil.

Alternative engine oil types
4. Close the lid.
If an engine oil suitable for continuous use
is not available, up to 1 US quart/liter of an
engine oil with the following oil rating can
be added:
274
Engine oil MOBILITY
Oil rating
API SL.
API SM.
API SN.
Viscosity grades
When selecting an engine oil, make sure
that the engine oil belongs to one of the fol-
lowing viscosity grades:
Viscosity grades
SAE 0W-20.
SAE 0W-30.
More information about suitable oil ratings

and viscosity grades of engine oils can be
requested from a dealer’s service center or
shop.
Engine oil change
NOTICE
Engine oil that is not changed in timely
fashion can cause increased engine wear
and thus engine damage. There is a risk of
damage to property. Do not exceed the
service data indicated in the vehicle.
The vehicle manufacturer recommends that

you have a dealer's service center or an-
other qualified service center or repair shop
change the engine oil.
275
MOBILITY Coolant
Coolant
Vehicle features and options contact with skin, eyes or articles of cloth-
ing. Use suitable additives only.
the series. It also describes features that are Coolant level
country versions. This also applies to safety- Checking
related functions and systems. When using There are yellow Min and Max marks in the
these functions and systems, the applicable coolant reservoir.
1. Let the engine cool.
General information 3. Turn the lid of the coolant reservoir
slightly counterclockwise to allow any
Coolant consists of water and additives. excess pressure to dissipate, then open
Not all commercially available additives are it.
suitable for the vehicle. Information about
suitable additives is available from a deal-
er’s service center or another qualified serv-
Safety information
Warning 4. Open the coolant reservoir lid.

With the engine hot and the cooling sys-
tem open, coolant can escape and lead to
scalding. There is a risk of injury. Only
open the cooling system with the engine
cooled down.
Warning
Additives are harmful and incorrect addi-
tives can damage the engine. There is a
risk of injury and risk of damage to prop-
erty. Do not allow additives to come into
276
Coolant MOBILITY
5. The coolant level is correct if it lies be- Disposal

tween the minimum and maximum
marks in the filler neck.
Comply with the relevant environ-
mental protection regulations when
disposing of coolant and coolant ad-
ditives.
6. Close the lid.
Adding
1. Let the engine cool.
3. Turn the lid of the coolant reservoir
slightly counterclockwise to allow any
excess pressure to dissipate, then open
it.
4. Open the coolant reservoir lid.

5. If the coolant is low, slowly add coolant
up to the specified level; do not overfill.
6. Close the lid.
7. Have the cause of the coolant loss elimi-
nated as soon as possible.
277
MOBILITY Maintenance
Maintenance
Vehicle features and options General information
Information on service requirements, refer
This chapter describes all standard, country- to page 136, can be displayed on the Control
specific and optional features offered with Display.
not necessarily available in your vehicle, for Service data in the vehicle key
instance, due to the selected options or Information on the required maintenance is
country versions. This also applies to safety- continuously stored in the vehicle key. The
related functions and systems. When using dealer’s service center can read this data
these functions and systems, the applicable out and suggest an optimized maintenance
laws and regulations must be observed. scope for the vehicle.
Therefore, hand the service advisor the ve-
hicle key with which the vehicle was driven
MINI maintenance system most recently.
The maintenance system indicates required Storage periods

maintenance measures, and thereby pro-
Storage periods during which the vehicle
vides support in maintaining road safety
battery was disconnected are not taken into
and the operational reliability of the vehicle.
account.
In some cases, scopes and intervals of the
If this occurs, have a dealer's service center
maintenance system may vary according to
or another qualified service center or repair
the country version. Replacement work,
shop update the time-dependent mainte-
spare parts, fuels and lubricants, and wear
nance procedures, such as checking brake
materials are calculated separately. Further
fluid and, if necessary, changing the engine
information is available from a dealer's serv-
oil and the microfilter/activated-charcoal
ice center or another qualified service cen-
filter.
ter or repair shop.
Condition Based Service CBS Service and Warranty Infor-

mation Booklet for US models
Concept and Warranty and Service
Sensors and special algorithms take into ac- Guide Booklet for Canadian
count the driving conditions of the vehicle. models
CBS uses these to calculate the need for
maintenance.
Please consult your Service and Warranty
The system makes it possible to adapt the Information Booklet for US models and
amount of maintenance corresponding to Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for
your user profile. Canadian models for additional information
on service requirements.
278
Maintenance MOBILITY
The manufacturer of your vehicle recom- Position

mends that maintenance and repair be per-
formed by a service center or another quali-
fied service center or repair shop. Records
of regular maintenance and repair work
should be retained.
Socket for OBD Onboard Diag-

nosis
There is an OBD socket on the driver's side
General information for checking the primary components in the
Devices connected to the OBD socket trig- vehicle's emissions.
ger the alarm system when the vehicle is
locked. Remove any devices connected at Emissions
the OBD socket before locking the vehicle.
– The warning light lights up:
Safety information Emissions are deteriorating.
Have the vehicle checked as soon
as possible.
NOTICE
– The warning light flashes under certain
The socket for Onboard Diagnosis is an in-
circumstances:
tricate component intended to be used in
conjunction with specialized equipment to This indicates that there is excessive
check the vehicle’s primary emissions sys- misfiring in the engine.
tem. Improper use of the socket for On- Reduce the vehicle speed and have the
board Diagnosis, or contact with the system checked immediately; otherwise,
socket for Onboard Diagnosis for other serious engine misfiring within a brief
than its intended purpose, can cause vehi- period can seriously damage emission
cle malfunctions and creates risks of per- control components, in particular the
sonal and property damage. Given the fore- catalytic converter.
going, the manufacture of your vehicle
strongly recommends that access to the
socket for Onboard Diagnosis be limited to
a dealer's service center or another quali-
fied service center or repair shop or other
persons that have the specialized training
and equipment for purposes of properly
utilizing the socket for Onboard Diagnosis.
279
MOBILITY Replacing components
Replacing components
Vehicle features and options Wiper blades
This chapter describes all standard, country- Safety information
not necessarily available in your vehicle, for NOTICE
instance, due to the selected options or The window may sustain damage if the
country versions. This also applies to safety- wiper falls onto it without the wiper blade
related functions and systems. When using installed. There is a risk of damage to
these functions and systems, the applicable property. Hold the wiper firmly when
laws and regulations must be observed. changing the wiper blade. Do not fold or
switch on the wiper without a wiper blade
installed.
Vehicle tool kit
NOTICE
Folded-away wipers can be jammed when
the hood is opened. There is a risk of dam-
age to property. Make sure that the wipers
with the wiper blades mounted are folded
down onto the windshield before opening
the hood.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the Replacing the front wiper blades
onboard vehicle tool kit is located on the 1. To change the wiper blades, fold up the
right side under the cargo floor panel or in a wiper arms.
bag on the right side of the cargo area. 2. Fold up and hold the wiper arm firmly.
After use, secure the bag with the onboard 3. Open the wiper blade lock, arrow.
vehicle tool kit on a lashing eye again.
280
Replacing components MOBILITY
4. Pull the wiper blade down out of the Light and bulb replacement
holder on the wiper arm, arrow 1.
General information
Lights and bulbs
Lights and bulbs make an essential contri-
bution to vehicle safety.
The manufacturer of the vehicle recom-
mends that you have appropriate work per-
formed by a dealer’s service center or an-
5. Pull the wiper blade free from the holder if you are unfamiliar with it or if it has not
of the wiper arm, arrow 2. been described here.
6. Insert and latch a new wiper blade in re- A spare light box is available from a dealer's
verse order. service center or another qualified service
7. Fold down the wiper arm. center or repair shop.
Follow the safety information, refer to
Replacing the rear wiper blade page 281.
1. Fold up and hold the wiper arm firmly.
Light-emitting diodes (LEDs)
2. Turn the wiper blade all the way back.
Some items of equipment use light-emitting
diodes installed behind a cover as a light
source. These light-emitting diodes are re-
lated to conventional lasers and are offi-
cially designated as Class 1 light-emitting
diodes.
Follow the safety information, refer to
page 281.
Safety information
3. Push the wiper blade out of the fasten-
ing by continuing to turn it all the way. Lights and bulbs
4. Insert the new wiper blade by following
the steps in reverse order. The wiper Warning
blade must engage audibly.
Bulbs can get hot during operation. Con-
5. Fold down the wiper arm. tact with the bulbs can cause burns. There
is a risk of injury. Only change bulbs after
they have cooled off.
281
checked and, if necessary, corrected by a

Warning dealer’s service center or another qualified
Work on switched-on lighting systems can service center or repair shop.
cause short circuits. There is a risk of in-
jury or risk of damage to property. When Front halogen lights, bulb
working on the lighting system, switch off replacement
the lights in question. If necessary, heed
the bulb manufacturer's instructions. Overview
Halogen headlights
NOTICE
Dirty bulbs have a reduced service life.
not hold new bulbs with your bare hands.
Use a clean cloth or something similar, or
hold the bulb by its base.
Light-emitting diodes (LEDs)

1 Low beams/high beams
Warning 2 Turn signal
Intensive brightness can irritate or dam-
age the retina of the eye. There is a risk of
injury. Do not look directly into the head- Low beams/high beams
lights or other light sources. Do not re- Follow the general instructions on lights
move the LED covers. and bulbs, refer to page 281.
55-watt bulb, HB2.
Headlight glass 1. Open the hood, refer to page 270.
Condensation can form on the inside of the 2. Turn the lid counterclockwise, arrow,
headlight glass in cool or humid weather. and remove.
When driving with the lights switched on,
the condensation evaporates after a short
time. The headlight glass does not need to
be changed.
If despite driving with the headlights
switched on, increasing humidity forms, for
instance water droplets in the light, have
the headlights checked.
Headlight setting 3. Pull off the connector.

The headlight adjustments can be affected
by changing lights and bulbs. After the
headlight adjustment was changed, have it
282
4. Unclip spring clip, arrow, and fold down. 3. Unscrew the inner cover counterclock-
wise, and remove it.
5. Remove the bulb from the headlight

housing. 4. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise
6. Insert the new bulb and install the cover and remove it from the bulb housing.
in the reverse order.
Turn signal
Follow the general instructions on lights
and bulbs, refer to page 281.
21-watt bulb, PY21W.
1. Turn the steering wheel.
2. Turn the lid counterclockwise, arrow 1,
and remove. 5. Pull the bulb out of the fixture.
6. Insert the new bulb and install the cover
in the reverse order.
LED front lights, bulb replacement

All lights feature LED technology.
In the case of a malfunction, contact a deal-
er's service center or another qualified serv-
LED front fog lights

These front fog lights are made using LED
technology. In the case of a malfunction,
contact a dealer's service center or another
283
Tail lights, bulb replacement Side tail lights
Overview
Vehicles with a rear fog light
1 Tail lights
2 Turn signal
3 Brake light
1 Side tail lights 4 Reversing lights
2 Rear fog light
Side tail lights with Union Jack
3 License plate light
4 Center brake light
Vehicle with two rear fog lights
1 Tail lights
2 Turn signals/brake lights
3 Turn signals/brake lights
4 Reversing lights
1 Side tail lights
2 Rear fog lights
3 License plate light
Side tail lights
4 Center brake light Without Union Jack
– Bulb, brake lights: H21W.
– Bulb, turn signals: P21W.
284
– Bulb, reversing lights: P21W. – Arrow 3: reversing light

1. Open the tailgate.
2. Remove left or right cover.
6. Proceed in the reverse order to insert

the new bulb and attach the bulb holder.
Make sure that the bulb holder engages
3. Through the opening, loosen the plug in all fasteners.
connector, arrow 2 on the bulb holder.
Press the latches together, arrows 1, and With Union Jack
remove the bulb holder. Follow the general instructions on lights
Bulb, reversing lights: P21W.
1. Open the tailgate.
2. Remove left or right cover.
4. Remove the bulb holder from the open-

ing.
5. Press the nonworking bulb gently into
the socket, turn counterclockwise and
remove.
– Arrow 1: brake lights 3. Turn the bulb holder for the reversing
– Arrow 2: turn signal light, arrow, counterclockwise and re-
move it.
285
4. Remove the bulb holder from the open- – With white lens: WY5W.
ing. 1. Open the hood. The covers of the side
5. Press the nonworking bulb gently into turn signal lights are on the left and
the socket, turn counterclockwise and right next to the hinges of the hood.
remove.
2. Loosen nuts of the cover by hand and re-

6. Proceed in the reverse order to insert move the cover.
the new bulb and attach the bulb holder.
Make sure that the bulb holder engages
in all fasteners.
Central brake light and license plate

lights
The lights feature LED technology. In the
case of a malfunction, contact a dealer's 3. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise
service center or another qualified service and remove.
Side turn signal, bulb replacement

Bulbs:
4. Replace the bulb.

5. To insert the new bulb, proceed in re-
verse order of removal. Insert the nuts
of the cover and press down.
286
Side scuttles other qualified service center or repair shop

register the vehicle battery to the vehicle
after the battery has been replaced. Once
the battery has been registered again, all
comfort features will be available without
restriction and any Check Control messages
displayed which relate to comfort features
will disappear.
Charging the battery

Individual side scuttles for clicking into the General information
side turn signals are available as original
Make sure that the battery is always suffi-
MINI accessories.
ciently charged to guarantee that the bat-
Follow the assembly instructions. tery remains usable for its full service life.
A discharged battery is indicated by
a red indicator light.
Vehicle battery
Charge the battery in the following situa-
tions:
General information
– When the inspection glass on the top of
The battery is maintenance-free.
the battery is black.
More information about the battery can be
– When the take-off performance is insuf-
requested from a dealer's service center or
ficient.
shop. The following circumstances can have a
negative effect on the performance of the
Safety information battery:
– Frequent short-distance drives.
Warning – The vehicle is not used for more than a
month.
Vehicle batteries that are not compatible
can damage vehicle systems and impair Safety information
vehicle functions. There is a risk of an ac-
cident and damage to property. Only vehi-
cle batteries that are compatible with your NOTICE
vehicle type should be installed in your ve- Battery chargers for the vehicle battery
hicle. Information on compatible vehicle can work with high voltages and currents,
batteries is available at your dealer’s serv- which means that the 12 volt on-board
ice center. network can be overloaded or damaged.
There is a risk of damage to property. Only
connect battery chargers for the vehicle
Register the battery to the vehicle battery to the starting aid terminals in the
The manufacturer of the vehicle recom- engine compartment.
mends that you have a service center or an-
287
Charging the battery Accessing the fuses

Charge the battery only when the engine is The fuses are located in the glove compart-
off and via the starting aid terminals, refer ment.
to page 292, in the engine compartment.
1. Open the glove compartment.
Power failure 2. Swing the cover down, arrow.
After a power loss, some equipment needs
to be newly initialized or individual settings
updated, for example:
– Memory function: store the positions
again.
– Time: update.
– Date: update.
– Glass sunroof: initialize the system.
Information on the fuse types and locations,
Disposing of old batteries as well as the positions of any other fuse
Have old batteries disposed of by a boxes, is available on the Internet:
dealer’s service center or another www.mini.com/fusecard.
qualified service center or repair Where applicable, information on the fuse
shop or take them to a collection point. types and locations is also found on a sepa-
Maintain the filled battery in an upright po- rate sheet in the fuse box.
sition for transport and storage. Secure the
battery so that it does not tip over during Replacing fuses
transport. The vehicle manufacturer recommends that
you have a dealer's service center or an-
Fuses replace the fuses.
Safety information
Warning
Incorrect and repaired fuses can overload
electrical lines and components. There is a
risk of fire. Never attempt to repair a
blown fuse. Do not replace a nonworking
fuse with a substitute of another color or
amperage rating.
288
Breakdown assistance MOBILITY
Breakdown assistance
Vehicle features and options Warning triangle
The warning triangle is located in the tail-
gate. To remove, loosen the brackets.
Hazard warning flashers
First-aid kit
General information
Some of the articles have a limited service
life.
Check the expiration dates of the contents
regularly and replace any expired items
promptly.
The button is located above the Control Dis-
play. Storage
The red light in the button flashes when the The first-aid kit is located in the cargo area.
hazard warning flashers are activated.
MINI Roadside Assistance

Concept
MINI Roadside Assistance can be contacted
if assistance is needed in the event of a
breakdown.
289
MOBILITY Breakdown assistance
General information You can launch Teleservice Help by re-

In the event of a breakdown, data on the ve- questing it through the Service Specialist.
hicle's condition is sent to the vehicle man- 1. Park the vehicle in a safe place.
ufacturer.
2. Set the parking brake.
There are various ways of making contact.
3. Control Display is switched on.
– Via a Check Control message, refer to
page 130. 4. "Teleservice Help"
– Calling with a mobile phone. The driving ability of the vehicle can be re-
stored for specific functions.
Requirements If this is not possible, further measures will
be initiated, for instance Roadside Assis-
– Active MINI Connected contract or
tance will be informed.
equipment version with intelligent
emergency call.
– Cellular network reception. Emergency Request
– The ignition is switched on.
Starting Intelligent emergency call

If the vehicle is equipped with Teleservices, Concept
support is offered through Teleservice Diag-
nosis. In case of an emergency, an Emergency Re-
quest can be triggered automatically by the
Via the Central Information Display (CID): system or manually.
1. "MINI Connected"
General information
2. "MINI Assist"
Only press the SOS button in an emergency.
3. "MINI Roadside Assistance"
The Intelligent Assist system establishes a
The contact to the Roadside Assistance connection with the MINI Response Center.
of the manufacture is established.
For technical reasons, the Emergency Re-
A telephone number is displayed, if quest cannot be guaranteed under unfavora-
needed. Select to dial the telephone ble conditions.
number on a connected mobile phone.
Teleservice Diagnosis
Teleservice Diagnosis enables the wireless
transmission of detailed vehicle data that is
important for vehicle diagnosis. This data is
transmitted automatically.
Teleservice Help
Depending on the country, the Teleservice
Help enables a more in-depth diagnosis of
the vehicle via wireless transmission.
290
Overview The MINI Response Center then makes

contact with you and takes further steps
to help you.
Even if you are unable to respond, the
MINI Response Center can take further
steps to help you under certain circum-
stances.
For this, data is transmitted to the MINI
Response Center which serve to deter-
mine the necessary rescue measures.
For instance, the current position of the
SOS button in the roofliner
vehicle, if it can be established.
If you can no longer hear the MINI Re-
Functional requirements sponse Center through the loudspeakers,
– The ignition is switched on. the hands-free system, for instance, may
– The Assist system is functional. be broken. However, the MINI Response
Center may still be able to hear you.
– If the vehicle is equipped with intelli-
gent emergency call: the SIM card The MINI Response Center ends the Emer-
integrated in the vehicle has been acti- gency Request.
vated.
Automatic triggering Jump-starting

Under certain conditions, for instance if the
airbags trigger, an Emergency Request is General information
automatically initiated immediately after an If the battery is discharged, the engine can
accident of corresponding severity. Auto- be started using the battery of another vehi-
matic Collision Notification is not affected cle and two jumper cables. Only use jumper
by pressing the SOS button. cables with fully insulated clamp handles.
Manual triggering Safety information
1. Press the cover briefly to open it.
2. Press the SOS button until the LED at DANGER
the button lights up green.
Contact with live components can lead to
– The LED is illuminated green when an an electric shock. There is a risk of inju-
Emergency Request has been initiated. ries or danger to life. Do not touch any
If the situation allows, wait in your vehi- components that are under voltage.
cle until the voice connection has been
established.
– The LED flashes green when a connec-
tion to the MINI Response Center has
been established.
291
Warning
If the jumper cables are connected in the
incorrect order, sparking may occur. There
is a risk of injury. Pay attention to the cor-
rect order during connection.
NOTICE
The body ground or a special nut acts as the
In the case of body contact between the
battery negative terminal.
two vehicles, a short circuit can occur dur-
ing jump-starting. There is a risk of dam-
age to property. Make sure that no body Connecting the cables
contact occurs. To prevent personal injury or damage to
both vehicles, adhere strictly to the follow-
ing procedure.
Preparation
1. Check whether the battery of the other 1. Pull off the lid of the starting aid termi-
vehicle has a voltage of 12 volts. The nal.
voltage information can be found on the 2. Attach one terminal clamp of the posi-
battery. tive jumper cable to the positive termi-
2. Switch off the engine of the assisting nal of the battery, or to the correspond-
vehicle. ing starting aid terminal of the vehicle
providing assistance.
3. Switch off any electronic systems/power
consumers in both vehicles. 3. Attach the terminal clamp on the other
end of the cable to the positive terminal
Starting aid terminals of the battery, or to the corresponding
starting aid terminal of the vehicle to be
started.
4. Attach one terminal clamp of the nega-
tive jumper cable to the negative termi-
nal of the battery, or to the correspond-
ing engine or body ground of assisting
vehicle.
5. Attach the second terminal clamp to the
negative terminal of the battery, or to
the corresponding engine or body
The starting aid terminal in the engine com- ground of the vehicle to be started.
partment acts as the battery's positive ter-
minal.
Open the cover of the starting aid terminal.
292
Starting the engine Safety information

Never use spray fluids to start the engine.
1. Start the engine of the assisting vehicle NOTICE
and let it run for several minutes at an The vehicle can be damaged when towing
increased idle speed. the vehicle with a lifted rear axle. There is
a risk of damage to property. Have vehicle
2. Start the engine of the vehicle that is to
transported only with lifted front axle or
be started in the usual way.
on a loading platform.
If the first starting attempt is not suc-
cessful, wait a few minutes before mak-
ing another attempt in order to allow the Pushing the vehicle
discharged battery to recharge. To remove a broken-down vehicle from the
3. Let both engines run for several mi- danger area, it can be pushed for a short
nutes. distance.
4. Disconnect the jumper cables in the re- For rolling or pushing the vehicle, refer to
verse order. page 124.
Check the battery and recharge, if needed.
Tow truck
Tow-starting and towing

Safety information
Warning
Due to system limits, individual functions
can malfunction during tow-starting/
towing with the Intelligent Safety systems Your vehicle should be transported with a
activated. There is a risk of accident. tow truck with a so-called lift bar or on a
Switch all Intelligent Safety systems off flat bed.
NOTICE
Steptronic transmission with The vehicle can become damaged when
driven front axle: transporting the lifting and securing it.
vehicle There is a risk of damage to property.
– Lift the vehicle using suitable means.
General information
– Do not lift or secure the vehicle by its
The vehicle must not be towed if the front tow fitting, body parts, or suspension
wheels are touching the ground. parts.
293
Manual transmission Tow truck
Towing or pushing the vehicle With driven front axle

A broken-down vehicle can be towed or
pushed.
For rolling or pushing the vehicle, refer to
page 121.
NOTICE
If manual unlocking of the parking brake
is not possible, the vehicle cannot be
moved or towed. There is a risk of damage Your vehicle should be transported with a
to property. The vehicle should only be tow truck with a so-called lift bar or on a
transported on a loading platform. flat bed.
Follow the following instructions:
– Make sure that the ignition is switched NOTICE
on; otherwise, the low beams, tail lights, The vehicle can become damaged when
turn signals, and wipers may be unavail- lifting and securing it.
able. There is a risk of damage to property.
– Do not tow the vehicle with the rear – Lift the vehicle using suitable means.
axle tilted, as the front wheels could
– Do not lift or secure the vehicle by its
turn.
tow fitting, body parts, or suspension
– When the engine is stopped, there is no parts.
power assist. Consequently, more force
needs to be applied when braking and
steering. Towing other vehicles
– Larger steering wheel movements are
required. General information
– The towing vehicle must not be lighter Switch on the hazard warning system, de-
than the vehicle being towed; otherwise, pending on local regulations.
it will not be possible to control the ve- If the electrical system has failed, clearly
hicle's response. identify the vehicle being towed by placing
– Do not exceed a towing speed of a sign or a warning triangle in the rear win-
30 mph/50 km/h. dow.
– Do not exceed a towing distance of
30 miles/50 km.
294
Safety information Tow fitting
Warning General information

If the approved gross vehicle weight of the
towing vehicle is lighter than the vehicle
to be towed, the tow fitting can tear off or
it will not be possible to control the vehi-
cle's response. There is a risk of accident.
Make sure that the gross vehicle weight of
the towing vehicle is heavier than the ve-
hicle to be towed.
The screw-in tow fitting should always be

NOTICE carried in the vehicle.
If the tow bar or tow rope is attached in- The tow fitting can be screwed in at the
correctly, damage to other vehicle parts front or rear of the vehicle.
can occur. There is a risk of damage to The tow fitting and the onboard vehicle tool
property. Correctly attach the tow bar or kit, refer to page 280, are together in the
tow rope to the tow fitting. cargo area.
Use of the tow fitting:
Tow bar – Use only the tow fitting provided with
The tow fittings used should be on the same the vehicle and screw it all the way in.
side on both vehicles. – Use the tow fitting for towing on paved
Should it prove impossible to avoid mount- roads only.
ing the tow bar at an offset angle, please fol- – Avoid lateral loading of the tow fitting,
low the following: for instance do not lift the vehicle by the
– Maneuvering capability is limited going tow fitting.
around corners.
– The tow bar will generate lateral forces Safety information
if it is secured with an offset.
NOTICE
Tow rope
If the tow fitting is not used as intended,
When starting to tow the vehicle, make there may be damage to the vehicle or to
sure that the tow rope is taut. the tow fitting. There is a risk of damage
Use nylon ropes or straps, which will enable to property. Follow the notes on using the
the vehicle to be towed without jerking. tow fitting.
295
Screw thread for tow fitting the pedal. After the engine starts, imme-
diately press on the clutch pedal again.
5. Stop at a suitable location, remove the
tow bar or rope, and switch off the haz-
ard warning system.
6. Have the vehicle checked by a dealer's
service center or another qualified serv-
Threaded holes for the tow fitting are lo-

cated in the front and rear of the vehicle on
the right side with respect to the direction
of travel.
Press on the mark on the edge of the cover
to push it out.
Tow-starting
Steptronic transmission
Do not tow-start the vehicle.
Tow-starting the engine is not possible due
to the Steptronic transmission.
Have the reasons for the starting difficulties
corrected by a dealer’s service center or an-
shop.
Manual transmission
If possible, do not tow-start the vehicle but
start the engine by jump-starting, refer to
page 291. If the vehicle is equipped with a
catalytic converter, only tow-start while the
engine is cold.
1. Switch on the hazard warning system
and comply with local regulations.
2. Switch on the ignition, refer to
page 105.
3. Engage third gear.
4. Have the vehicle tow-started with the
clutch pedal pressed and slowly release
296
Care MOBILITY
Care
Vehicle features and options Distances and temperature
– Maximum temperature: 140 ℉/60 ℃.
This chapter describes all standard, country- – Minimum distance from sensors, cam-
specific and optional features offered with eras, seals: 12 inches/30 cm.
the series. It also describes features that are – Minimum distance from glass sunroof:
not necessarily available in your vehicle, for 31.5 in/80 cm.
country versions. This also applies to safety- Automatic vehicle washes
Safety information
NOTICE
Washing the vehicle Water can penetrate in the windshield
area due to high-pressure washers. There
General information is a risk of damage to property. Avoid
high-pressure washers.
Regularly remove foreign objects such as
leaves in the area below the windshield
when the hood is raised.
NOTICE
Wash your vehicle frequently, particularly
in winter. Intense soiling and road salt can Improper use of automatic vehicle washes
damage the vehicle. can cause damage to the vehicle. There is
a risk of damage to property. Follow the
Steam jets or high-pressure following instructions:
washers – Give preference to cloth vehicle
washes or those that use soft brushes
Safety information in order to avoid paint damage.
– Avoid vehicle washes with guide rails
higher than 4 in/10 cm to avoid dam-
NOTICE age to the chassis.
When cleaning with high-pressure wash- – Observe the tire width of the guide
ers, components can be damaged due to rail to avoid damage to tires and rims.
the pressure or temperatures being too
– Fold in exterior mirrors to avoid dam-
high. There is a risk of damage to property.
age to the exterior mirrors.
Maintain sufficient distance and do not
spray too long continuously. Follow the – Unscrew the rod antenna to avoid the
operating instructions for the high-pres- rod antenna breaking off.
sure washer. – Deactivate the wiper and, if neces-
sary, rain sensor to avoid damage to
the wiper system.
297
MOBILITY Care
Driving into a vehicle wash with a Vehicle care

manual transmission
In vehicle washes, the vehicle must be able Vehicle care products
to roll freely.
Rolling or pushing the vehicle, refer to General information
page 121. MINI recommends using vehicle care and
cleaning products from MINI. Suitable care
Driving into a vehicle wash with a products are available from a dealer’s serv-
Steptronic transmission ice center or another qualified service cen-
In vehicle washes, the vehicle must be able ter or repair shop.
to roll freely.
Rolling or pushing the vehicle, refer to Safety information
page 124.
Some vehicle washes do not permit persons Warning
in the vehicle. The vehicle cannot be locked Cleansers can contain substances that are
from the outside when in selector lever po- dangerous and harmful to your health.
sition N. A signal is sounded when an at- There is a risk of injury. When cleaning
tempt is made to lock the vehicle. the interior, open the doors or windows.
Only use products intended for cleaning
Driving out of a vehicle wash vehicles. Follow the instructions on the
Ensure that the vehicle key is in the car. container.
Start the engine, refer to page 106.
Headlights Vehicle paint

Do not rub wet headlights dry and do not General information
use abrasive or acidic cleaning agents.
Regular care contributes to driving safety
Soak areas that have been dirtied, for in- and value retention. Environmental influen-
stance from insects, with shampoo and ces in areas with elevated air pollution or
wash off with water. natural contaminants, such as tree resin or
Thaw ice with de-icing spray; do not use an pollen can affect the vehicle's paintwork.
ice scraper. Tailor the frequency and extent of your ve-
hicle care to these influences.
After washing the vehicle Aggressive substances such as spilled fuel,
After washing the vehicle, apply the brakes oil, grease or bird droppings, must be re-
briefly to dry them; otherwise, braking ac- moved immediately to prevent the finish
tion can be reduced. The heat generated from being altered or discolored.
during braking dries brake discs and brake
pads and protects them against corrosion. Matte finish
Completely remove all residues on the win- Only use cleaning and care products suita-
dows, to minimize loss of visibility due to ble for vehicles with matte finish.
smearing and to reduce wiper noises and
wiper blade wear.
298
Care MOBILITY
Leather care Caring for special components

Remove dust from the leather regularly, us-
ing a cloth or vacuum cleaner. Light-alloy wheels
Otherwise, particles of dust and road grime When cleaning the vehicle, use only neutral
chafe in pores and folds, and lead to in- wheel cleaners having a pH value from 5 to
creased wear and premature degradation of 9. Do not use abrasive cleaning agents or
the leather surface. steam jets above 140 ℉/60 ℃. Follow the
manufacturer's instructions.
To guard against discoloration, such as from
clothing, clean leather and provide leather Aggressive, acidic or alkaline cleaning
care roughly every two months. agents can destroy the protective layer of
adjacent components, such as the brake
Clean light-colored leather more frequently
disc.
because soiling on such surfaces is substan-
tially more visible. After cleaning, apply the brakes briefly to
dry them. The heat generated during brak-
Use leather care products; otherwise, dirt
ing dries brake discs and brake pads and
and grease will gradually break down the
protects them against corrosion.
protective layer of the leather surface.
Chrome surfaces
Upholstery material care
Carefully clean components such as the ra-
General information diator grille or door handles with plenty of
water, possibly with shampoo added, partic-
Vacuum the upholstery regularly with a ularly when they have been exposed to road
vacuum cleaner. salt.
If upholstery is very dirty, for instance with
beverage stains, use a soft sponge or micro- Rubber components
fiber cloth with a suitable interior cleaner. Environmental influences can cause surface
Clean the upholstery down to the seams us- soiling of rubber parts and a loss of gloss.
ing large sweeping motions. Avoid rubbing Use only water and suitable cleaning agents
the material vigorously. for cleaning.
Treat especially worn rubber parts with rub-
Safety information ber care agents at regular intervals. When
cleaning rubber seals, do not use any sili-
NOTICE con-containing vehicle care products in or-
Open Velcro® fasteners on articles of der to avoid damage or noises.
clothing can damage the seat covers.
There is a risk of damage to property. En- Fine wood parts
sure that any Velcro® fasteners are closed. Clean fine wood facing and fine wood com-
ponents only with a moist rag. Then dry
with a soft cloth.
299
MOBILITY Care
Plastic components to the floor. Do not use loose floor mats

and do not layer several floor mats. Make
sure that there is sufficient clearance for
NOTICE the pedals. Ensure that the floor mats are
Cleansers that contain alcohol or solvents, securely fastened again after they were re-
such as lacquer thinners, heavy-duty moved, for instance for cleaning.
grease removers, fuel, or such, can damage
plastic parts. There is a risk of damage to Floor mats can be removed from the car's
property. Clean with a microfiber cloth. interior for cleaning.
Dampen the cloth lightly with water, if If the floor carpets are very dirty, clean with
needed. a microfiber cloth and water or a textile
cleaner. To prevent matting of the carpet,
Clean with a microfiber cloth. rub back and forth in the direction of travel
Dampen the cloth lightly with water, if only.
needed.
Do not soak the roofliner. Sensor/camera lenses
To clean sensors and camera lenses, use a
Safety belts cloth moistened with a small amount of
glass detergent.
Warning
Displays/Screens/Projection lenses
Chemical cleansers can destroy the safety
belt webbing. Missing protective effect of
the safety belts. There is a risk of injuries NOTICE
or danger to life. Use only a mild soapy sol- Chemical cleansers, moisture or fluids of
ution for cleaning the safety belts. any kind can damage the surface of dis-
plays and screens. There is a risk of dam-
Dirty belt straps impede the reeling action age to property. Clean with a clean, anti-
and thus have a negative impact on safety. static microfiber cloth.
Use only a mild soapy solution, with the
safety belts clipped into their buckles.
Safety belts should only be allowed to re- NOTICE
tract if they are dry. The surface of displays can be damaged
with improper cleaning. There is a risk of
Carpets and floor mats damage to property. Avoid pressure that is
too high and do not use any scratching
Warning materials.
Objects in the driver's floor area can limit Clean with a clean, antistatic microfiber
the pedal distance or block a depressed cloth.
pedal. There is a risk of accident. Stow ob-
jects in the vehicle such that they are se- For stubborn soiling on the projection lens
cured and cannot enter into the driver's of the Head-up Display, dampen the micro-
floor area. Use floor mats that are suitable fiber cloth with alcohol. Projection lens, re-
for the vehicle and can be safely attached fer to page 144.
300
Care MOBILITY
Long-term vehicle storage

When the vehicle is shut down for longer
than three months, special measures must
be taken. Further information is available
from a dealer's service center or another
301
302
REFERENCE
Technical data ......................................................................................... 304
Appendix .................................................................................................. 308
Everything from A to Z ........................................................................ 310
303
REFERENCE Technical data
Technical data
General information
The technical data and specifications in the values can be found in the approval docu-
Owner's Manual are used as guidance val- ments, on labels on the vehicle or can be ob-
ues. The vehicle-specific data can deviate tained from a dealer’s service center or an-
from this, for instance due to the selected other qualified service center or repair
special equipment, country version or coun- shop.
try-specific measurement method. Detailed
Dimensions
The dimensions can vary depending on the tenna, roof racks or spoiler. The heights can
model version, equipment or country-spe- deviate, for instance due to the selected
cific measurement method. special equipment, tires, load and chassis
The specified heights do not take into ac- version.
count attached parts, for instance a roof an-
MINI 3-door
Width with mirrors in/mm 76.1/1,932
Width without mirrors in/mm 68/1,727
Height in/mm 55.7/1,414
Length in/mm 151.1-152.5/3,837-3,874
Wheelbase in/mm 98.2/2,495
Smallest turning radius diam. ft/m 35.4/10.8
304
Technical data REFERENCE
MINI 5-door
Width with mirrors in/mm 76.1/1,932
Width without mirrors in/mm 68/1,727
Height in/mm 56.1/1,425
Length in/mm 157.4-158/3,998-4,013
Wheelbase in/mm 101.1/2,567
Smallest turning radius diam. ft/m 36.1/11.0
Weights
MINI Cooper, 3-door

Approved gross vehicle weight
Manual transmission lbs/kg 3,627/1,645
Steptronic transmission lbs/kg 3,627/1,645
Load
Manual transmission lbs/kg 818/371
Steptronic transmission lbs/kg 763/346
Approved front axle load
Manual transmission lbs/kg 1,962/890
Steptronic transmission lbs/kg 2,028/920
Approved rear axle load
MINI Cooper, 5-door

Load
305
REFERENCE Technical data
MINI Cooper, 5-door

MINI Cooper S, 3-door

Load

Load
306
Technical data REFERENCE

MINI John Cooper Works, 3-door

Load
Capacities
MINI
Fuel tank, approx. US gal/liters 11.6/44.0
Observe further information on fuel quality,

refer to page 244.
307
REFERENCE Appendix
Appendix
Any updates to the Owner's Manual of the
vehicle are listed here.
Updates made after the edito-

rial deadline
The following chapters were updated in the
printed version of the Owner's Manual after
the editorial deadline for the Integrated
Owner's Manual in the vehicle had closed:
– Replacing components: Light and bulb
replacement: Front halogen lights, bulb
replacement.
308
Appendix REFERENCE
309
REFERENCE Everything from A to Z
Everything from A to Z
Index
A Approach control warning with city light
braking function 166
A/C button, see Air conditioning 204 Approved axle load 305
ABS, Antilock Brake System 175 Apps, see Owner's Handbook for Naviga-
Acceleration Assistant, see Launch Con- tion, Entertainment, Communication 8
trol 128 Arrival time 141
Accessories and parts 10 Ash tray 213
ACC, see Camera-based cruise control 180 Assistance when driving off 178
Activated-charcoal filter 206 AUTO intensity 205
Activation times, parked-car ventila- Automatic climate control 203
tion 207 Automatic Curb Monitor 97
Active Cruise Control, see Camera-based Automatic deactivation, front-seat passen-
cruise control 180 ger airbags 156
Active Guard, see Intelligent Safety 165 Automatic headlight control 149
Adaptive brake lights, see Brake force dis- Automatic locking 82
play 173 Automatic transmission with Step-
Adaptive chassis 177 tronic 121
Additives, engine oil types 274 Automatic unlocking 82
Adjustments, steering wheel 98 Automatic vehicle wash 297
After washing vehicle 298 AUTO program, automatic climate con-
Airbags 154 trol 204
Airbags, indicator and warning light 156 AUTO program, intensity 205
Air circulation, see Recirculated-air Auto Start/Stop function 108
mode 201, 205 Auto washing 297
Air conditioner 200 Average consumption 140
Air conditioning 201, 204 Average speed 141
Air distribution, manual 202, 205 Axle loads, weights 305
Air flow, air conditioner 202
Air flow, automatic climate control 205 B
Air pressure, tires 246
Air vents, see Ventilation 206 Backrest curvature, see Lumbar support 91
Alarm system 83 Backrest, seats 90
Alarm triggering 83 Band-aids, see First-aid kit 289
Alarm, unintentional 84 Battery, disposing of 288
All-season tires, see Winter tires 256 Battery, vehicle 287
Amazon Alexa Car Integration 51 Being towed, see Tow-starting and tow-
Antifreeze, washer fluid 119 ing 293
Antilock Brake System, ABS 175 Belts, safety belts 92
Anti-slip control, see DSC 175 Beverage holder, cup holder 218
Anti-theft protection, lug bolts 264 Blocking, power window 86
310
Everything from A to Z REFERENCE
Bluetooth connection 58 Cargo straps 221

Bonus range, GREEN Mode 236 Carpet, care 300
Bottle holder, see Cup holder 218 Catalytic converter, see Hot exhaust gas
Brake assistant 175 system 229
Brake discs, break-in 228 CBS Condition Based Service 278
Brake force display 173 Center armrest 217
Brake lights, brake force display 173 Center console 40
Brake pads, break-in 228 Central Information Display (CID) 42
Braking, information 230 Central instrument cluster, LED ring 143
Breakdown assistance 289 Central locking system, unlocking, from in-
Break-in 228 side 75
Break recommendation, see Fatigue Central screen, see Control Display 44
alert 173 Changes, technical, see For Your Own
Brightness of Control Display 55 Safety 10
Bulb replacement 281 Changing parts 280
Bulb replacement, front 282, 283 Changing wheels 262
Bulb replacement, rear 284 Changing wheels/tires 255
Bulb replacement, side 286 Chassis number, see Vehicle identification
Bulbs and lights 281 number 15
Button, SOS 290 Check Control 130
Button, Start/Stop 105 Checking the oil level electronically 272
Bypassing, see Jump-starting 291 Children, seating position 100
Children, transporting safely 100
C Child restraint system 100
Child restraint system LATCH 102
Calendar, see Owner's Handbook for Naviga- Child restraint systems, mounting 101
tion, Entertainment, Communication 8 Child safety locks 104
California Proposition 65 Warning 11 Child seat, mounting 101
Camera-based assistance systems, see Intel- Child seats 100
ligent Safety 165 Chrome parts, care 299
Camera-based cruise control 180 Cigarette lighter 213
Camera lenses, care 300 Cleaning, displays 300
Camera, rearview camera 192 Climate control 200, 203
Can holder, see Cup holder 218 Clothes hooks 218
Care, displays 300 Coasting 237
Care, vehicle 298 Coasting with engine decoupled, coast-
Care, washing the vehicle 297 ing 237
Cargo area 220 Coasting with idling engine 237
Cargo area, adapting size 224 Combination switch, see Turn signals 111
Cargo area, enlarging 222 Combi switch, see Wiper system 112, 116
Cargo area lid 78 Comfort Access 76
Cargo area, loading 221 Comfort entry 71
Cargo area, storage compartments 222 Compartments in the doors 217
Cargo cover 222 Compass 211
Cargo position, rear seat backrest 222 Compatible devices, see Suitable devi-
Cargo, stowing and securing 221 ces 58
311
Compressor 258 D
Computer, see Onboard Computer 139
Condensation on windows 206 Damage, tires 255
Condensation under the vehicle 231 Dashboard 213
Condition Based Service CBS 278 Data memory 12
Configuring driving program 178 Data protection, settings 56
Confirmation signal 83 Data, technical 304
Connecting device 57 Date 54
Connecting mobile phone 57 Date display 135
Connecting smartphone 57 Daytime pedestrian collision mitiga-
Connecting telephone 57 tion 170
Connections 57 Daytime running lights 150
Consumption, see Average consump- DCC, see Cruise control 186
tion 140 Decorative trim 213
Consumption, see Current consump- Defrosting, see Defrosting the win-
tion 136 dows 202
Contacts, see Owner's Handbook for Naviga- Defrosting, see Windows, defrosting 206
tion, Entertainment, Communication 8 Defrosting the windows 202
Continued driving with a flat tire 161, 164 Deleting personal data 56
Control Display 44 Deletion of personal data 56
Control Display, settings 53 Destination distance 141
Controller 44 Device list 57
Control systems, driving stability 175 Digital clock 135
Convenient closing 72 Digital compass 211
Convenient opening 71 Dimensions 304
Coolant 276 Dimmable exterior mirrors 97
Cooling, maximum 204 Dimmable interior mirror 98
Cooling system 276 Direction indicator, see Turn signals 111
Cornering light 150 Display and input 42
Corrosion on brake discs 231 Display, electronic, instrument cluster 130
Cosmetic mirror 213 Display, engine temperature 141
Coupling, see Pairing 57 Display, GREEN Mode 234
Courtesy lights during unlocking 71 Display lighting, see Instrument light-
Courtesy lights with the vehicle locked 72 ing 152
Cruise control 186 Displays 129
Cruise control, active 180 Displays, care 300
Cruise control with distance control, see Disposal, coolant 277
Camera-based cruise control 180 Disposal, vehicle battery 288
Cruise control without distance control, see Distance control, see PDC 188
Cruise control 186 Distance to destination 141
Cruising range 135 Divided screen view, split screen 43
Cup holder 218 Drive-off assistant 178
Current consumption 136 Drive-off assistant, see DSC 175
Driver assistance, see Intelligent
Safety 165
Driver profiles 79
312
Driver profiles, exporting profiles 81 Engine compartment 269

Driver profiles, importing profiles 81 Engine compartment, working in 270
Driving Dynamics Control, see MINI Driv- Engine coolant 276
ing Modes switch 177 Engine idling when driving, coasting 237
Driving Excitement, SPORT 142 Engine oil 272
Driving instructions 0 Engine oil, adding 273
Driving instructions, break-in 228 Engine oil change 275
Driving mode, GREEN 234 Engine oil filler neck 273
Driving mode, GREEN Driving style analy- Engine oil types to add 274
sis 238 Engine start, jump-starting 291
Driving modes 177 Engine start, see Starting the engine 106
Driving notes, general 229 Engine stop 107
Driving on racetracks 232 Engine temperature, display 141
Driving stability control systems 175 Entering a destination, see Owner's Hand-
Driving style analysis 238 book for Navigation, Entertainment, Com-
Driving tip, GREEN tip 236 munication 8
Driving tips 229 Entering an address, navigation, see Own-
Drying air, see Air conditioning 201, 204 er's Manual for Navigation, Entertainment
DSC Dynamic Stability Control 175 and Communication 8
DTC Dynamic Traction Control 176 Entering a vehicle wash 297
DVD, video, see Owner's Handbook for Nav- Equipment, interior 208
igation, Entertainment, Communication 8 Error displays, see Check Control 130
Dynamic damping, see Adaptive chas- ESP Electronic Stability Program, see
sis 177 DSC 175
Dynamic Stability Control DSC 175 Exchanging wheels/tires 255
Dynamic Traction Control DTC 176 Exhaust gas system 229
Exiting a vehicle wash 297
E Exterior mirror, automatic dimming fea-
ture 97
Electronic displays, instrument cluster 130 Exterior mirrors 96
Electronic oil measurement 272 Exterior mirrors, Automatic Curb Moni-
Electronic Stability Program ESP, see tor 97
DSC 175 Exterior mirrors, malfunction 97
E-mail, see Owner's Handbook for Naviga- External start 291
tion, Entertainment, Communication 8 External temperature display 135
Emergency release, fuel filler flap 243 External temperature warning 135
Emergency Request 290 Eyes for securing cargo 221
Emergency service, see Breakdown assis-
tance 289 F
Emergency unlocking, transmission
lock 127 Failure message, see Check Control 130
Emergency wheel, compact wheel, see False alarm, see Unintentional alarm 84
Emergency wheel 267 Fan, see Air flow 202, 205
Energy control 136 Fastening safety belts, see Safety belts 92
Engine, automatic Start/Stop function 108 Fatigue alert 173
Engine, automatic switch-off 108 Filler neck for engine oil 273
313
Filter, see Microfilter 202 G

Filter, see Microfilter/activated-charcoal fil-
ter 206 Garage door opener, see Integrated Univer-
Finding charging stations, see Charging sta- sal Remote Control 208
tions and points of interest, see Owner's Gasoline 244
Handbook for Navigation, Entertainment, Gear shift indicator 137
Communication 8 General driving notes 229
Fine wood, care 299 General settings 53
First-aid kit 289 Glare shield 213
Fish, MINIMALISM display 238 Glass sunroof, initialize the system 89
Flat tire, changing wheels 262 Glass sunroof, see Panoramic glass sun-
Flat Tire Monitor FTM 163 roof 87
Flat tire, repairing 257 Glove compartment 216
Flat tire, Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 158 GPS geolocation, vehicle position 54
Flat tire, warning light 159, 163 GPS, navigation, see Owner's Handbook for
Flooding 229 Navigation, Entertainment, Communica-
Floor carpet, care 300 tion 8
Floor mats, care 300 GREEN bonus range 236
Fogged up windows 202 GREEN Mode 234
Fold-away position, windshield wip- GREEN - program, driving dynamics 177
ers 115, 118 GREEN tip, driving tip 236
Fold back rear seat backrests 222 Gross vehicle weight, approved 305
Foot brake 230 Ground clearance 231
For Your Own Safety 10
Front airbags 154
Front fog lights 151 H
Front fog lights, LED, bulb replace-
ment 283 Halogen headlights 282
Front-seat passenger airbags, automatic de- Handbrake, see Parking brake 111
activation 156 Hand-held transmitter, alternating
Front-seat passenger airbags, indicator code 209
light 157 Hands-free device, see Owner's Handbook
Front seats 90 for Navigation, Entertainment, Communi-
FTM Flat Tire Monitor 163 cation 8
Fuel 244 Hazard warning flashers 289
Fuel cap 242 Head airbag 155
Fuel filler flap 242 Headlight control, automatic 149
Fuel gauge 134 Headlight courtesy delay feature 149
Fuel quality 244 Headlight flasher 112
Fuel recommendation 244 Headlight glass 282
Fuel, tank capacity 307 Headlights, care 298
Fuse 288 Head restraints, front 94
Head restraints, rear 95
Head-up Display 144
Head-up Display, shift point indicator 147
Head-up Display, sport displays 146
314
Head-up Display, standard view 145 Initialize, Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 159
Heavy cargo, stowing cargo 221 Initializing, Flat Tire Monitor FTM 163
High-beam Assistant 150 Input and display 42
High beams 112 Instrument cluster 129
High beams/low beams, see High-beam As- Instrument cluster, electronic displays 130
sistant 150 Instrument lighting 152
Hills 230 Integrated key 74
Hill start assistant, see Drive-off assis- Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehi-
tant 178 cle 65
Holder for beverages 218 Integrated Universal Remote Control 208
HomeLink, see Integrated Universal Remote Intelligent Auto Start/Stop function 110
Control 208 Intelligent emergency call 290
Homepage 8 Intelligent Safety 165
Hood 270 Intended use 10
Horn 38 Intensity, AUTO program 205
Hot exhaust gas system 229 Interior equipment 208
Hotline, see Owner's Handbook for Naviga- Interior lights 152
tion, Entertainment, Communication 8 Interior lights during unlocking 71
HUD Head-up Display 144 Interior lights with the vehicle locked 72
Hydroplaning 229 Interior mirror 96
Interior mirror, automatic dimming fea-
I ture 98
Interior mirror, compass 211
Ice warning, see External temperature Interior mirror, manually dimmable 98
warning 135 Interior motion sensor 84
Icy roads, see External temperature warn- Internet site 8
ing 135 Interval display, service requirements 136
Identification marks, tires 252 Interval mode 113, 116
Identification number, see Vehicle identifi- In the vicinity of the center console 40
cation number 15 In the vicinity of the roofliner 41
Ignition off 105 In the vicinity of the steering wheel 38
Ignition on 105 IOM, see Integrated Owner's Manual in the
Illuminated ring, central instrument clus- vehicle 65
ter 143
Indication of a flat tire 159, 163 J
Indicator light, see Check Control 130
Individual air distribution 202, 205 Jacking points for the vehicle jack 265
Individual settings, see Driver profiles 79 Jam protection system, glass sunroof 88
Inductive charging of a smartphone, see Jam protection system, windows 86
Wireless charging tray, see Owner's Jump-starting 291
Manual for Navigation, Entertainment,
Communication 8 K
Inflation pressure, tires 246
Inflation pressure warning, tires 163 Keyless Go, see Comfort Access 76
Info Display, see Onboard Computer 139 Key, see Integrated key 74
Information 8
315
Key, see Vehicle key 70 M

Kickdown, Steptronic transmission 124
Knee airbag 155 Maintenance 278
Maintenance requirements 278
L Maintenance, service requirements 136
Maintenance system, MINI 278
Label on recommended tires 256 Make-up mirror 213
Label, runflat tires 257 Malfunction displays, see Check Con-
Language, on the Control Display 53 trol 130
Lashing eyes 221 Manual air distribution 202, 205
LATCH child restraint fixing system 102 Manual air flow 202, 205
Launch Control 128 Manual mode, transmission 125
Leather, care 299 Manual operation, fuel filler flap 243
LED ring, central instrument cluster 143 Manual operation, PDC Park Distance Con-
LEDs, light-emitting diodes 281 trol 190
Letters and numbers, entering 46 Manual operation, rearview camera 192
Light 148 Manual transmission 120
Light-alloy wheels, care 299 Manufacturer of the MINI 10
Light-emitting diodes, LEDs 281 Map update, see Owner's Handbook for Nav-
Lighter 213 igation, Entertainment, Communication 8
Lighting 148 Matte finish 298
Light replacement 281 Maximum cooling 204
Light replacement, front 282, 283 Maximum speed, display 137
Light replacement, rear 284 Maximum speed, winter tires 256
Light replacement, side 286 Measurement, units of 54
Lights and bulbs 281 Mechanical key 74
Light switch 148 Media of the Owner's Manual 65
List of all messages 55 Medical kit 289
Load 221 Menu in instrument cluster 139
Loading 220 Menus, Central Information Display
Loading position 222 (CID) 45
Location, vehicle position 54 Messages 55
Locking, automatic 82 Messages, see Check Control 130
Locking, from inside 75 Microfilter 202, 206
Locking, see Opening and Closing 70 MID - program, driving dynamics 177
Locking, settings 82 MINI Connected, see Owner's Handbook for
Low beams 148 Navigation, Entertainment, Communica-
Low beams, automatic, see High-beam As- tion 8
sistant 150 MINI driving modes 177
Lower back support, mechanical 91 MINI logo projection during unlocking 71
Lug bolt lock 264 MINI maintenance system 278
Luggage rack, see Roof-mounted luggage MINIMALISM analyzer 238
rack 231 MINIMALISM information 237
Lumbar support, mechanical 91 Minimum tread, tires 254
Mirrors 96
316
Mobile communication devices in the vehi- Oil filler neck 273

cle 229 Oil types to add, engine 274
Mobility System 258 Onboard Computer 139
Modifications, technical, see For Your Own Onboard Diagnostics OBD 279
Safety 10 Onboard literature, printed 65
Moisture in headlight 282 Onboard vehicle tool kit 280
Monitor, see Control Display 44 On-call service, see Breakdown assis-
Mounting of child restraint systems 101 tance 289
MP3 player, see Audio, see Owner's Hand- Opening and Closing 70
book for Navigation, Entertainment, Com- Opening, from inside 75
munication 8 Operating concept Central Information Dis-
Multifunction steering wheel, buttons 38 play (CID) operating concept 42
Multimedia, see Owner's Manual for Naviga- Operating menus, Central Information Dis-
tion, Entertainment and Communication 8 play (CID) 42
Music hard disk, see Owner's Handbook for Operation via the Controller 45
Navigation, Entertainment, Communica- Operation via touchscreen 47
tion 8 Optional equipment 9
Owner's Manual, printed 65
N
P
Navigation, see Owner's Manual for Naviga-
tion, Entertainment and Communication 8 Paint, vehicle 298
Neck restraints, front, see Head re- Panic alarm, see Panic mode 84
straints 94 Panic mode 84
Neck restraints, rear, see Head re- Panoramic glass sunroof 87
straints 95 Parallel parking assistant 195
Neutral cleaner, see Wheel cleaner 299 Park Distance Control PDC 188
New wheels and tires 255 Parked-car ventilation 207
Notes, see Owner's Handbook for Naviga- Parked vehicle, condensation 231
tion, Entertainment, Communication 8 Parking aid, see PDC 188
Parking assistant 195
O Parking brake 111
Parking lights 148
OBD Onboard Diagnostics 279 Parts and accessories 10
Obstacle marking, rearview camera 193 Passenger's side mirror, tilting 97
Octane rating, see Recommended fuel Pathway lines, rearview camera 193
grade 245 PDC Park Distance Control 188
Odometer 134 Performance Control 177
Office, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, Personal profile, see Driver profiles 79
Entertainment and Communication 8 Plastic, care 300
Oil 272 PostCrash — iBrake 174
Oil, adding 273 Power failure 288
Oil change 275 Power windows 85
Oil change interval, service require- Pressure, tires 246
ments 136 Pressure warning, tires 163
Printed onboard literature 65
317
Profiles, see Driver profiles 79 Route, navigation, see Owner's Handbook

Programmable memory buttons, Central In- for Navigation, Entertainment, Communi-
formation Display (CID) 48 cation 8
Protective function, glass sunroof 88 RSC Runflat System Component, see Runflat
Protective function, windows 86 tires 257
Push-and-turn reel, see Controller 44 Rubber components, care 299
Runflat tires 257
R
S
Racetrack operation 232
Radiator fluid 276 Safe braking 230
Radio-ready state 106 Safety belt reminder for driver's seat and
Radio, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, front passenger seat 94
Entertainment and Communication 8 Safety belts 92
Rain sensor 113, 116 Safety belts, care 300
Ratchet straps 221 Safety locks, doors, and windows 104
Rear lights 284 Safety switch, windows 86
Rear luggage rack 231 Safety systems, airbags 154
Rearview camera 191 Saving fuel 233
Rear window defroster 202, 206 Screen, see Control Display 44
Rear window wiper, operation 114, 118 Screwdriver 280
Recirculated-air filter 206 Sealant, see Mobility System 258
Recirculated-air mode 201, 205 Seat heating, front 92
Recommended fuel grade 245 Seating position for children 100
Recommended tire brands 256 Seats, front 90
Refueling 242 Securing cargo 221
Remaining range 135 Selection list in instrument cluster 139
Remote control, universal 208 Sensors, care 300
Replacing parts 280 Service and warranty 11
Replacing the battery, vehicle key 73 Service requirements, Condition Based
Replacing wheels/tires 255 Service CBS 278
Reporting safety malfunctions 15 Service requirements, display 136
RES CNCL button, see Camera-based cruise Servotronic 179
control 180 SET button, see Camera-based cruise con-
RES CNCL button, see Cruise control 186 trol 180
Reserve warning, see Range 135 SET button, see Cruise control 186
Reset, Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 159 Settings, locking/unlocking 82
Retreaded tires 256 Settings, mirrors 96
Roadside Assistance, see Breakdown assis- Settings on the Control Display 53
tance 289 Shift gate rotary switch 177
Roadside parking lights 149 Shift paddles on the steering wheel 126
Rolling code hand-held transmitter 209 Shift point indicator, Head-up Display 147
RON recommended fuel grade 245 Side airbag 154
Roofliner 41 Signaling, horn 38
Roof-mounted luggage rack 231 Signals when unlocking 83
Sitting safely 90
318
Size 304 Steptronic transmission 121

Slide/tilt glass roof 87 Steptronic transmission with double clutch,
SMS, see Short messages, see Owner's see Steptronic transmission 121
Handbook for Navigation, Entertainment, Stopping the engine 107
Communication 8 Storage compartments 216
SMS text messages, supplementary 134 Storage, tires 257
Snow chains 262 Storing the vehicle 301
Socket 214 Stowing and securing cargo 221
Socket, OBD Onboard Diagnostics 279 Suitable devices 58
Software update 63 Suitable mobile phones 58
SOS button 290 Summer tires, tread 254
Sound output, see Owner's Handbook for Sun visor 213
Navigation, Entertainment, Communica- Supplementary Owner's Manuals 65
tion 8 Supplementary SMS text messages 134
Spare tire, see Emergency wheel 267 Switch for driving dynamics 177
Speed, average 141 Switch, see Cockpit 38
Speed Limit Info 137 Symbols 9
Speed Limit Info, Onboard Computer 141
Speed limits, display 137 T
Speed warning 143
Split screen 43 Tachometer 134
Sport displays 142 Tailgate 78
Sport displays, Head-up Display 146 Tailgate via remote control 72
SPORT program, driving dynamics 178 Tail lights 284
Sport program, transmission 125 Technical changes, see For Your Own
Stability control systems 175 Safety 10
Standard equipment 9 Technical data 304
Standard view, Head-up Display 145 Telephone, see Owner's Manual for Naviga-
Stars, MINIMALISM display 238 tion, Entertainment and Communication 8
Start/stop, automatic function 108 Teleservices, see Owner's Handbook for
Start/Stop button 105 Navigation, Entertainment, Communica-
Starting the engine 106 tion 8
Stations, AM/FM, see Owner's Handbook Temperature, air conditioner 201
for Navigation, Entertainment, Communi- Temperature, automatic climate con-
cation 8 trol 203
Status control display, tires 158 Temperature display for external tempera-
Status information, Central Information Dis- ture 135
play (CID) 43 Temperature, engine 141
Status of Owner's Manual 9 Terminal, starting aid 292
Status, vehicle 147 Theft alarm system, see Alarm system 83
Steering assistance 179 Thigh support 91
Steering wheel, adjusting 98 Tilt alarm sensor 84
Steptronic Sport transmission, see Step- Tilting, passenger's side mirror 97
tronic transmission 121 Time 53
Steptronic Sport transmission with double Time of arrival 141
clutch, see Steptronic transmission 121 Tire damage 255
319
Tire identification marks 252 U

Tire inflation pressure 246
Tire inflation pressure monitor, see Unintentional alarm 84
FTM 163 Units of measurement 54
Tire pressure 246 Universal remote control 208
Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 158 Unlocking, automatic 82
Tire repair kit, see Mobility System 258 Unlocking, see Opening and Closing 70
Tires, changing 255 Unlocking, settings 82
Tire sealant, see Mobility System 258 Updates made after the editorial deadline 9
Tires, everything on wheels and tires 246 Upholstery care 299
Tires, runflat 257 USB connection 60
Tire tread 254 USB interface, position in vehicle 215
Tone, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, USB port, see USB interface 215
Entertainment and Communication 8 Used battery, disposing of 288
Tools 280 Use, intended 10
Total vehicle weight 305 Using a smartphone via voice activation 51
Touchscreen 47
Towing 293
Tow-starting 293 V
TPM Tire Pressure Monitor 158
Traction control 176 Vanity mirror 213
TRACTION driving mode, driving dynam- Vehicle battery 287
ics 176 Vehicle, break-in 228
Traffic bulletins, see Owner's Handbook for Vehicle care 298
Navigation, Entertainment, Communica- Vehicle care products 298
tion 8 Vehicle features and options 9
Transmission lock, electronic unlock- Vehicle identification number 15
ing 127 Vehicle jack 265
Transmission lock, releasing manually 127 Vehicle key, additional 73
Transmission, manual transmission 120 Vehicle key, loss 73
Transmission, see Steptronic transmis- Vehicle key, malfunction 73
sion 121 Vehicle key, opening/closing 70
Transporting children safely 100 Vehicle key, replacing the battery 73
Tread, tires 254 Vehicle key, see Vehicle key 70
Trip computer 141 Vehicle paint 298
Triple turn signal activation 111 Vehicle position, vehicle location 54
Trip odometer 134 Vehicle status 147
Trip recorder, see Trip odometer 134 Vehicle storage 301
Turning radius lines, rearview camera 193 Vehicle wash 297
Turn signal, front 282, 283 Vehicle wash, automatic 297
Turn signal, indicator light 132 Vehicle, washing 297
Turn signal, side 286 Ventilation 206
Turn signals, operation 111 Ventilation, see Parked-car ventilation 207
Turn signals, rear, bulb replacement 284 VIN, see Vehicle identification number 15
Voice activation system 49
320
Voice command response, see Owner's Wireless charging tray, see Owner's Manual
Handbook for Navigation, Entertainment, for Navigation, Entertainment, Communi-
Communication 8 cation 8
Wood, care 299
W Word match concept, navigation 42
Wrench 280
Warning and indicator lights, see Check
Control 130
Warning displays, see Check Control 130
Warning messages, see Check Control 130
Warning triangle 289
Warranty 10
Washer fluid 119
Washer nozzles, windshield 114, 118
Washing the vehicle 297
Water on roads 229
Weights 305
Welcome lights 149
Welcome lights during unlocking 71
Wheel cleaner 299
Wheels, changing 255
Wheels, everything on wheels and
tires 246
Wheels, Flat Tire Monitor FTM 163
Wheels, Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 158
Windows, powered 85
Windshield cleaning system 112, 116
Windshield defroster 202, 206
Windshield washer fluid 119
Windshield washer nozzles 114, 118
Windshield wipers, fold-away posi-
tion 115, 118
Windshield wipers, see Wiper sys-
tem 112, 116
Winter storage, care 301
Winter tires, suitable tires 256
Winter tires, tread 254
Wiper blades, replacing 280
Wiper fluid 119
Wiper system 112, 116
Wireless charging of a smartphone, see
Wireless charging tray, see Owner's
Manual for Navigation, Entertainment,
Communication 8
321
01402667112 ue
*BL266711200T*
California Proposition 65
Warning
For vehicles sold in California:

MINI MOTORER'S GUIDE APP.
Your customized information about the vehicle in an app.
Optimized for smartphones & tablets. Can be used offline.
01402667112 ue
*BL266711200T*

2020-Mini-Hardtop-2-Door-12 Owners Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

2020-Mini-Hardtop-2-Door-12 Owners Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

LINK:

CONTENT & A-Z

Navigation, Entertainment and Communication can be called up via the

© 2019 Bayerische Motoren Werke

Additional sources of informa-

Symbols and displays Vehicle features and options

Symbols on vehicle components Updates made after the editorial

California Proposition 65 Warning your vehicle. For more information go to

Specifications for required maintenance Operating data in the vehicle

is recorded by the EDR under normal driv- Windshield

other information about motor vehicle

For Canadian customers

Displays and control elements

On the driver's or front passenger's door In the vicinity of the steering

Locking the vehicle

1 Low beams, fog lights

Driver's door Central Information Display (CID)

1 Safety switch Opens the Media/Radio menu.

Opens the previous display.

Opens the Options menu.

Activating the voice activation system

1. Press the button on the steering

Terminating the voice activation system

Help on the voice activation system

Information on Emergency Requests

Set-up and use

Adjusting the head restraint

1. Fold the lever down.

Entering the rear Navigation destination entry

Entering the address

Starting destination guidance

Switching on Bluetooth and CarPlay

Pairing the iPhone with CarPlay

Manual transmission: switching off

Start/stop engine Applying

Manual transmission: starting

Manual transmission Steptronic transmission, Sport and

Selector lever lock

Turn signal Lights and lighting

Automatic headlight control.

– On: press the lever past the resistance

Canada: roadside parking light Wiper system

To illuminate the vehicle on one side.

– Rain sensor: position 1. Set interval or sensitivity of the rain

Brief wipe and switching off

Turn the thumbwheel on the wiper lever.

Cleaning the windshield

Activating/deactivating Pull the lever.

Canada: wiper system

To activate: press the lever up once from its

Tap up the lever or press it past the resist-

Brief wipe and switching off

Turn the thumbwheel on the wiper lever.

Cleaning the windshield

Press the button on the wiper lever.

Button Function Button Function

Rear window defroster.

Automatic climate control Fuel cap

Air distribution, manual.

Wheels and tires Electronic oil measurement

Displaying the engine oil level

Adding engine oil

For 3-door models: